Podcast Guesting Strategies To Establish Thought Leadership – with Angie Trueblood and April Beach (Episode 273)

    Podcast Guesting Strategies To Establish Thought Leadership - with Angie Trueblood

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Coaches and consultants who are ready to level up and become know, and are looking for higher level strategies to use podcast guesting to increase sales and expand their reach.

    Summary:

    This episode is part of our “Becoming Known” Series of curated shows and cherry picked experts to level up your brand and establish thought leadership in your space. 
     
    Today, we’re detailing a higher level strategy to use podcast guesting to grow your business. We all know that podcast guesting is a great way to be seen, but what we’re talking about today surpasses the basics of “how to pitch”. 
     
    Our guest expert Angie Trueblood (The Podwize Group), unfolds powerful strategies used by thought leaders to expand awareness of their expertise that you may not have considered. In this show Angie shares insider thoughts to approach shows, why you should reconsider your signature talk titles based on your objectives, how to research hosts and analyze if they’re a good fit and how you could actually be holding back your brand from growth based on your guesting strategy. 
     
    Don’t miss this episode if: 
    • You use podcast guesting as lead generation
    • You need to rise above the noise in your niche
    • You’re a coach, consultant or expert and it’s time to separate yourself form the everyday work and start moving to leadership
    • You have been pitching the big shows and it’s not working 

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
     
    1. Understand immediate changes you need to make to your show titles based on your objective
    2. Rethink your biggest wish list shows and search for off-grid podcasts with more power for your brand
    3. Choose one action to implement that will move you towards faster recognition to become known
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    273

    [00:00:45] April: Hi you guys. Welcome to episode number 273. I am excited to bring this show particularly, It disrupts the way that most people are taught about podcast guesting.

    [00:00:59] April: So we’ve talked about [00:01:00] podcast guesting a lot here on this show, but this is for those of you that are really, uh, interested in working intentionally to use podcast guesting to become known. This is for those of you who are either new in business, but really this is primarily for those of you guys who are scaling companies.

    [00:01:16] April: All right? This show we talk about strategies to become known and establish yourself as a thought leader, not just to go on shows that have a ton of listeners, and, uh, hopefully get a couple of downloads of your PDF freebie. We’re beyond that and we’re talking about the Nick’s level of using podcast guesting for thought leadership and become known.

    [00:01:37] April: On this show. So if you are an established business, you’re in the process of scaling, you’re a coach, an author, a speaker, a consultant, a a niche service expert, and you want to make sure everybody knows that you are the the leader of a different way of thinking in a different space, or you have a methodology or you have a program that’s really leading [00:02:00] the way.

    [00:02:00] April: If you still feel like perhaps you’re that best kept secret, this is the show for you to listen. At the end of this show, you are gonna be given very specific implementation steps. We actually have an implementation section at the end of that, so make sure you hang out for that and you’re gonna know which shows are the right ones for you.

    [00:02:18] April: You’re even gonna rethink your podcast pitching topics, and we’re gonna talk about the power of networking and where to look for the right host. And the right shows for you. My guest today is a very good friend. We’ve been friends for quite a few years now. Since I’ve had this Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast.

    [00:02:38] April: She has truly sent us the best guests that are, are just ready to deliver you guys gold. As a matter of fact, have you’ve been a listener for years? Quite a few of our amazing guests have come from this incredible woman and her team. This is Angie Trueblood that’s chatting with you here today on the show.

    [00:02:53] April: She’s the founder of the pod group and host of the Go Pitch Yourself podcast, and she uses her entrepreneurial [00:03:00] spirit, innovative thinking, and super connector powers to deeply support business owners who are using podcast guesting as the core. Of their business growth. Now, Angie, on a personal side, is super passionate about normalizing the voices of women in leadership positions, which she feels privileged to play an active role in through her work and kind of a funny little thing, Angie and I are both like, Bird watching dorks.

    [00:03:28] April: So over Christmas we were like sending each other these pictures of these like bird feeders that have cameras in them that you can like identify the kind of bird that’s eating on your bird feeder. Uh, so there’s just a little bit behind the scenes of, of how much we geek out. When we talk, whether it’s about ridiculous, uh, bird feeders or finding you guys the right shows to become known.

    [00:03:49] April: So if this is what you’re looking for, I promise you I don’t talk about bird feeders with her on this show. Just sharing a little behind the scenes with you guys, uh, then we’re gonna dive into it today. All of the [00:04:00] show notes can be found by visiting sweet life podcast.com/ 2 73. This is episode number 273.

    [00:04:08] April: The show notes will contain the transcription. All of the downloads, the links to connect with Angie and the summary of what we talked about. So they are pretty valuable. If you haven’t been to our show notes, uh, it’s, it’s kind of a, a hidden patch of gold if you haven’t tapped into that. All right, so if you guys are ready, let’s go ahead and dive in with Angie Trueblood.

    [00:04:30] April: Hey you guys. I’m so glad that you’re here. I am here with my friend Angie Trueblood. And Angie has really been, uh, the guide for us in podcast guesting, as well as her company actually sends the best, my favorite podcast guest over, over to us. Anytime we get something from Angie and her team saying, Hey, listen, you know, you, you should really, I.

    [00:04:53] April: Person. We stop everything that we’re doing and we check it out. So today we’re talking about, and we’re continuing our [00:05:00] series on becoming known. This is episode number 273, and we are diving into the very specifics of why podcast guesting and how podcast guesting can advance your mission to become known.

    [00:05:14] April: And what we’re really gonna dive into today are some things that you probably don’t hear on most shows. How to be a podcast guest or expand your reach through podcast casting. So we’re gonna pull back the curtain, especially for those of you guys that are a bit more advanced in entrepreneurship and help you understand how do you po use podcast guesting to scale your company.

    [00:05:36] April: Angie, welcome. Thank you so much for being 

    [00:05:38] Angie: here. Thank you, friend. It’s so good to see you. 

    [00:05:41] April: I know, I know. We’re on video now, you guys Yeah, if you, if you aren’t watching us on video, I, I, as I said to Angie, we’re doing video, but we actually don’t have it up yet. , uh, we will by then, this will be on YouTube, so you should check it out on YouTube as well.

    [00:05:54] April: So, Angie, you know, when we talk about podcast guesting, it’s. obviously not a big secret. [00:06:00] The podcast guesting, there’s a great opportunity to become known. Mm-hmm. , but what, what are people not being told? What, what is the flow of the masses and what do we wanna talk about to dis today in a way to not necessarily disrupt that, but help our listeners to rethink and maybe catapult above the masses who, who are trying to be podcast.

    [00:06:23] Angie: Yeah, I think it’s a great question. Um, I think the primary thing that we see not happening in the industry is not enough focus being spent on being strategic with who people are pitching, and there’s a myriad of things within the pitches, but I think from a higher level business growth perspective, Really identifying the types of audiences that are going to move your business forward.

    [00:06:50] Angie: Also, identifying the types of hosts that are gonna help you be known and become an authority in a particular space are really important [00:07:00] pieces that I don’t always see happening out there in the podcast. Pitching and guesting conversations. Right. 

    [00:07:07] April: There’s so much pressure to, you know, be on EO Fire or you know, be on, um, online marketing Made Easy and be on these huge shows, and PR coaches teach you to work your way up to those shows.

    [00:07:21] April: But I love the conversations that you and I have about the fact that those shows aren’t really the winning places for many people who need to become known in established thought leaderships. What? You know, why is that? . 

    [00:07:36] Angie: Well, it’s interesting, um, a lot of the bigger shows candidly, are changing their model.

    [00:07:43] Angie: I mean, we could go on about this forever, um, but some of the sh show, the shows are charging to have guests come on. And to me that kind of shifts the intent of the podcast from getting in front of audiences to it being more of like a sponsored collaboration. So that [00:08:00] to me, for some of the bigger shows, is a whole different ball of wax.

    [00:08:05] Angie: I mean, I would say the niche piece of it, and that’s what we do really well. And I think it’s because internally I am a very big nerd. I love research. My background is in science. I just hired someone. She’s from a PR firm. They serve tech companies. So we’re a little nerdy over here at the Budweis Group

    [00:08:23] Angie: But really digging in and seeing. , what are some of these shows that might not have millions of downloads, but have a really engaged audience in a particular vertical? So for me, I even, I almost shift my verticals of who we positioned me as a guest on, like who we outwardly reach out to. Last year I had a big focus.

    [00:08:46] Angie: I wanted to guest on shows that were hosted by podcast producers so that I would have a relationship with producers so they could refer their clients. To us. It has worked in the sense that I’ve created [00:09:00] relationships with a lot of producers, but I’ve also found that a lot of people who have their own podcasts are a little cash strapped, especially if they have a producer and they’re not always willing to come up off of it, you know, to have another level of service provider.

    [00:09:17] Angie: But it was a great mm-hmm. experimentation for us. Um, where I see the best benefit is really identifying these niche. Complimentary service providers, so for your listeners who are scaling, they know who they serve, they know what they do for them. Finding people who serve that same audience but in a different way is really key to getting in front of an audience and actually having a really good shot of having your pitch accepted.

    [00:09:45] April: Right. . It’s a such an interesting strategy. And, and, and I think that there, there, like I said, there’s so much pressure about wanting to be on these really big shows, but what you’re saying and what we talk about is [00:10:00] the gold, like, you know, they, for that, like the riches are in the niches. Well, the podcast is actually, is the same thing and I love that, that.

    [00:10:06] April: I love that you’re talking about that. So our listeners really need to establish their goals in who the decision makers are. So as you guys are listening to this and, and trying to identify how to apply this to your business, I want you to think of your buyer. I want you to think of the person that is going to be making a decision.

    [00:10:26] April: About whether or not they buy your services. If you guys are listening and you’re still in what we call that scale level where you’re selling your coaching and your programs to other individuals, then where are they and where are they not being inundated in, you know, fire hose with people just like you, right?

    [00:10:47] April: Let’s 

    [00:10:47] Angie: talk about that. Yeah. I mean, a great exercise for your listener to do is make a list of the clients that you’ve coached before. I’m sure many are in the hundreds, so the ones that really [00:11:00] stand out in your mind that you were really successful, you saw breakthroughs. And you also enjoyed it. Also, if they send referrals your way, that’s a bonus too.

    [00:11:10] Angie: So make a list of those clients that you’ve had before and then really describe their industry. That’s one thing we do with all of our clients on our intake call is tell, I don’t wanna know that they’re 25 to 35 years old and interested in wellness. Like that’s cool, but tell me. If it’s a b2b, cuz we work with a lot of B2B clients.

    [00:11:33] Angie: Who are they? Like describe them, what industry are they in? Are they copywriters? Did you have this one client who was a Facebook ad strategist? And whatever you did for them was amazing. . Then we wanna find niche shows that are possibly talking to Facebook ad strategists or service providers, like virtual assistants, or, we have a client right now and she helps C-Suite leaders really kind of take [00:12:00] their style and use it as an asset to showing up authentically.

    [00:12:04] Angie: She works with hospital CEOs and law firm partners, so. Finding shows that are talking to attorneys and women in non-traditional spaces, really. So you gotta figure out who are the people that you love working with? Let’s start there because you obviously connect with them. So showing up on a show that is speaking to an audience of those people, they’re gonna pick up on your energy and then when they come to chat with you, you’re both gonna have that.

    [00:12:34] April: right. What a great example and thank you for sharing about your client and this triggers me to wanna share with you guys. So one of the things that the Pod Wise group helped us with is making a list of shows where people who want to license their content, In or create a certification program are listening.

    [00:12:56] April: And so these other shows, it’s not all online business. I have an [00:13:00] online business podcast. Right. Like Yeah. You know, pitching me on another podcast. It’s kind of a lot like mine doesn’t Yeah. Doesn’t make a lot of sense. Right. But where are those other places? What are those other podcasts or what are those other genres, if you will?

    [00:13:15] April: Mm-hmm. that, uh, that my higher level clients that are moving. Licensing content to companies and other businesses, um, might be listening. and they might not even be in the online business space. Yeah. And so that was a really good exercise for us to go to. They could be corporate consultants, you know, that, that want to do this.

    [00:13:37] April: So that was a really good exercise. And so that’s, go through that process like Angie said, and really identify and kind of break that mold that you’ve been told in. You know, just pitch to the big ones. Do the, what is it called? Like the PR ladder where you get bigger and bigger and bigger and bigger. And although that’s, , but sometimes the gold and we’re, we’re seeing this kind [00:14:00] of across the board.

    [00:14:00] April: It’s been a trend for the last eight 18 months that the bigger shows, the bigger programs, so that, you know, people just don’t really wanna be there anymore. They wanna be known. They wanna be in spaces where their people are, where they don’t feel like just a drop of water in the ocean. And so this totally aligns with that.

    [00:14:16] April: Okay. So let’s kind of switch. Yeah, 

    [00:14:18] Angie: go ahead. Well, a lot of the well known shows are catering to beginning business owners. So depending on what your service is, they’re not at a point unless you have a DIY offering. They’re not at a point they will. I mean, rightly so. I did it when I was new in business, but they are there to get as much free content as they can while they’re getting everything lined up.

    [00:14:41] Angie: But if you have packages that are multi thousands of dollars, you, I. I mean people that are business owners like you and I and your listeners, like, think of the shows that you are listening to. Are you listening to online marketing Made Easy? Maybe, but I’m not Anyone. Not anymore. . [00:15:00] Yeah. So you wanna, that’s why the niche piece is so incredible, because no matter what stage of business you’re in, who doesn’t wanna listen to a podcast that’s telling the ins and outs of your specific industry?

    [00:15:14] April: Right. Right, right, right. Yeah. Okay. So hopefully we have you guys rethinking what shows you’re pitching. Angie, I wanna I want you to speak, um, for a minute. You talked about it a little bit before about networking, but when, when we’re talking about becoming known, which is the purpose of this series, how can we use networking through podcasting to become known, uh, you know, regardless of of where the show is Now, let’s kind of switch gears a little bit into, to, to.

    [00:15:43] April: Area of gold that I don’t think that people talk about often enough. 

    [00:15:46] Angie: Yeah, I mean, it is one of my primary networking tools. I am currently most active on other people’s podcasts and LinkedIn, and it really just has to do with you seeing these interviews as an [00:16:00] opportunity to develop a relationship with a host that exists after.

    [00:16:05] Angie: The podcast interview goes live. So that’s the first piece of it is, and it comes back again to strategically choosing the types of shows you’re gonna be on. Maybe the show that you’re pitching is not hosted by, uh, someone that has a giant audience, but if, you know, they’re super connector. We’ve pitched shows recently to where the show is really not that big, but they, the host has a massive LinkedIn following, and so, That’s awesome.

    [00:16:34] Angie: Like let’s get connected with that person because you can interact with them and their network. So the host is one piece of it, and then you can drive listeners to actually connect with you, right? So I think that’s the beauty of podcast guesting and one way to stand out is to show up as a human, to show up as craving relationships and wanting to connect with others and guiding people, like at [00:17:00] this point in the interview.

    [00:17:01] Angie: Your listener knows that I’m active on LinkedIn, right? So it would be a natural thing after this interview, like connect with me on LinkedIn, send me a DM if you have a question about what we’re talking about. So that’s really two pieces, is encourage the listener and talk to the listener. Have them being active, participant in the conversation.

    [00:17:21] Angie: And then, I mean, the host is just priceless. 

    [00:17:25] April: Right. Oh my gosh. That is so smart. And I feel like, um, especially just a side note with LinkedIn and how active you have been on LinkedIn. I have, I have seen your networking on LinkedIn and how much you’re doing on there and it’s just, it’s just been a real game changer for you and I know a lot of other people as well.

    [00:17:43] April: So, um, definitely do connect with, with Angie on LinkedIn. We’ll make sure her LinkedIn profile information is in the show notes. Okay, so today we’ve talked about rethinking, becoming known through podcasting. We have talked about rethinking what everybody’s [00:18:00] saying about wanting to be on the big shows and really hunting for the gold in specific areas, specific niches.

    [00:18:06] April: And you talked about doing so in such a way that establish. Thought leadership in a space. Mm-hmm. . Um, how would you help our listeners understand or define thought leadership is defined in so many different ways. Um, but is there a specific strategy or a specific, how do I wanna ask this question? So it’s useful for our users.

    [00:18:30] April: If somebody says, I wanna be known as the x Y. Yeah. As a person who helps them connect to the right podcasts, what are your first steps to help them accomplish that goal? 

    [00:18:45] Angie: A lot of times what we do is elevate the talk topics that they typically. Bring to us. Uh, we recently had a jumpstart client where we create the strategy, the pitch list, the template, everything, and hand it over to them for their team to pitch.[00:19:00] 

    [00:19:00] Angie: And she came in, so she’s an operations consultant and she came in and had previously pitched herself occasionally. And there was a ton of how-to topics. And I went through and I was like, Nope, you’re not at this level anymore. Nope. The people you wanna work with don’t want to know this stuff. . So a lot of it is about up-leveling.

    [00:19:20] Angie: When I started pitching myself, it was all how to mm-hmm. , here’s like the five things to include in a pitch. It was very how to now we’re elevating into what’s the impact that guesting can have? How can you repurpose and not work yourself to death creating content? So think about to be a thought leader.

    [00:19:41] Angie: It really does. Revolve around having a different idea of your industry or a unique perspective that others don’t have. For us, it’s all about the relationships and the long-term impact it can have. Um, so I would encourage you listener, as you’re especially looking in the scale [00:20:00] phase and looking to connect with pretty high level decision makers.

    [00:20:04] Angie: Get yourself out of the how-to topics, like get yourself into the, this is what’s going on in our industry. This is the impact that the work that I do can have, and this is how we can impact your business, your company, your clients. Wow. 

    [00:20:20] April: That was. everything right there. Um, , I think if it, if you guys are here and you need to hit rewind and re go back 15 seconds, like three times and listen to what Angie just said because now we have wrapped it together in, in a very powerful fireball for you is change the shows you’re looking to pitch yourself on.

    [00:20:42] April: If you’ve been going after the masses. Look for hosts that are very industry specific and where your decision makers are, where your buyers. Know your buyers know if you’re going from the newbie buyer to the advanced [00:21:00] buyer. And finally, and this is gold. Seriously, this is amazing. Thank you for sharing that.

    [00:21:07] April: Change the topics that you are pitching. If you wanna level yourself up as a thought leader in your space. Get away from the basic how-tos, which might be. Um, what do they, what do you call it? Click bait, , you know? Yeah. Might be click bait ways, three 

    [00:21:22] Angie: topics to pitch a podcast . Right, right, right. 

    [00:21:24] April: Uh, and instead talk about things kind of like we’re talking about here in this show.

    [00:21:29] April: This show is not titled How to, how to Grow Whatever Your Business Through Podcast Casting. We did those shows four years ago. Right. Yeah. Now we’re talking about how to rethink podcast guesting and what people aren’t telling you about podcast guesting to truly establish thought leadership in your space and become known.

    [00:21:48] April: And Angie is our go-to person. I think I’ve made that really clear. Um, just really appreciate her work. Um, it, I also will say this, if your business is to the level where you have [00:22:00] teams pitching, Angie’s company is really great with that . Okay? So also if you’re listening, if you’re self pitching, that’s awesome.

    [00:22:08] April: Like keep it up, keep, keep up the work. Make sure that you’re being mindful about your pitching, and we’re gonna connect you with Angie and resources to do this if you’re to that place where you have your other, your teams. Pitching and you’re building teams to pitch you. Um, that’s really what we lean on a lot for Angie, and a lot of our higher level clients do that as well.

    [00:22:29] April: So, okay. Let’s, let’s wrap this all up. What, uh, what did I not ask you in this consideration of, of using podcast guesting to become known at a higher level that maybe I should have? Was there something that I didn’t cover that we would, we would be doing our listeners a disservice if, if we didn’t quickly hit.

    [00:22:47] Angie: I mean, I think a lot of it is then you get the interview and you show up to record. How can you stand out? How can people who are listening develop an understanding of who you are and how you serve? [00:23:00] And it is about storytelling. It is about sharing some of the specific examples that I shared today about the operations client, about the client that has, you know, working with attorneys.

    [00:23:12] Angie: Get a couple of those. Like I took notes before we popped on live because I knew the angle and the direction that our conversation was gonna take, and so you need to be prepared to create some depth to your stories because just sharing what you think. It doesn’t trigger the audience to picture you as a thought leader, but when I have clients that serve CEOs of hospital systems, that seems to elevate what I do and who I do it for.

    [00:23:44] Angie: So, especially as you’re stepping into thought leadership, have some higher level stories, higher level examples, kind of on cue in order to give more descriptors to your answers of question. 

    [00:23:58] April: Great, great. And, and people [00:24:00] connect so much better through stories as for sure as well. And, uh, and you. More credible for sure, even though we know you’re already credible.

    [00:24:08] April: Otherwise you wouldn’t be here listening to this show and figuring out how to do this. So we, we all know the three of us know you are super credible. We just wanna make sure everybody else that hears you knows that, that you’re super credible and you’ve helped other people before. 

    [00:24:20] Angie: Um, yeah, well, and stories.

    [00:24:22] Angie: I mean, that’s what I wanna listen to when I listen to a podcast. I don’t, I don’t need another how to at the moment. I need like, just gimme examples. I wanna hear what other people are doing. 

    [00:24:31] April: Right. I love that. I love that. All right, well thank you so much for being on the show today. Okay, so implementation.

    [00:24:37] April: Next steps. How do people connect with you? What, what is the best way? And guys, we will drop this in the show notes as well, but take a pause here for a second and go and connect with Angie where she’s about to 

    [00:24:51] Angie: tell you too. Yeah. How is that the best place to. Any way to connect with me is over on the website, the pod wise group.com.

    [00:24:59] Angie: It’s pod [00:25:00] wise, with a z slash hi there, and there will be links to learning about our services. We have them if you want us to pitch you, if you want us to prep what you or your team. Pitch you and we even have strategy sessions. Um, for those of you who are looking for like the actual pitch, because I know that is always a question I get even though we were not talking about it.

    [00:25:22] Angie: Um, there’s a download there so you can see pitches that my team and I have actually sent and my links for LinkedIn are there as well. So all the places that you might wanna connect depending on where you are in your journey is at the pod wises group.com/hi. 

    [00:25:37] April: resources of gold. You guys, . All right, Angie, thank you so much.

    [00:25:41] April: Thank you for being my friend and somebody I know always tells me the truth about anything that we’re talking about in podcasting. Thank you for sending us some of the top notch best guests who have been here on this show. And thank you for pouring out so much gold to our listeners and always just freely giving first, and I just really 

    [00:25:59] Angie: appreciate [00:26:00] you for that.

    [00:26:00] Angie: Yeah, same too, friend. Thanks for having. 

    [00:26:03] April: Of course. All right guys, well, there you have it from the insider herself, Angie Trueblood with the pod Wise group. So let’s talk really quick about your implementation steps. First of all, I use Angie. I love her. Obviously she didn’t pay to be on this show. I asked her to come on here and be part of this becoming known series because I know she’s so incredibly valuable for you as.

    [00:26:25] April: Been for us. So definitely check out what they are doing over there, whether or not you’re in a position to work with them, get in their ecosystem because you’re gonna be glad you did. So let’s talk about your implementation steps after this show. What are we gonna do to implement? So here’s really quick wrap up for you.

    [00:26:44] April: This was a big concept we. It was a change of thinking to what you might have done before regarding podcast guesting. So pick one thing that you are going to do or think about or strategize from what we [00:27:00] talked about in this show. I can tell you right now as a team, we’re gonna be going back and making sure the titles of the shows that I am speaking on, the titles of the topics are, are, are not these basic topics.

    [00:27:12] April: based on our audiences that we work with. Now we’re gonna revisit our topics, which of course Angie and our team help us do as well. I think that that was a, a huge piece of gold in this show, but it depends on who you guys are trying to reach, right? So if you’re trying to reach those people that are new to your space, whatever it is you do, then those how-tos are amazing.

    [00:27:36] April: If you’re trying to use this show to establish thought leadership for yourself, then let’s rethink the topic. So you are pitching in what you’re saying on the, on the shows that you become a guest on. Let’s help you to make sure that you are helping others rethink, and therefore that’s gonna level you up more towards thought leadership in your space.

    [00:27:57] April: And of course, solve the, uh, [00:28:00] the, the goal that we’re talking about here, which is becoming. So if that, if you’re good to go and you think your titles are great, what else can you do? You can start researching shows that are very niche specific, very, uh, not necessarily very smaller shows, but smaller shows that have a good engagement.

    [00:28:19] April: Check out their social media handles. Check out, their LinkedIn. LinkedIn has just been so hot, especially for the last couple of of months, especially the last 18 months. So find out how much interaction is happening with those shows. It doesn’t matter if they don’t have a gazillion downloads, if they have an interactive audience in, like Angie said, a host that has a bigger following that has a relationship with our listeners.

    [00:28:42] April: That could be the, the gold target that you’re going after as far as podcast guesting. That’s your implementation wrap up. Thank you so much for listening to this show. I’m April Beach. If we don’t know each other, it’s so great to meet you. Uh, you can find all the information that we shared from this [00:29:00] episode by going to SweetLifepodcast.com/273.

    [00:29:05] April: This is episode number 273. And all the other resources we have for you are at sweetlifeco.com. All right, you guys have a fantastic day. Talk to you soon.

     
     

    (Becoming Known) How To Build A Press Worthy Personal Brand – with Brielle Cotterman (Episode 272)

    How to Gain Press by Building Your Personal Brand

    &nbsp

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    This episode is incredible for entrepreneurs who are ready to scale by gaining media attention.

    Summary:

    If you’re looking to grow your personal brand and increase sales then using press is a smart avenue.  There are many ways to approach and land proper publicity. In this episode we talked to Brielle Cotterman  about how to build a foundation of celebrity and a press worthy personal brand through crafting stories. 

     

    Brielle breaks down her profitable storytelling framework and you will walk away from this episode knowing the three stories every entrepreneur must have in their bank to grow your business through press, and gain attention of highly sought after media.In this show we also break down the foundation of celebrity and the aspects of your business that you  want to have designed and structured before you move into the strategies here. 

     

    This is an excellent  episode for entrepreneurs who are ready to scale by gaining media attention. In order to leverage the  

    training taught in this episode you must have your online offers engineered that are ready to scale and a complete client journey laid out and ready to go. If you don’t have those things in place yet visit www.sweetlifeco.com

     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

     
     
    1. Know the Foundations of Celebrity
    2. Know the three stories that every entrepreneur must have
    3. Learn Brielle’s profitable storytelling format
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    272

     

    [00:00:44] April: Hi you guys. Welcome back to the show. I’m so glad you’re here for the NextGen of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur in Business Podcast and all the shows that I have lined up for you for the next five years. All of everything we’re gonna be talking about today can be found at [00:01:00] sweetlifeco.com. And all of our faithful listeners, you guys know that this is where you come to for business coaching and strategy that other coaches will charge you thousands for. 

    [00:01:09] April: Today’s episode is very powerful. My friend Brielle Cotterman is here and we’re gonna talk about how to create a press worthy personal brand. Who is this for? This is for those of you guys who are scaling your business. So we’ve already done a good job creating your offers. We have the client journey engineered. We know what’s gonna happen to all of the people we’re bringing into your business, after you earn media and press attention, after you speak on stages, that part is ready to go.

    [00:01:35] April: And now we’re talking about how to actually get you onto those stages, how to actually earn that media attention and what you’re gonna say in those, opportunities. You know, today, Brielle’s gonna break down her entire framework for the stories that you tell from stages. And this is a different approach to getting media in earning press like we’ve talked about here on this show.

    [00:01:56] April: And my other friends teach that we’ve actually had guests on this [00:02:00] show. Totally different approach. And what we’re talking about today, in my opinion, is really a prerequisite to the work you would do when you start the actual pitching process. Very, very, very important foundational work, so I’m very glad that you guys are here.

    [00:02:14] April: If we don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I am the host here on the show and founder of the Sweet Life Company. And I’m a business architect and offer engineer, so I help experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, license programs, and certification programs that lead them to high profit. Deep impact in the work they’re doing with the lifestyle freedom that they want. And I am so very glad that you’re here. You can always apply to work with us by cruising over to sweetlifeco.com. 

    [00:02:48] April: So let me tell you about our amazing, amazing guest today, Brielle Cotterman. She’s actually been in our community and in top our clients and worked with our clients. She’s actually gonna share one of our shared [00:03:00] clients that we have here. We’re gonna share some of the numbers here on this show about the impressions and the exposure that this client received because they have the things in place that we’re talking about here on this show. So we’re gonna give you some case studies from an actual client that. Is currently in the process of working with both of us. 

    [00:03:17] April: Brielle, for the record, is a TEDx speaker, a publicity experts and celebrity maker. She’s been the better part of the last decade helping clients craft and scale dream careers to seven figures and beyond by leveraging their personal stories and passions in order to create speaking, speaking tours. Author, award-winning books, procure media placements, and inspire millions of people, millions of people that need to hear their story. She’s a survivor of attempted murder and domestic violence and advocate for a world where intimate partner abuse is not tolerated, and survivors are met with empathy, 

    [00:03:51] April: On the business side again, her are regularly featured in Forbes, Fast Company, Martha Stewart Living. She just [00:04:00] got one of our clients in, Cosmo, in GQ. It’s not in her bio, but that just happened. Um, and I’m sure she’s done that before too. NBC, CBS, In Style Magazine and so many other, media and press publications and it’s because of her fantastic approach that you’re gonna hear here today. Hear, here, today on the show, she’s been married for just over a year to the love of her life, and they live on a horse boarding farm, uh, which is amazing. Absolutely gorgeous with three children and many, many animals. So they’re very, very excited about their life. They, they’re truly living the. I can’t wait for you to get to know Brielle today on the show if you don’t, and to hear and implement what she says. So again, all the show notes can be found by going to sweetlifeco.com. Click on the podcast and this is episode number 272. So let’s dive into the show.

    [00:04:52] April: Hello Friends, it is 2023 when we are recording this show and this is a Next Gen of the Sweet Left Entrepreneur [00:05:00] Podcast and there was no better person who I have been wanting and needing to record a podcast episode honestly for a very long time with then my friend Braille Cotterman, who is here today. And I just wanna kick off the year right, kick off the year strong, and dive in with Brielle and welcome you to the Sweet Life family.

    [00:05:19] April: We’re really kind of a family of listeners here, of entrepreneurs that grow together by listening to amazing experts in applying what you teach us on the show. So welcome here to the show. Give everybody a short introduction of yourself and, and why you are in this place to lead other women. 

    [00:05:36] Brielle: Thank you, April. I appreciate it. As you know, I am honored and always super excited to be a part of anything that you’re doing. So it’s lovely to be here with you today. So I am a publicity expert and a celebrity maker. I’m a TEDx speaker. I’ve been in the PR world for more than a decade, and prior to that I was in C-suite level sales and marketing.

    [00:05:59] Brielle: [00:06:00] Uh, I’ve been a professional speaker on behalf of charitable organizations, and before that I competed in the Miss America Organization. So combine all of these talents, experiences, this unique skillset that I have, compiled along the way, and that’s what puts me in the position to help women and men like yourself, you know, incredible entrepreneurs with a cause step onto the world stage and share their story, not only to impact the world, but also their bottom line.

    [00:06:35] April: Wow. I love that. And I, I can’t wait to dive into what we’re gonna unpack here today. So today we’re talking about building a press worthy personal brand. And before we actually dive into how to go about doing this, and, and the reasoning behind it, which I can’t wait for people to hear, what you’re gonna talk about today is, can we talk about some of the mindset issues where maybe some leaders.

    [00:06:59] April: Aren’t [00:07:00] necessarily leaning into this, do they? Do people not believe that they, that their story is valuable? Or what are some of those blocks for any of our listeners that are thinking, wow, I’d love to do that, but I can’t because of what are maybe some of those lies or blocks that people may be telling themselves, so we can just get those out of the way before we even dive into nailing this objective.

    [00:07:19] Brielle: Yeah, so absolutely what I see all the time in April. So many people who are kind of like nose to the grindstone, building their business, creating their brand, and then they look up one day and they realize, if I wanna get where I really want to be, I have to have a personal brand that supports what I’m doing because people now care about me because I am the CEO O or I’m the founder, or you know, I’m in this place.

    [00:07:43] Brielle: And so with that, like you said, comes a whole host of mindset things, and that can be as much as. Not wanting your whole life to be public, not wanting, um, you know, to air your dirty laundry, so to speak. But there are [00:08:00] ways of sharing and telling stories that don’t include all of the details that are very inspirational and.

    [00:08:07] Brielle: You know, it also, a part of that is stepping onto the world stage means something different for everyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean that people are going to recognize you when you walk down the street, but what it does mean is you are taking advantage of the opportunities that we have right now in the world.

    [00:08:26] Brielle: Whether that’s media, whether it’s podcasting. Speaking, you know, whatever that piece might look like for you. And we are using that as this really phenomenal marketing tool to be able to leverage who you are and what you stand for. And in doing so, support the ultimate success of your business. So there are mindset issues around that, and I think that that’s the, the one that I hear the most.

    [00:08:49] Brielle: You know, when it comes to story, it’s either, oh, I have so many stories, I don’t know where to begin. Or, the other camp is, I don’t know that my story is, would even matter to. 

    [00:08:59] April: [00:09:00] Right, right, right. I can resonate with both of those sides. 

    [00:09:03] Brielle: Yeah. 

    [00:09:03] April: Just so you know, I, I have thought both of those things and, um, so I’m very excited and, and grateful for your leadership for, for me as well. Okay. So today diving into building a press worthy personal brand, what actually is a press worthy personal brand? Let’s start there. 

    [00:09:20] Brielle: Yeah. So when you think about organizations, it’s very important to remember that information that is shared by an individual converts seven times faster than information that’s shared from a corporation or an organization. And what that means is if you are the ceo, you are the face of your organization, you are a leader, and you are sharing content, information that it’s, it doesn’t have to be exactly the same as what your organization shares, but it’s in support of it. So basically, you think. That press worthy personal brand is the brand that is an authentic representation of who you are and what you stand for, what makes you [00:10:00] unique, and it allows you to intersect with the values, mission, and vision of your organization.

    [00:10:06] Brielle: So really a personal brand. Everybody has one. I always say that some people, you know, they’re like, oh, well I haven’t taken the time to create it. Well, you have one. It’s just whether or not you are curating that personal brand, and we always say that a personal brand is how you leave people feeling how they feel after they’ve had an interaction with you.

    [00:10:27] Brielle: Maybe they see you speak on the stage, or maybe they listen to your podcast or check out your website or your social media, or maybe they read an article that you’ve written, and chances are there is not a cohesive lens there. That’s what I run into most of the time with people who are really successful leaders, advocates, entrepreneurs.

    [00:10:45] Brielle: And even in the C-Suite. And of course, we want that sort of information that’s coming from you, who you are, what you stand for, what makes you unique to be a true representation of your heart. [00:11:00] 

    [00:11:00] April: Hmm. Wow. Okay. So I think all of our listeners right now are saying, yes, I, I, that’s what I want. And that’s different than maybe what that I, I thought that it was mm-hmm. and I, I feel like even the way that you explained it takes a lot of pressure off of some people that feel like it’s really all about them. It’s actually not all about them. It’s really just about, like you said, how they make people feel and how that resonates in their, with their work in the mission that they’re doing and and forwarding the work of their company and obviously building relationships as well.

    [00:11:33] April: And so you said, so what you see. Is it, it’s not cohesive across all of those outlets. Is that usually the case in when people come to you and they’re saying they might have this per, they might give this sort of impression off in, in this place and this and this place is, do you find that people are inconsistent with their brand across platforms?

    [00:11:55] Brielle: Absolutely. And well, not just their, uh, I’m with their [00:12:00] personal brand. The thing that I find the most is that people don’t understand how they are interpreted, perceived, or recieved so. 

    [00:12:09] April: Got it. 

    [00:12:09] Brielle: We hear all the time. Share stories. Share stories, you know, I mean, it’s constant. Um, one, I see a lot of people not sharing the right stories, and two, I see them not sharing stories in a way that our minds easily comprehend, recall, and can share. So anytime we share a statement or a fact, when we wrap that in a story, it’s more than 70 times as likely to be remembered. 

    [00:12:40] April: That’s amazing. I love that stat. Okay, . It just blows my mind every single time, but it’s also not surprising. So let’s talk about, what do you mean when you say foundation of celebrity? We haven’t brought it up here yet in this podcast and, and I’d love to dive into that first. You speak all the time and you help entrepreneurs and leaders all the time [00:13:00] establish their foundation of celebrity. What actually is that? 

    [00:13:04] Brielle: So basically that is a thorough examination. My personal brand, how does my personal brand support, uh, what it is that I’m doing professionally or with my advocacy or that my organization is doing?

    [00:13:18] Brielle: And then, , the, not only the stories that go along with that, but making sure you have a sound business. You know, honestly, you help clients and people to develop a large portion of that foundation of celebrity. Because here’s the deal. When we talk about a press worthy brand, what is a press worthy brand?

    [00:13:36] Brielle: It’s going to capture attention. Okay? It’s going to get GQ and Cosmo and Forbes and Business Insider to say yes. But if we get all of those incredible, publications to say yes, what’s going to happen if we have nowhere to push them? We have nowhere for those people to go or when they get there. It’s confusing.

    [00:13:56] Brielle: We want people to be able to take one step closer to you in a [00:14:00] way that is easeful and makes total sense. For your ideal client and really for who your ideal client hopes to be. And that’s something you know that you and I share from our perception of who are we speaking to when it comes to marketing, and that’s definitely what we look at.

    [00:14:16] Brielle: So foundation of celebrity, you’ve gotta have a sound business, you’ve gotta have that client journey. When the different points of entry, when they come into your space, how are they going to take one step closer to you? It’s phenomenal to get GQ and Cosmo. But if we get GQ and Cosmo and people come to your site and then they’re struggling, like, what, what do I do next? You know, people, we, we lose them and that’s not at all what we wanna do. So, um, having that foundation of celebrity looks a, it’s a lot more complex than just being able to give a really incredible interview and knowing how to show up on television, what to say and how to say it. But it’s the behind the scenes that really matters when it comes to making an impact on your bottom [00:15:00] line.

    [00:15:01] April: Mm-hmm. Mm-hmm. Yeah, and I, I believe that there are so many people that do actually put themselves out there that don’t have those business structures in place. And that’s exactly what you’re saying that you see as well. 

    [00:15:12] Brielle: Absolutely. 

    [00:15:12] April: All everybody, so foundation of celebrity, you guys, when you get out there and, and we want you out there. We want you telling your story, which we’re gonna dive into next. We want you to have this. Amazing personal brand, but let’s also make sure that the rest of your business is in place and ready for the attention, and really like a sponge to be able to absorb that work that you do when you put yourself out there, when you earn press and, and you speak on stages.

    [00:15:38] April: So now that we have the foundation lead, foundation of celebrity, the reason why you need a personal brand, all of these things. Something you said earlier really hit home for me, and it’s something that I’ve struggled with for years, is how to actually take my experiences and turn them into stories where, people [00:16:00] understand it’s not about me or even my story so much, but how do we make it so that other people can see themselves in our stories and then take that next step with us?

    [00:16:11] April: And it is something I am the first one to admit. I’ve struggled with this. For years and years and years. And so I would love for you to help all of us just really understand how to move into this direction. You have an amazing framework. I know, but let’s talk about stories a little bit. What do we say We got up there on stage. What? And then what do we say? 

    [00:16:31] Brielle: So, you know, we all know stories are memorable. That’s the way we’ve been teaching since the beginning of time. Our. Human brains are really literally hardwired to learn through story. And story does two things. It creates connection and it inspires action. And those are only stories that are told. Well, April. And so that’s the thing. It’s. You know, most of us, by the time we are in a place where people begin to, and when I say people, I mean [00:17:00] like press and like, you know, those massive numbers like we, we were talking about before, 85 and a hundred million people that are consuming content of our clients.

    [00:17:10] Brielle: They begin to care about our stories when we’ve lived a lot of life typically. And so sorting out what are the stories to tell. Doing that from the perspective of I wanna tell a story that’s gonna create connection and inspire action, and I wanna inspire the right action. Um, you know, you mentioned earlier it’s not just about pitching.

    [00:17:31] Brielle: So it’s not just about pitching the media, it’s not just about getting the win, it’s about being prepared and knowing. When I do get this media win, am I going to do myself more good than harm by telling the right stories and having that foundation of celebrities. So that’s a big piece. You know, taking your own experiences and looking for moments in time that are transformational.

    [00:17:54] Brielle: So that’s my. That’s always my best advice when you begin to break down, and we have three [00:18:00] stories that we recommend everyone tell, but you know when you begin to assess and you look at that, we want to show people who you are through your story rather than tell them so. That’s the, that’s one of the biggest mistakes I see people make all of the time.

    [00:18:16] Brielle: They wanna list their whole resume. You know, they wanna go through this whole laundry list of, well, I’ve done this and I’ve accomplished that, and blah, blah, blah. And really, at the end of the day, your consumers and your media decision makers, they don’t care. They wanna, they want a real person. Yeah. They wanna create connection.

    [00:18:33] Brielle: Mm-hmm. , um, you know, we talk about no, like, and trust and more than it’s, these are new numbers too. Um, more than 86% of all consumers say a brand’s authenticity is one of their, the reasons for their major, major decision making when it comes to buying or not buying. .

    [00:18:54] April: Wow. Wow. So when we talk about these stories and [00:19:00] we get up on stage, whether it’s an online stage or an offline stage, or somebody is writing an article about us and um, In a magazine, um, or, or even when somebody’s talking about us or a, a business partner is talking about us and saying, Hey, you should really go to Brielle or whoever.

    [00:19:17] April: Um, how do we craft these stories so that people remember how do we actually build these stories? You have this amazing framework. I know that you’ve taught our clients in, in one of our private settings before, and it’s just so powerful, and I can’t wait for our listeners to hear this. You call it the profitable storytelling framework. Is that correct? 

    [00:19:37] Brielle: Yeah, yeah. So our profitable storytelling format, but, and there’s three stories that we ask every brand to be telling, because most of us have a million stories, and I love to ask people to create a story bank. Once you master the profitable storytelling format, you’re gonna have three foundational stories to your personal brand.

    [00:19:54] Brielle: But beyond that, develop a story bank because you are going to have opportunities with social, [00:20:00] you’re gonna have opportunity for your email list, for articles. You know, you’re gonna be able to pull some of those additional stories. And once you really master the format, then you should be able to keep this log, develop this bank.

    [00:20:12] Brielle: Just make a a Google Doc and just drop them in there. And, and not only will you. You know, does it make this incredible piece of kind of like your media playbook, but it also is inspiring. so when you think about story, we talk about a breakthrough story. So, We call it that because it helps you to break through the noise, but it’s typically based around a major breakthrough of transformation.

    [00:20:36] Brielle: And then we also ask for you to tell a business zone of genius story. Why are you the very best at what it is that you’re doing? And then we ask you to tell your passion story and just one caveat there. , 99% of all entrepreneurs, when we ask what their passion is, they say what it is that they do, um, with their work, and we ask you to choose something different.

    [00:20:59] Brielle: [00:21:00] So I’m a wild friend, champion equestrian. I live on a farm. I know you are passionate, you love the ocean and the beach and all of those things. And so telling a story that allows people to create there because where those three stories intersect. , that’s really where your soulmate level clients live, and that’s, you know, we all wanna be working with the people who inspire us and light us up. So that profitable storytelling format helps us to do that, and it makes it super simple. 

    [00:21:27] April: Okay, so three stories were the breakthrough story, the zone of genius story, and the passion story. 

    [00:21:33] Brielle: Yes. 

    [00:21:34] April: That is so powerful. And are these big huge stories or are these just little moments in time? That or, or doesn’t matter Is really, is, is what we’re looking at here.

    [00:21:44] Brielle: So the way we ask our clients to do that is we ask you to take the three stories and distill them down to three bullet. So, you know, if you are in a format where you have a 45 minute podcast interview, or you’re giving a keynote, [00:22:00] potentially you can bring in a lot more details, a lot more of the rise intention in the story, so to speak.

    [00:22:07] Brielle: Um, But really you should be able to distill it down to its simplest format because I can’t tell you April how many times I have had people booked for a five minute television segment and then breaking news happens, and then their segment gets cut down to a minute and 45. So the simplistic storytelling format that I’m getting ready to share really seems so simple, but it is how our brains are hardwired to interpret and remember and share stories.

    [00:22:41] Brielle: So it is using what we know from a psychological perspective and leveraging that it’s using the information that we have learned. You know, centuries of teaching, communicating, marketing, all of the things that humans are doing with [00:23:00] stories. So use what we know and leverage that instead of working against it.

    [00:23:05] April: Wow. All right. So hopefully your wheels are spinning you guys, and if you’re taking notes listening to this, uh, you’re, you’re a smart cookie , you can always come back and replay it again. Um, so let’s dive into that storytelling format. , what does this actually look like and how do you guide entrepreneurs through this process?

    [00:23:22] Brielle: So anytime we’re talking about, um, our profitable storytelling format, we look at three pieces to every story. Like I mentioned earlier with the breakthrough story. We wanna begin with what is that transformational moment? So what is the climax of the story? Take us to that moment in time. I did a workshop recently live, um, with an incredible group of women in Nashville and called one of them up onto the stage and we were able to workshop some of her stories and, you know, cuz she was one of those girls that was like, I don’t, I don’t have a story. I don’t know, you know, I’m great at what I do, but I, my story’s not gonna affect [00:24:00] anyone. Um, there’s two things to remember. 

    [00:24:03] Brielle: One, your story does not have to be filled with drama and trauma to make a difference. And to make an impact and to inspire. It does not have to be that sell everything and move to Bali moment. You know? Um, just your story and the authentic interpretation and conveyance of that story really can inspire action and allow people to take ownership of their own story as well. 

    [00:24:29] Brielle: And then two, you know, this is a woman who I was workshopping with who has accomplished incredible things in her lifetime, created amazing foundations and organizations and sh we can, through telling a story, we don’t have to say. she’s tenacious, she is creative, she’s accomplished all of these things. We can show people that through a very well told story, and that’s what the profitable storytelling format does. 

    [00:24:59] Brielle: So you [00:25:00] begin dissecting your stories, thinking of what are transformational moments in time? What is a moment in time that I can take people to, that’s the climax. So that’s the second piece of the story. And then just very simpl. Who was I before and who was I after? So who was I before? That’s the exposition. The start of the story. This is going back to like 10th grade literature, you know, English composition. How should a story arc be created? Who were you before the tension rises?

    [00:25:29] Brielle: Then there’s the climax or the major transformation in the story, and as the tension. you, it is, you are sharing your rise. And then the climax, you know, the, the tension falls after the climax because here you are now. And so every story, each one of those three foundational stories for your brand should be told using your profitable storytelling format. So who are you before major transformation or climax? Take us to that moment in time, and then who are you [00:26:00] after? 

    [00:26:01] April: Mm. And with that format, is there usually, um, you know, some time and break. It obviously depends on the different venue. If, if somebody’s being interviewed on the Today Show, there isn’t gonna be that back and forth conversation, but is in some settings, do we craft that story as well for people who are the listeners who are the audience to have a moment to relate or resonate or absorb in the actual delivery of these stories.

    [00:26:26] April: And, and have them even workshop internally. Is that part of something that you feel like is important, is finding those break points where the listeners to the stories can, I don’t even know if it’s actually like a break point in the speaking, but do you, is that actually really identified through the whole entire story, or are there periods of time in which maybe there will be trigger where it’s like, does this relate to you or do you, do you see this happening in you?

    [00:26:50] April: I don’t necessarily ask questions like that. I think it depends on who your audience is. Here’s one thing that you have to remember, and I love that you used this example. When you see people on [00:27:00] Good Morning America, when you see people on Jimmy Kimmel Live, you have to understand that their foundation of celebrity is strong.

    [00:27:08] Brielle: Okay? This did not just happen on accident. They do not show up looking like a million bucks, knowing how to sit, how to speak, what stories to. How to get a laugh. They do not just show up this way. There is a lot of preparation and a lot of work that goes into ensuring that they are going to have. That, you know, knock it out of the park moment when they’re on Good Morning America and on Jimmy Kimmel Alive and a story that is told well, does not require us to ask our audience to reflect story that is told, well, touches that person in their heart and creates a connection.

    [00:27:47] Brielle: And then you don’t have to ask them to please remember this or you know, this is how the, when you think of me think of the story, you don’t even have to make that ask because you’re just one human being speaking to another. I. [00:28:00] 

    [00:28:00] April: That’s fantastic and your framework is so powerful and you guys listening to this, our clients have taken Brielle’s framework and we have a shared client that Brielle said that Brielle has just gotten on crazy press in and this woman knows how to tell her story. And she is absolutely amazing at it Exactly because of, of the guidance that she’s received in this process of training to do it. And so when we’re talking to people who aren’t that far along, let’s talk about people who are just starting out. Um, W and you said it’s really important to have the most, you know, at least one of these stories, the zone of genius story. Um, you know, the breakthrough story. Which one do you feel like is the most important as it relates back to their business for them to craft first? Is it dependent on the entrepreneur or is, do you find one across the board for the, that’s the best one for them to lean into? 

    [00:28:54] Brielle: The breakthrough story is the most important.

    [00:28:57] April: Okay. All right. Makes sense. 

    [00:28:58] Brielle: Because like I said, whether [00:29:00] you are, you know, a C-suite executive and you are crafting your fir, your personal brand for the first time because you’re getting attention and you realize now that’s important. Or you are an entrepreneur who has built this business and you look up and you’re like, okay, well if I wanna scale to the next level, I have to kind of step up behind the curtains and I’m gonna have to do some media.

    [00:29:21] Brielle: I’m gonna have to do some podcasts. I’m gonna have to go on some stages. Regardless of where you are, the breakthrough story is really what allows people to know who you are and what you stand for. Think of the breakthrough story as the story of your why. And that’s kind of, you know, that hot button word, uh, question. Tell us about your why. You know, all of those things. We can all rattle off a long list of the reasons why we do things or don’t do things or things are important to us. But imagine if you can share that in a story. 

    [00:29:54] Brielle: There again, that becomes 70 times more memorable and we’re thinking about in this contemporary [00:30:00] world where there is so much noise in the marketplace, there are so many different things that you can buy, product services, people out there. And what we are really doing is we are helping people to create that contemporary word of mouth. So thinking back to, you know, when I was, when I was growing up, if I wanted to buy. anything. You know, if I wanted to buy a new sweater, I would wanna call up one of my girlfriends or my cousin and say, you know, where did you get that? That’s so cute. And they would ra make a recommendation? Oh, we’ll go down to the square and that sort of thing. 

    [00:30:38] Brielle: You know, cuz we were all buying things in person and mm-hmm. now we have this incredible ability to create that. Level of top of mind marketing and that same level of word of mouth endorsement and third party verification by being featured in the publications [00:31:00] that are ideal consumer and who they hope to be, where they are consuming their content. So if they are a devout reader of Business Insider and Business Insider chooses to feature you and they could have chosen anyone.

    [00:31:13] Brielle: You are literally putting yourself in that exact same position, so they are now giving you that endorsement. Just like when I used to call up my cousin and ask her what I should go by. 

    [00:31:23] April: I love that. All right, and so what are the next steps for our listeners? They are gonna go through and see this in the show notes, and obviously we’ll make sure that they can connect with you as well, but they’ve gone through this process. They’ve, first of all made a. Is this important to them? Is this something that they have maybe dragged their feet on for one of those mindset issues or the, the lack of confidence in the beginning that we talked about In this show, you’ve brought them very clearly through understanding why everybody needs to pay attention to their personal brand, 

    [00:31:54] April: not why everybody needs a personal brand. I love that you’ve. Love that you said that too, because we all do have a [00:32:00] personal brand. I even remember talking to my, my three little boys going to elementary school and when they’re, you know, the kids that they hang out with and the clothes that they wear, that’s like, you know, their little brand and that affects us and we’ve all been doing it. We all are aware of, of how we come across and how we make each other feel. I, and I was just recalling a conversation actually last week with one of my kids about this new kid in school and that every, everybody was being mean and he had a choice of of who he is gonna be.

    [00:32:29] April: Right. And that’s the brand of who he is. That’s what he’s known for. And it’s so interesting how we don’t even identify that as a young age, but we’re all quite aware that how we show up and the stories we tell and who we are to other people and the influence that we have in any situation, whether it’s a large situation or a small situation, really does affect our lives and our businesses.

    [00:32:52] April: And so, uh, you teach. Getting pressed different than anybody I know. All right, I’m gonna say this [00:33:00] here. So the way that Brielle does this, you guys, and we’ve done tons of episodes and I have lots of friends that talk about how to land big press deals, and there are ways that we can talk about pitching press and doing media kits and all these things.

    [00:33:15] April: None of that can be talked about until we have mastered and done what Brielle is talking about here. Because that is the action of, of going out when there’s so much more from a foundational level that needs to be discussed and decided upon. And you as a leader, and I’m saying this to me too, you know, and, and I have received a lot of press in the past and I knew none of this.

    [00:33:42] April: And so I feel like. , this process was a huge missing link in my history of understanding. And that there, that my impact on the exposure that I had received in the past could have been [00:34:00] so much better, so much greater. I mean, and this is a long time ago, guys. This is like 12 years ago. Okay? So I’m gonna now age myself.

    [00:34:07] April: You know, when I first really started receiving big press, right? But now it’s different. Now it’s even more important because it’s so noisy and it’s so loud and everybody’s out there screaming me, me, me. But those that are able to craft these powerful stories and to create this celebrity foundation, like Brielle is saying, here are the ones that it’s, it’s like we’re gonna be separating oil from water.

    [00:34:35] April: We’re talking a lot about that. I really feel like that’s gonna be the theme of 2023 is separating those who are just out there doing it from those that are committed to the way they’re going about running their businesses. Um, and so I, I really love and appreciate this conversation so much, Brielle, and I know our listeners are gonna love us too.

    [00:34:54] April: And what a great way to kick off the year. It doesn’t matter when you’re listening to this, um, but, you know, kick off the [00:35:00] year and really roll forward in our commitment to ourselves in. in our calling, if that’s kind of like a cheesy word, our calling. But really I believe that this is an important conversation to have in that journey to gaining media attention and and being on podcast. So what else did I not ask that I need to be asking for people to be able to take action from this show? 

    [00:35:22] Brielle: Well, one of the things that I wanna touch on real quickly, April, is what you just said, what you just pointed out. That’s the reason why people traditionally. Upset with their PR firms. We’re not a traditional PR firm.

    [00:35:36] Brielle: We’re more like an executive level finishing school, coupled with a. PR agency that gets you those incredible opportunities to use as a marketing tool. So, you know, we look at everything from personal brand through how do we incorporate and really fuse that marketing plan with a strategic PR campaign and.

    [00:35:59] Brielle: You [00:36:00] know, it’s exactly what you said. There are ways to pitch the media. There are ways to go out there and get featured, but if you don’t have a strong foundation, if you’re not doing you’re, you could be doing yourself more harm than good . And so, you know, there are so many different pieces from image all the way through to how do you leverage that media, and I think really every single person who has an interest in pursuing media and whether or not you have an interest or you just recognize the importance of it, is starting to dissect and refine and define those three foundational stories.

    [00:36:36] Brielle: Because if you begin telling those, you are going to begin to create consistency, even if there hasn’t been consistency in your own personal. Once you identify those three stories and you can begin to tell them, I think that’s the very first important strong step towards standing out and creating that press worthy personal brand.

    [00:36:59] April: thank you. [00:37:00] Thank you so much. Thank you for your leadership here and your leadership to my clients and in our programs, and how much you, um, give your time to come in and work with our clients too as well. So for people to find you. And move forward. You guys have the Celebrity Incubator coming up, but people are gonna, you know, people listen to podcasts forever.

    [00:37:19] April: So if you’re listening to this in the beginning of 2023, you guys have Celebrity Incubator, so let’s talk about how they can find you as far as, um, you know, are evergreen links, so they always are able to access you and learn more about what’s going. 

    [00:37:34] Brielle: Yes, it’s always my name. It’s my name. It’s Brielle Cotterman, B R I E L L E, and it’s Cotterman, C O T T E R M A N, on Insta, on LinkedIn, on Facebook, and that is our actual U R L.

    [00:37:49] Brielle: So that is always the best way to find us and what’s going on with our agency and all the incredible things that our clients are doing in the world as. [00:38:00] 

    [00:38:00] April: Thank you so much, Brielle. So glad you’re here. 

    [00:38:03] Brielle: Likewise. Thank you my friend. 

    [00:38:05] April: Okay guys, great show with Brielle. Now we have 60 seconds to implement. What is one thing that you’re gonna take from this show and start and do today? So whether it is, do you remember those three stories? She said that everybody needs to have the breakthrough story, the zone of genius story or the passion story. Which one of those do you already? And if you don’t have one, maybe your call to action for yourself today is just to create and determine what that breakthrough story is going to be. All right? So I know sometimes you can’t do all the things we talk about on the show, but I want you to walk away and I want you to take action on one thing so that we can always keep moving your business forward. Again, all the show notes are sweetlifeco.com. 

    [00:38:44] April: If you find yourself in a place where you’re not ready for this, because we haven’t engineered your offer ecosystem in the client journey and your actual programs yet, then you can also find out how you can apply to work with us so we can get you ready to then apply what we’re talking about on today’s show. All right, you guys be. [00:39:00] And I’ll see you next week.

     

     
     

    (Becoming Known) How To Build A Press Worthy Personal Brand – with Brielle Cotterman

    Becoming Known: How To Expand Your Reach, Increase Sales and Become a Thought Leader

     

    <iframe>

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for/Summary:

    This episode is for those of you who are moving into higher levels, more impact, bigger stages, more influence, more income, more impact. If you’re an established coach, consultant, speaker, author or niche service expert, and it’s time to move up. 
     
    In this episode, we kick off with the most powerful things you must have in place before you start your “becoming known” campaign. We’ll cover a short check list of foundations and  work on your strategy to become known. You’ll receive a list of action items and also a list of strategic decisions, including how to make these choices and where to start. 
     
    It’s hard to become known when you’re head down in your work. You’re busy taking care of your clients, not telling everyone about the work you’re doing. You just do the work, and hope people will tell their friends about your awesomeness. 
     
    Or, perhaps you do have a huge social following? You’ve mastered the art of communication, you love being on your social platforms and your following has grown, but now it’s time to become known on the next level to move up, not only move forward. 
     
    This series of shows breaks down proven strategies from the Greats, that you can leverage today to become known, establish leadership and rise above the noise, or break into new noise, with guests Brielle Cotterman, Eileen Wilder, Angie Trueblood, and more…
     
    Let’s get going… 
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Have a punch list of assets you need to have in place before you start your “becoming known” campaign
    2. Have clarity on how to use the next 5 SweetLife Podcast episodes to your advantage (so you don’t pay a coach $$$ to tell you what you’re getting here for free) 
    3. Plot your Becoming Known course and start moving your business in that direction now 
    4. Have the steps to build your leading method you’ll become known for
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 

    8 Steps to Create  Your Signature Process, Coaching Method, or Framework – https://www.sweetlifeco.com/method

    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    271

    [00:00:00] You are listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast with business mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach, connecting great people with great people to do great things. That is dope. Today I’m giving you a framework. I love you. This transformation process, you say, here you go. Yes, this is it.

    [00:00:26] Everything you just said, April, wow, that is the best business architecture and business engineering. I’ve never really thought of it like that, but right away when you said that, Thank you, April. I appreciate you, dude. Yeah. 

    [00:00:44] Hi you guys, and welcome to the kickoff episode of a new mini-series we’re doing called Becoming Known. You are in the right place if you’re an established coach or a consultant and you have used a lot of these PR and influence and awareness [00:01:00] strategies in the past. But now it’s time to move up. Not only move on with your business, but move up. So let me explain to you exactly what we were talking about in this show.

    [00:01:10] This is the kickoff of our little mini-series called Becoming Known. We have some powerful treats coming up for you in addition to what we’re talking about here today. In the future, you are going to hear from the greats like Eileen Wilder. We have two episodes where Eileen breaks down her entire million dollar speaking framework in a workshop format for you that is coming.

    [00:01:33] You also get to hear from Angie Trueblood, which she is, in my opinion, the number one podcast guest placement strategist. She’s absolutely amazing, and Brielle Cotterman, who is a PR, an influence strategist, is gonna be here as well. All of these. Are partnering here with us on the Sweet Life Podcast throughout this little miniseries to help you have strategies that you can take to the bank to become known [00:02:00] and expand your reach and increase your sales and become a thought leader in your space.

    [00:02:04] You’re gonna hear my little dog barking. He’s not feeling well next to me, so welcome to behind the scenes of. The Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. This is episode number 271. And so all of the show notes that we’re talking about can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. Click on our podcast button and this is episode number 271 where we’re gonna detail every single thing we are talking about here for you on the show.

    [00:02:29] Now, who is this episode four and who is this series for? Let me make sure you’re in the right place. We have a lot of shows for beginning business owners, but that is not who this series is for. This is for those of you who are established coaches, established consultants. You’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a while, and it’s time to move you up to higher levels, higher levels of influence, higher levels of impact, higher levels income. 

    [00:02:57] The strategies that we’re talking about in this [00:03:00] becoming known series are not the basics, like how to pitch yourself to be a podcast guest. We have those episodes here for you, though you can just very easily search how to, how to become a podcast guest and tap into those shows. These are for those of you guys that are ready for higher levels in more income, and what does this actually look like for you?

    [00:03:20] It looks like you are now at this place where you find in your professional life where it’s time for us to engineer that next level of your business. That next business model that you want to take you into the next 3, 5, 10 years. This show in this series, and really everything we’re doing on the next gen of the Sweet Life Podcast here as we move into your number six is for you.

    [00:03:43] This is a kickoff episode, and in this episode we’re gonna talk about all the things that you need to have in place in order to implement the episodes in this series. Follow it. So I’m gonna give you a breakdown and actually a checklist of what we already have to have in place and what you already need to have decided from a [00:04:00] strategy standpoint in order to implement the series that we’re talking about here and all of the workshops that our guest experts are delivering to you.

    [00:04:08] So at the end of this show, you’re gonna have a punch list of things that you need to make sure are in place in order for you to utilize the becoming known series. You’re also gonna have clarity, okay? So I want you to have clarity on your becoming known strategies. We’re using this episode here. Number 2 71 is a place where you and I can get together and just really kind of unpack your strategy.

    [00:04:35] What you wanna be known for moving forward and how it fits into your bigger business. B. , that’s what we’re talking about today on this show, and we are going to plot your becoming known course. So who do you wanna be known to? Why should they know you? And are we even in a process of leveling up and perhaps even finding a different audience and building a separate division of your company?

    [00:04:59] Those are [00:05:00] all the things that we’re talking about on today’s show. So if that’s what you’re in for, then you’re in the right place. Again, all the show. All the bonuses we have for you can be found by visiting sweet life co.com. Head over to the podcast cabinets there for you. If as you’re listening to this, you wanna make sure you’re not missing any of it, make sure you click subscribe and please share this show with your friends.

    [00:05:21] We don’t have advertising in the show. Never have, never will, because I hate listening to ads on shows. I’m just gonna be really honest, and I don’t really think you like it either. So we really rely on you guys sharing the show organically with your friends across social media, and we’d really appreciate you doing that.

    [00:05:35] All right. You. Let’s go. Okay, you guys, we are diving into how to become known, how to establish your authority and your space. And in this show, I’m helping you prepare and strategize and position yourself so that we can do that and utilize the upcoming episodes. So first things first, let’s pause for a second and I want you to ask yourself those question, what do you wanna become known?

    [00:05:59] Just [00:06:00] actually take a minute. Those of us who have been in business and have been entrepreneurs for decades, this has changed over the years. We grow into different things, so please take a moment and ask yourself, what is your strategic objective? That is the end result of the strategy we’re about to apply.

    [00:06:19] Are you moving from perhaps what has been a solo entrepreneur or a small team role more into a c e O role? Are we finding you a new audience? What is the, what is the strategy of why you’re tapping into this show and really, why do we need to do this for you? Why is it important? Do you feel like you’re that best kept secret?

    [00:06:42] Um, have you had your head down for so many years working with the clients and giving amazing results that you haven’t really paid a lot of attention to? Make sure everybody knows who you are, because frankly, it doesn’t really matter to you, but maybe just maybe [00:07:00] you’ve now realized that it’s the time to step forward and step in the spotlight.

    [00:07:06] for all of the amazing transformation and golden work that you have been doing for such a long time. So I want you to give yourself a second here to ask yourself why now? Why is this different than you tapping into maybe a handful of podcast episodes on how to speak from stages and, and how to become a podcast?

    [00:07:31] Because your answer to why, why now is going to be what we use to craft the path that you’re gonna utilize these workshop trainings to make sure that we’re actually pointing your ship in the right direction of where you wanna go for the next 3, 5, 5, and 10 years of your business. So why is this important?

    [00:07:49] What do you want this leverage and this influence to deliver to you in your business and in your personal life? That’s the first thing. I want you to [00:08:00] stop and take a minute to decide. Now a couple of you guys and, and I was just actually on calls with a few new clients that are, are working with us this year, are moving from a place where you really need to step into that c e O leadership role and other people are running your systems, running your programs, working your business for you.

    [00:08:20] And so now we get to. Pluck you out of that and share your message to then of course drive more profit and income back to your programs, but it’s in a different way. You’re maybe no longer the the worker bee and you’re the leader. And so that is another reason why I want you to be really strategic and think about why you’re utilizing these strategies.

    [00:08:44] We’re here talking on. So what is the strategy? What is the reason for you becoming known in this next generation of you? And stop for a minute. And now I want you to think about what have you been known [00:09:00] for in the past? Because we could be trying to land if you will nail a new objective for something that’s a pivot.

    [00:09:11] Maybe You have been known for building yoga studios. And now you wanna be known for something totally different. So, you know, a case study, it’s really interesting. Many of you guys may know, uh, the story of Rachel Cook. I love Rachel Cook. She’s one of the people that I learned from all the time, and I admire her strategy and her wisdom.

    [00:09:30] She’s been a guest here on the podcast and she’s one of our experts that comes in and teaches our clients and our Wavemaker ecosystem. Rachel Cook is. Seriously, one of the greatest minds in operational systems business, Rachel started out by building, helping entrepreneurs build yoga studios. You would never know that.

    [00:09:52] So I share that story with you because if you’re to that place where if you’re ready to pivot from one area to another, . Now, let’s make [00:10:00] that decision together here on this podcast. I mean, it’s your decision, not mine. I’m just here triggering you and telling you, Hey, make the decision now. What does that look like?

    [00:10:09] Because decision is that first step. And as you’ll hear in the upcoming episodes, as I, Eileen Wilder says, you know, fast decision, slow to change your mind is what creates the most impact in your business. So let’s go ahead and make a decision. But make sure it’s a strategic decision of, of now what is the reasoning for this?

    [00:10:29] Is this maybe something new that you wanna be known for? And then who do you need to be known to? This is the next thing I want you to identify, and there is no worksheet for this guys. This one doesn’t come with a download. These are questions that I would love for you to pause and answer and speak out loud wherever you are as you’re listening to.

    [00:10:51] Who do you want to become known to and why are you trying to reach a [00:11:00] new audience? Do we need to get you in front of more people? So here’s your choices. We either need to have you become known to people who don’t know you yet, or we need to pour on the gas to increase the awareness with an established audience.

    [00:11:17] It’s pretty much two choices. They either don’t know you or they already know you, and more of them need to know you. What does that look like for you? If, and I’m just gonna kind of talk you through this here as you’re thinking, as I’m speaking. If we are building a B to B side of your business, and in the past you’ve always sold to maybe individuals, and now we are building next level programs, particularly for those of you guys that are building, uh, bigger, higher level group programs or masterminds.

    [00:11:50] Especially for those of you guys who are building license programs. If you’re licensing your IP or you’re building certification programs, you know this is the podcast [00:12:00] and we at the Sweet Life Company are ready and waiting to help you do that. That’s actually a different audience, guys, because when we are selling to companies, we’re no longer making you known to the end user.

    [00:12:13] We might have to find that middleman, what I call that bridge buyer. to be aware of you and the solutions you provide because then they wanna bring that program in for their people or their staff or their benefits or their organization or whatever that is. So perhaps you may be already really well known to that individual audience at B2C audience, but it’s time for us to introduce you to a whole nother audience, even though it’s the same product, if you will.

    [00:12:46] Because we have a different buyer, perhaps that’s what we’re doing. So I want you to think about who do you need to become known to, and are we adding more gravity, more fire to an [00:13:00] established audience, and increasing that and raising you up to the top of a swimming pool of a thousand water droplets. And we want you to be that wave on the top.

    [00:13:09] Or are we putting you in a totally different ocean where nobody knows who you are and we need to introduce you from scratch? So let me repeat those three strategic questions that I want you to think about before we dive into this becoming known series. Number one, what do you wanna become known for?

    [00:13:28] What does this next level of your business look like? How do you play a role in that? Number two, why? What is the strategy behind this? What are we trying to accomplish here within your next level, becoming known strategy? And number three, who do you need to become known to? , is it the same audience and we wanna increase it, or are we introducing you to a totally new audience and nobody knows who you are?

    [00:13:57] And we are kind of starting from scratch, [00:14:00] which those of you guys have been in business for a while, that that feels a little exciting. It’s almost like being back at the very beginning. It’s not, it’s actually really level. But there are some new challenges that certainly come along with that, that we’re gonna be dressing here in the next couple of episodes in this series.

    [00:14:17] So once you’ve answered those three questions, I’m gonna give you a really quick punch list and then we’re gonna wrap up this episode because you know, qual quality doesn’t equal quantity. I wanna give you exactly what you need and get you outta here so you can be working on these things cuz we have some big time episodes coming up.

    [00:14:33] I want to make sure I’m saving your time and your energy for, so here’s a punch list of things that you should have in place before we enter into a becoming known campaign. All right. The first thing is, is you need to have an established method, framework, or process where you know that you deliver people predictable, transformational, measurable results.

    [00:14:56] You guys hear me say that exact statement like a million times on this [00:15:00] show, right? So you have to be very good at what you do. You need to have gotten people results in the. And you need to have your frameworks in place in order to do that. If you’re struggling with that, one of the bonuses we have here for you is access to how to create your frameworks and access to our Offer Engineer, which is part of our Signature Offer masterclass series.

    [00:15:22] We’ll help you do that. That’s what we do as a company. We extract your genius and build it into industry leading programs. , you guys have to make sure you have your offer in place, or at least we know the offer you’re building or the direction you’re going. If you are building a whole new ecosystem of higher level offers, like you’re moving from that B to C side, you’ve, you’ve had programs, you’ve been a coach for a long time, and now we’re moving you into licensing or creating a certification program.

    [00:15:52] as long as we know that that’s where you’re going, that’s enough for you to move forward in this. But please, we need to know what you’re selling and who [00:16:00] you’re selling it to. Number three in this. So first one is method of framework. Second one is your offer is in place and your programs are in place.

    [00:16:07] Number three, please make sure your bios are updated. I know this kind of seems super basic, but I’m giving you this checklist. When is actually the last time you updated your bio or your photos or the messaging about who you are in your. . Those are things we do in the very beginning and if you go back and you read some of your bios, it, they’re probably a little out of date, especially for those of you guys who have been around for a while.

    [00:16:32] So please make sure your bios and even the imagery of you. I was using this one headshot, which is so funny. Uh, my teenager took of me. I loved, it wasn’t even a headshot cuz I don’t like professional head shots. It was more of like a lifestyle shot that I used for everything. And it had been this kind of poster of me and finally I realized I was like 20 pounds less and way less wrinkles.

    [00:16:56] And I remember seeing that picture and thinking to myself, [00:17:00] holy moly, if somebody saw me now, they would be sorely disappointed if that’s, if that’s who they thought they were meeting. You know, I mean, I’m just keeping it real. Make sure your photos are updated. Make sure that how you present yourself represents who you are and your personality and your strength and, and shoot even your weaknesses.

    [00:17:20] If you’re like me, I just try to air out all of our dirty laundry so you can, so you can learn from my mistakes. Don’t, don’t use a very, very old headshot from when you were super skinny and a bikini when you were 18. If you are 55 years old, all right. Okay. So make sure those things are updated. Uh, and number four, let’s make sure you have a full media kit.

    [00:17:39] Okay. There’s a couple things that I want you guys to have in place. We aren’t even talking about these. This triggers me to maybe do a podcast episode on how to create a media kit. But a media kit are multiple pages that break down who you are, the, the areas you speak to, your areas of expertise, but then they also break down your audiences and who you reach and [00:18:00] the different media platforms you’ve been featured on.

    [00:18:03] A media kit also, uh, breaks down the brands that you’ve partnered with. So Media Kit is, is actually a full kit and it can be multiple pages with, you know, your story on one page of bio on another page, case studies on another page, audience reach and breakdown on another page, brands you’ve partnered with on another page.

    [00:18:23] We use media kits in some instances, and those instances moving forward, uh, will arise here on the podcast. As we are moving into a becoming known series, I just wanna mention to you that you should have, especially those of you leaders who have been doing what you’ve been doing for a long time, you should have a full media kit in place it, and then at the least, you should have a one pager on who you are, especially for speaking.

    [00:18:49] We’re also not breaking down how to do that in the show. Usually might have a different one pager for podcast casting, speaking on stages, teaching locally, we wanna curate your. [00:19:00] To the audience. We don’t want generic assets. You’re gonna send everybody the same dang one pager. That’s probably not gonna land you what you want, especially in a very competitive space.

    [00:19:09] We want you to stand out and be thoughtfully disruptive. So just make sure your one pagers, your media kits so they are curated and crafted towards your audience. Okay? And then in that you can also do, you know, your client case studies and testimonies. Other assets that are really important for you to have in place are, please make sure your update, your website is updated.

    [00:19:31] Funny thing, those of us again, who have been here for a while, like sometimes. We’re so busy doing the work, uh, we kind of forget to go back and have a powwow with our team that maybe that is out of date. Just make sure your, your website is up to date. Your social media is up to date. Uh, the content that you’re sharing is up to date and the data that you’re sharing is up to date.

    [00:19:53] All of those things, please make sure that they’re in place. So that you can utilize what we’re talking [00:20:00] about here on the next coming episodes. This mini-series is all about becoming known, and we’re bringing you experts and pulling back behind the curtains about different strategies that are cherry picked to help you make these decisions for yourself so you can hit the ground running with trusted implementation steps.

    [00:20:21] And that is what we’re doing here, and that’s our objective for you as we move into this next series. I hope that sounds great. I’m really excited about it. I can’t wait for you to hear what’s coming from these leaders. There are some huge, huge, valuable, very expensive bombs that are dropped on these upcoming episodes, so please share this and get ready because we’re about to dive into our series on becoming.

    [00:20:49] If you are new here, it’s so nice to meet you. I’m April Beach. I help experts, coaches, consultants, speakers, and authors extract your genius and build transformational next [00:21:00] level programs to scale your business past millions courses, masterminds, retreats, licensing programs and certification programs. So if you’re stuck on.

    [00:21:12] And you want somebody to help you engineer your next level, offer ecosystem, extract your thoughts, help you organize it, and build it into next level programs. Cruise over to sweet life co.com and you can apply to work with us. Otherwise, all of the resources that we are talking about here on this show, in the past episodes and the upcoming episodes are found sweetlifeco.com. Simply click on the podcast. This is episode number 2 71, and I can’t wait for the next couple weeks. Please share this with your friends. It would really mean a great deal to us. All right, see all soon. Bye.[00:22:00] 

     

     
     

    How to License your IP and Scale your Coaching Business – with April Beach (Episode 270)

    How to License your IP and Scale your Coaching Business

     

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for?

    Established entrepreneurs with proven methods and coaching programs who are ready to go from selling to individuals to selling to companies through bulk access deals

    This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for established entrepreneurs who are interested in learning how to scale your business exponentiallythrough licensing your content, course or program.

     

    Summary:

    If you’re an established entrepreneurs with a proven programs, courses, or content, and you’re looking to grow exponentially, then this episode is for you. By creating content to license you can demonstrate thought leadership in your space, increase credibility across your audience, expand your business to B2B or create a dual business model.

    This an intro to licensing for entrepreneurs those want to know how content licensing works, those who want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space through Licensing, those interested in transitioning from B2C to B2B in some capacity. This show will give you a good foundation and knowledge base to consider your options.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. know what licensing is and how to make money doing it
    2. know the business model of licensing and if it’s right for you
    3. know the prerequisites to license your content
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
     
     

    Licensing Information Webinar

    License2scale

    Or Text “license” to 805-254-0880 

    www.sweetlifeco.com  

     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    270

    [00:00:44] Hi friends, and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 270 and you are listening to the Sweet Life Podcast in April Beach, and we are gonna dive into a really hot topic.

    [00:00:56] I feel like this is really hot topic because I received literally hundreds of phone [00:01:00] calls a year about how to do what we’re gonna talk. On today’s show today we are talking about how to license your IP to scale your coaching business. And as a little bit of a background, if this is totally new to you, just pause here and go back and listen to Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, episode number 230.

    [00:01:23] Five, because in episode number 2 35, I talked about licensing 1 0 1 in some of the basics of licensing. And so that’s actually where you should start. And then you can come back to this episode two 70. So if you’re here and you have somewhat of, of an idea of what licensing is and you’re wondering how to take these next steps in, what to do, in how to strategically think about licensing, and maybe you’re just wondering whether or not this is even a good option for you, I’m gonna unpack that for you.

    [00:01:50] Today’s show. As always, I do have a ton of resources for you to help you implement what we’re talking about today. So let me give you where you can go grab those [00:02:00] resources first. The first thing is you can text the word license to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and in there it will give you a download of all the things that you can grab or take action on when it comes to licensing.

    [00:02:17] So that’s first and foremost. Lemme make sure that you have those resources and we’re gonna talk about some of those resources here in the show and how you can actually squeeze out the golden, those resources for your business. Also, of course, you can always listen to the. Of this episode by going to sweet life co.com.

    [00:02:33] Simply click on our podcast link and this is episode number 270, and we have articles about this and resources. If you’re interested in licensing to scale your coaching business, you are certainly in the right place. That’s what we help clients to do. So now let’s talk about who this episode is actually for in, I hate to use the word qualified, but I’m gonna use the word qualified.

    [00:02:56] If you’ve been listening to this show long enough, you know, I don’t beat around the bush. There are some [00:03:00] people who are ready to talk about licensing and there are some people that maybe that they just aren’t there yet. My job in this is to help everybody who chooses to move forward in this direction.

    [00:03:10] Take another step, whether that’s the first step or whether that’s your 50th step towards license. So that’s what we’re gonna do today. So in today’s show, this is for those of you guys who are ready to take maybe step number 5 67. Again, if you were totally new to licensing, go back and listen to episode number 235.

    [00:03:30] So if you have thought about licensing, you think this is a good idea, but maybe you’re not even exactly sure what this is. This show is for you. So this show is for entrepreneurs who are coaches, consultants, or experts. For those of you guys who. Proven methodologies, proven frameworks, proven courses and trainings in programs that have gotten people results.

    [00:03:55] If you haven’t done that yet, then that’s where I actually want you to start. If you [00:04:00] haven’t created a transformational course or a transformational training program yet, I can also help you with that. That’s what we help businesses do to take this longer term business journey. So just cruise over to sweet life co.com and we can hook you up with how to build a transformational online course and training program.

    [00:04:17] But this show is for those of you guys who have already done that, you know that you’re good at what you do, you are super confident it your ability of getting people results, and if you feel like you are in this place, You’re kind of tired of online marketing. Some, I mean, some people love online marketing.

    [00:04:35] If you’re feeling like I’m a little tired of online marketing, I’m, I’m a little tired of selling, uh, individual, two individuals, one-to-one. Uh, I’m a little tired of launches. Um, little, little sick and tired of funnels. Shh. We’ll whisper that quietly. , actually, I think, I think there’s a lot of people that are, we’re ready to just like cut the funnel in a million pieces and shorten it as much as possible.

    [00:04:56] Then you’re in the right place. So [00:05:00] if you are in that stage where you have had a coaching and consulting business, you’re an expert, you’re a teacher, you’re an author, Speaker and you have been serving individuals or even smaller groups, and now you want to change the way you do business. So you want to not have to hustle so much to sell your training or your course, or your program, or your mastermind or whatever it is to individuals.

    [00:05:23] And instead we wanna sell it in one bulk swoop. Times a hundred bulk swos, then content licensing, program licensing could be a good option for you. So let’s first of all dive into what you can expect at the end of this episode. So if this is for you and you’re ready to dive into this, lemme tell you what you can expect at the end.

    [00:05:45] At the end of this episode, you are gonna know exactly what course or content or IP licensing. . It’s different than licensing photographs for photographers, right? So you’re gonna know exactly what this is. You are gonna know the business model [00:06:00] of licensing in whether or not this is a road that you wanna walk down.

    [00:06:04] But unlike episode 2 35, where we really go in depth about those in this show, I’m also helping you guys know. Five things that you have to figure out in your business to move forward in licensing. So we’re gonna go even deeper in this, and these are decisions that you need to make in your business in order to move forward and build your first licensing package.

    [00:06:26] So we’re gonna, we’re gonna go a bit deeper in here for you, so if that sounds good, then stay here. We’re in the right place. So first of all, let’s talk about what actually is content licensing. So content licensing is allowing other c. To utilize your training, your program, your course, your systems, and to distribute it to their people.

    [00:06:50] Okay, so let me say it again. Allowing other companies or organizations, nonprofits can be huge corporations, it can be even smaller businesses to [00:07:00] utilize your trainings to distribute to their people. It this enables them to make more. because they can increase what they charge because they’ve increased the value of what they do for businesses, that that applies to, uh, provide better services.

    [00:07:16] So for corporations, for example, if your training helps somebody level up a skill, they can provide better training services to their employees or provide better employee benefits to the people that they wanna take care of. And even. Top talent to their business and it can help them to deliver superior content.

    [00:07:37] So licensing is a win-win, especially for the businesses that are looking. And there are, I will tell you, there are businesses out there that are constantly searching for great programs like yours because it makes what they do even better, easier. It makes what they. , uh, emphasizes what they already do. It helps people to be more [00:08:00] successful at what they want people to be successful at, and frankly, you can make a lot of money on it.

    [00:08:06] So those are the things that we’re gonna dive in today, that is the end result of what you can expect today. But the true legal definition of licensing is not selling your course. Okay. So when we license, And by the way, I’m gonna say this as a disclaimer. I am not an attorney, but I’ve licensed my own content for over 13 years now.

    [00:08:27] And so we talk about this a lot when we talk about licensing. It’s the legal structures of it. It’s allowing somebody else to like rent your training. It’s like renting your content, having access to your genius, your frameworks, what you’ve been teaching. Probably for a really long time and allowing them to distribute it so you’re giving them a pass for a certain period of time.

    [00:08:52] we’re gonna dive into that today. You’re giving them a pass for a certain period of time to distribute your training, and it’s a beautiful thing when [00:09:00] you do that. So again, let me just make sure I’m being really, really clear that licensing does not mean that you are selling your content. You still own a hundred percent of the rights to that content, and that’s a really important thing.

    [00:09:11] One of the things that we do run into with our clients as people come to us for help with licensing, I’m just gonna tell you up front, so please don’t make this mistake. Oftentimes a company will approach you and they will love your stuff. Maybe they hear you speaking on stage. This is literally true story times three that’s happened to people who’ve come to us, they’ve spoken on a stage, somebody in that audience loves what they have to say.

    [00:09:36] That executive comes up to them and says, Hey, listen, we really want you to come and bring your program. into our ecosystem in, into our corporation, and it’s really flattering and super exciting, especially if you haven’t thought about this before. When companies approach you and you start talking about what that could look like, cuz you’re excited about it and they’re excited about it, and nobody realizes that maybe in those [00:10:00] conversations, w we’re kind of giving them your stuff and you don’t mean.

    [00:10:06] So what I mean by that is if you have been approached by a company who’s super excited about what you’re doing and they wanna bring you in, it’s really important that we take a pause and make sure it doesn’t become what we call, you know, work made for a hire where you’re creating a program for them instead.

    [00:10:22] And why you’re here is I wanna help you structure your program so that not just one company can. So that tons of companies can have it and you can make a lot of money and be a lot, a huge blessing to all these companies to get access to your program. These are true things that happen. The other thing I wanna say is at beginning to what we’re about to talk about, Because I really love to tell you guys everything in a very short period of time on these podcast episodes is that if you are here, and you’ve already started down the road of talking to a company about licensing and maybe you didn’t realize that you needed to have some certain legal protections in place, it’s okay.[00:11:00] 

    [00:11:00] About 80% of clients come to us after they’ve already started talking to a company about licensing, or they’ve already been down the road and they’re really excited about the conversation and they just come to us because the only question they know to ask is, how do I price this? And what I’m gonna explain to you here is the answer to pricing is five steps into our project plan of licensing.

    [00:11:22] We can’t even answer that question until we build the parameters on the package of what you’re giving. . So please don’t make a mistake and quote a price until you’ve had an opportunity to gain wisdom on what the value of your program is, and that comes with, yay, what we’re talking about here today. So let’s go ahead and dive into it.

    [00:11:40] So as we are talking about the benefits of licensing, if you are not familiar, again, go back and listen to episode number 235, but this can really move you forward to that next level of, of, of your business. This is getting you into that thought leadership space. and it also helps us to move you from [00:12:00] that B2C, if you will, type of business.

    [00:12:02] Even if you were selling to other businesses, we’ll call it business to individual sales, um, to to business, to on a grander scale, right? So we’re selling, the way we are selling your program is different, so we kind of end up with two different branches of your business. Some of our clients actually create a whole different sub-brand for the licensing side of their business, and that works really well too.

    [00:12:25] Let’s go ahead and talk about these decisions that need to be made as you are going through the licensing process. So as you were working towards packaging it, a couple of things you need to think about and this leads us to you selling your program. This leads us to you pricing your program. The first one is brand.

    [00:12:47] What do I mean by branding? There are three different ways that we can release your training to another company for licensing. The first one is As is as your content. So it’s your logo all over [00:13:00] it. It’s your name all over it. You’re branding colors. They’re just literally taking what you’ve already done in your course, in your training program, and they’re just putting it into their lms, some.

    [00:13:13] Okay. That is super easy. It works really well. Number two is co-branding. Co-branding is probably the most popular way that our clients license their content. So co-branding is where we can have your logo on it, but also their information as well. So it could be April Beach’s licensing course for Comcast Cable or whatever it is.

    [00:13:34] So we can use the name of your program and bring it in with theirs and they can actually co-brand it and co-branding works really well for you, and I like it for you. I’m protective of you guys. As you know, those of you guys have been listening to the show for freaking six years. I’m really protective of you.

    [00:13:51] The reason why I like this is because I still want people to know who you are, especially if where we’re going in the future requires you [00:14:00] to be a thought leader in your space. So that’s why co-branding or having it branded as your own is a really great idea. The third is called white labeling. White labeling.

    [00:14:09] Nobody knows who the heck you are. It doesn’t matter that you created this program. Nobody is going to know that it came from you. Now, the levels of branding. Match how much value your program can be licensed. . All right, so they’re gonna pay you more money to white label it and call it their own than they would to have it just as your brand.

    [00:14:32] But the question that I ask our clients is, is it worth it? In most cases it’s not. Now, I have eight online courses that I have licensed since 2009, but they’re in my parent coaching industry. You guys, I could care. Anybody realizes that I created the parent coaching industry, I’m totally in a whole different generation, decades later.

    [00:14:56] It’s ridiculous, right? So I could care less if [00:15:00] anybody knows they’re my classes, because that’s not what my business is. That’s, that’s literally, it’s an entirely separate company than what I operate in now. So think about that for you when we’re thinking about white labeling, but they will pay you more money.

    [00:15:15] So question number one. and just be thinking about this to yourself is how do you wanna brand it? What is important to you in the delivery of the way this program looks? Number two is reach. Reach is really important, and you might not know the answer to this upfront. Oftentimes we talk about reach when we’re in sales.

    [00:15:37] Conversations with companies reaches how many people are gonna have access. All right. How many people in a certain geographic area are gonna have access to it? Or even how many people within a certain niche. So for example, if a company wants to license your training, but they don’t want you to turn around and license it to any of their competitors, That’s [00:16:00] reach, that’s how far your program can reach, and so your pricing is going to match accordingly.

    [00:16:08] So first one was branding, second one was reach. The third one is, the third one is length of time. How long do they get to access your training? How long do they get to distribute your training? How long do they have to actually utilize your training as part of their program? And so length of time is number three.

    [00:16:32] And then the fourth one is I want you to think about whether or not you are interested in or willing to provide updates. Does that apply to what you’re doing? Some of our programs, you guys, we have to provide updates, especially if it’s something that might be more technical or even medical. There are some things we constantly have to update in order to keep that program accurate.

    [00:16:56] Or what you also can do is you also can send [00:17:00] updates to the licensee and require them to update the program. Are you gonna deliver this beautifully packaged thing with a silver bow on it every time an update comes? Is that included in the price that you are giving them? Now, let’s kind of pause for a second.

    [00:17:16] Have a little sidebar over here. I want you guys to create your curriculum for longevity . I really don’t want you building licensed curriculum. Then we’re gonna have to go back and record all the time. All right, so how we package your licensed curriculum? how we extract the content from your license curriculum, from your course.

    [00:17:40] What we choose to take out of a course you’ve already had is dependent on your long-term goals on how we want to move forward with licensing. . There is no right or wrong way, and I say this to our clients all the time. They come to us and they’re like, April, just tell me what to do. Listen, I have [00:18:00] no problem telling you guys what to do.

    [00:18:01] I actually do that all the time with our clients. But my job is to present the options to you and to help you understand how the decisions that you make, they’re not my decisions, they’re yours. How you guys make these decisions are going to affect your business and your profit and your. Okay. And so there are no right 10 steps to license your stuff.

    [00:18:24] I mean, you see those articles, places, we even have articles written on our website. And here I am recording this podcast teaching guys how to license your stuff. But I wanna be honest with you that in each one of these decisions is a choose your own adventure. On what you want this to look like. There is no cookie cutter way to do this because a licensed package, although it comes from a framework, a course, a program, although we have a systematic project plan to release it to every company.

    [00:18:58] When it comes down to [00:19:00] how you do that, how much you include in it, how many people have access to it, how it’s branded, how, how long they have access, That is totally up to you, and you have the power to make that choice, and there is no right or wrong way. So our goal here today is for me to talk about these things that I want you guys thinking about.

    [00:19:23] Okay? Now let me unpack totally behind the scenes of the Sweet Life Company now, and I’m gonna be really, really, really honest with you guys. I want to help people license their content. I get paid a lot of money to coach entrepreneurs how to license their content, but when people first come to me, they usually aren’t ready to have that conversation.

    [00:19:45] So part of my goal in this podcast is to help you guys get ready so that I can work with you, so that I can help you in getting your business, not even like to the finish line we’re talking about here, getting [00:20:00] your business to the starting line. For us to be able to have a project plan and walk you through these strategic decisions.

    [00:20:09] That’s the point of this show because you guys, this is a hidden secret. I, I’m not everywhere on social media. You guys know who you follow me? I’m on Instagram. I’m like posting pictures of my kids. I’m not some big online social media influencer. So I’m not out there screaming from the top of the mountains how profitable and simple the business model of licensing is.

    [00:20:32] And I want to be able to do that for you. I want to be able to share this with you and give you guys this secret. And so this show in my goal here is getting you to that place where I can have a conversation with you again. Say, here you go. Here’s our project plan. Let’s start checking. And that’s what we’re talking about here tonight, today in this show, whenever you’re listening to it.

    [00:20:56] So let’s recap. These are the things that I want you to be thinking [00:21:00] about, and you do not have to make these decisions by yourself. You should not make these decisions alone, but you do know that they’re decisions that are going to come. your direction when you work on licensing. So I want you to be thinking about them now.

    [00:21:15] These are the things that I work with our clients to make these strategic decisions, and again, it’s different for every one of you. So let’s kind of recap the four decisions that you’re gonna wanna make for us to get you to the starting line. for the licensing process. Number one is decide how you wanna brand this.

    [00:21:33] Is it branded as you? Is it co-branded? Is it gonna be white labeled? Do you have other programs that maybe you don’t sell anymore that it doesn’t matter that we totally can white label and we can sell those for more? Think about that. Number two is how much reach, how many people are you comfortable allowing to access your training or your program at a time?

    [00:21:54] We have clients that license their program to smaller businesses with only 20, 30 [00:22:00] employees. , and then we have clients that license their program to businesses with over 10,000 employees. And so where’s that comfort level for you and really what does that look like in your parameters of what you’re doing professionally?

    [00:22:16] The third thing is length of time. How long can a company have access to your course and your. . And then the fourth one is renewals and updates, right? Are you gonna be willing to do that in, what do we need to do when we look at your curriculum to actually package it for longevity? Or is that something that you can actually charge more because you have such an amazing high level gold standard licensing package?

    [00:22:41] What if you drop new content to them and it’s part of your agreement every 90 days or every six? Companies will pay you a lot of money to do that, especially, especially when you do it well. And that’s what we’re talking about here and it’s totally up to you. And let me leave [00:23:00] you with one more thing that I want you guys to think about.

    [00:23:02] Again, the goal is getting you to the starting line here so that you can think about whether or not there’s a good option for you to move forward with. The last thing that I want you to think, is understanding what you wanna be known for. So let me clarify that. What do you want people to say about you?

    [00:23:24] When somebody is talking about you and they’re saying, Hey, listen, April’s a person to go to for licensing, or Sarah’s a person to go to. , I don’t know, intermittent fasting or meditation or how to generate high value leads from LinkedIn. Whatever it is you guys do. Okay. Do you still wanna be known for that three to five years from now?

    [00:23:50] Because when we engineer licensing correctly, you can build your Nick’s level known. On a mountain of licensing, [00:24:00] you can choose what you want people to say about you, what you want that book to be about, what you want that tag talk to be about. And if in particularly if we are doing co-branding or branded as you, you’re gonna wanna think about that.

    [00:24:14] If it’s white labeled, and this is totally separate the way I do it. It doesn’t matter, but give yourself permission to actually think about that, to consider what you wanna be known for in the next 2, 3, 5, 10 years, because we can certainly accomplish that when it’s executed correctly through licensing.

    [00:24:31] But I want you to think about that ahead of time. So in summary, today we went a little bit deeper on licensing. . The whole purpose of this show is getting you guys to that starting line so that you can be ready to move forward in packaging your license product. And again, you need to think about how do you want it branded?

    [00:24:50] How many people have access to it? What is the length of time and will you provide updates? And to wrap it all up together, let’s make sure that the answers to those align with your long-term [00:25:00] goals and what you wanna be known. . And when you are to this place where you’re at least thinking about this, you know, people say to me, April, I just, I don’t know what I don’t know.

    [00:25:10] And so my goal here through this podcast is I want you guys to know what you don’t know, and this is where to start. These are the things I want you to start thinking about. And then, We can move forward and craft a custom project plan for you. So let me tell you where those resources are. We have a totally amazing free resource.

    [00:25:28] It’s a 40 minute video on foundations of licensing 1 0 1, where it’s much more in depth to what I talked about here today. You can tap into that free video at any point in time. It’s always on demand, and you can access that. We have a one day workshop called License to Scale, where I actually roll up my sleeve with you and help you build your first license package.

    [00:25:49] And then of course we have our licensing accelerator, which is called Amplify. Whatever works for you guys, you’re all in a different place. I’m here to serve you in all levels. . So please use this [00:26:00] podcast, share this podcast, take notes on this podcast, shoot, transcribe this podcast. We actually already have it transcribed for you.

    [00:26:07] Whatever you need to do, please do it. because this is the hidden secret that not enough people are talking about that scales coaches, business of coaches in Expon exponentially, and I can’t even talk anymore. It’s at the end of the day here. Um, one thing we are not talking about today that we’re gonna be diving into in future episodes is how to combine coaching on top of content licensing.

    [00:26:29] That is a different conversation, and I’m not gonna be able to get into it today, but I just wanna let you know that that is. something that you should be thinking about to help companies implement even. All right. Thank you so much for listening to this show. All right, so let’s talk about where you can get these resources and where you can tap into these things.

    [00:26:49] First of all, just text the word license to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, and then you’re gonna be texted back these three links so you can just pick and [00:27:00] choose whatever you wanna eat up. All right. Number two, go over to our website if you click on sweet life co.com and then click on the podcast button. This is episode number 270, so you can find all of the show notes, the transcription for this, and all the links and all the resources that we’re talking about here.

    [00:27:18] If you go to our website, and then if you want to jump in our next workshop, you can very simply just go to license. And then the number two and then the word scale.com. So you can go to license2scale.com when you are ready to dive into that workshop. I teach it three times a year. It is live and live only.

    [00:27:40] It’s not something that’s gonna be recorded. I wanna work with you on your first licensing package. Depending on when you’re listening to this, we do have one in January, 2023 coming up. If that’s you, make sure that you go to license2scale.com and you jump in that. Otherwise, you can always send us an email to podcast@sweetlifeco.com and we’d [00:28:00] be happy to redirect you to any of these resources if you forget.

    [00:28:03] Okay. Thank you so much for listening to this show. I’m so glad to be back with you guys. This is the second generation of the episode. Your implementation for this is to dive into these five questions that I gave you. Even if you only think of one of them. Give yourself permission to think of one of these branding length of time updates, and you’re already gonna be further than you were when you first started listening to this show.

    [00:28:27] I wanna see you guys make progress and I wanna see you make fast progress. That’s the point, guys. All right, you guys be awesome and I’ll talk to you next week.

     
     

    How to Create an Online Certification Program for Coaches, Consultants, and Experts – with April Beach (Episode 269)

    How to Create an Online Certification Program for Coaches, Consultants, and Experts

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for? 
    Established coaches, consultants, and experts who are ready to scale their business to the next level.  Coaches with well established methods, processes and/or frameworks that have proven to give people transformational results, who are considering creating a certification program and want to know where to start. 
     
     
    Summary:
    Certification programs are a great way to scale your coaching business. However, most people don’t know where to start or how to go about building, releasing and managing a certification program. 
     
    In this episode we break down the steps to building an online certification program. 
    Download the Checklist to Build an Online Certification Program HERE
     
    In addition, we’re also discussing who should and who should not create a certification program, the pros and cons of this business model, how this type of offer will affect your long term business growth, what your future life will look like with a certification program, and of course the elephant on the room regarding the legitimacy and credibility of certification programs. 
     
     
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Know the steps to create and launch a certification program
    2. Have a clearer understanding of launching a certification program is for you
     
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
    How To Launch Your Certification Program Checklist
    Access the checklist here
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     
    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    269

    [00:00:45] Hi you guys. Welcome back to the show. This is episode 2 69 and of course, all of the show notes and everything that we’re gonna be talking about here can be found by visiting sweet life podcast.com/ 2 69. This episode is really, And the reason why I actually changed our content recording calendar to make sure that you guys had this training was because I have received so many inquiries on how to build a certification program because many of you guys know that’s what I do.

    [00:01:17] If we don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I help experts, coaches, and consultants scale their business by building million dollar programs, engineering offers that truly bring in the impact that they’re making into the world while scaling their business in a way that they wanna live their life.

    [00:01:33] And so that’s what we’re talking about in this show in very specifically regarding certifications. So again, all of the show notes can be found where I promised you. As well as I have created a checklist for you guys that goes along with this show. This checklist is the how to launch a certification checklist that can be found in the same link to the show notes.

    [00:01:56] Again, sweetLifepodcast.com/269, or also by texting the word certify to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Okay, so let’s get into it. This is what we’re talking about on this show. If you are not subscribed yet, I would love for you to subscribe to this show and share this with your friends.

    [00:02:16] Here we are talking about how to actually build a certification program. First and foremost, who is this for? This show is for established coaches, consultants and experts who are ready to scale their business to the next level. This is for those of you guys that are well-established. You have well-established methods, frameworks, and processes, and you have proven to get other people results through these processes in the past.

    [00:02:45] This is not a show for you. If you are not a well established consultant or expert, or teacher or coach, and you haven’t gotten other people results yet. If you’re to that place where we’re just building your first course or your first program, cruise over to sweet life co.com and I will teach you exactly how to launch your first course or your first program that guarantees a transformation.

    [00:03:09] But this show is for those of you guys, you’ve already done that, in that we are ready to go to the next level. So if that’s you, stay tuned with me. If it’s not, you go listen to another one of our episodes on how to scale your business with online courses, and we’ll get you to this point.

    [00:03:23] I’m committed to get you to this next level. So what we’re talking about here on this show is all about certifications. So we all know certifications are a great way to skill your business. However, most people don’t really know how to do. Don’t really know how to navigate those process of certifications.

    [00:03:39] And so in this show, what you can expect at the end of this episode is I’m gonna give you the steps to launch a certification. All right? We are gonna walk away here. You’re gonna have the steps. I’ve already created a checklist for you, so you can take this cheat sheet, you can take notes, you can download it.

    [00:03:55] Make sure you do that and be able to implement what we’re talking about today in addition to. We’re also gonna talk about who should and should not create a certification program. We’re gonna talk about the legitimacy of certification programs, and we’re gonna talk about why you may want to create a certification program.

    [00:04:14] So if that sounds good to you, let’s go ahead and go. So first and foremost, I wanna talk about the fact that it’s gonna sound terrible. Actually, in the beginning of the show. I’m gonna talk about the fact that there’s a lot of certification programs that mean nothing out there. So let me tell you a little story without naming names.

    [00:04:32] Back in 2006, I created the baby planning parent coaching industry . First of all, many of you guys have no idea about that. It’s so fun. Like those of you who’ve been a legacy business mentor and coach, talking about your origin story and where you came from. So I just so happened to be the creator of the scope of practice and the international baby planning and maternity consulting industry years ago.

    [00:04:58] With that being said, I was also the co-founder of this international association, and we had a member in this association who was launching her business and her business wasn’t going well. She wasn’t making money, she wasn’t serving clients. As a matter of fact, as far as I understood, she had never actually served a client before, and so she came up with the idea of launching a certification program for baby planners.

    [00:05:29] All right, because it was a great business idea, but yet this woman had actually never done that before, and since she has gone on to make a ton of money, because it’s a great business model, certifications are a great business model, and I hate to throw somebody under the bus, but I mean, I’m just calling it like it is here on this podcast. You guys know me. Those people that launched certification programs as a money-making scheme who aren’t actually amazing at what they do, don’t have a proven methodology, haven’t served clients before. They’re full of shit, you guys. Okay? So we have to have a conversation first about the legitimacy of certification programs.

    [00:06:04] I mean, my son could create. Dog walking certification and he could teach the other kids in the neighborhood, like his process of walking dogs. That could be so great. Right? And then he could actually make money off referring the local residents here to certified dog walkers. Right. You guys, first and foremost, we really need to have a conversation about the legitimacy of certifications.

    [00:06:29] If you are launching a certification in an area that has a whole bunch of certifications, take a look at that, see what’s out there, and see why those things are needed. The fact of the matter is that many certifications, especially those in the online coaching space, are created by people as a genius business.

    [00:06:51] I mean, it’s a genius business model. That’s why you’re here. That’s why we’re talking about it. I mean, frankly, That’s why I coach clients to create certifications. But we always wanna first have the conversation of making sure your certification program isn’t total bullshit. Just being honest. Okay, . So let’s talk about what governing bodies are in your niche.

    [00:07:14] Niche that oversee the legitimacy of certifications. If you are in an area where there is an established governing body, That oversees this process of this, whatever it is that you do, then I recommend that you first start there and find out what their requirements are to create a certification program to become accredited or to be recognized.

    [00:07:43] That’s what I help clients do. I have clients with accredited certification programs and, and it is an amazing way to scale your business, but I really wanted to make sure, as you know, those of you guys have listened to this show before. I’m always gonna keep it real. So on the pro, the pro side of it is building a certification is a very, very smart way to build your business as long as we have a unique method, process, and framework that is.

    [00:08:12] Sometimes totally different or it could even be similar to some other things that are out there, but you’re bringing in your genius on the way you’ve done it, the way you’ve proven to get people results, and you’re amazing at it. And now it’s time to certify other people in your process. All right, so I just wanted to get that outta the way at first because I don’t feel like I can dive into this episode of how to create a certification program until we talk about who should not create a certification program.

    [00:08:42] The second part, kind of prerequisite here I wanna talk about before we get into these steps is I want you to really think about what a certification program is gonna look like with your life. So if you have not. Grabbed my ultimate guide to online offers and business models. You totally should. It’s like 30 pages that tells you that when you launch a certain type of business model and offer exactly how that’s going to affect your life.

    [00:09:10] All right, so you can grab that just by texting guide to that same number, 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. All right, but in the meantime, let’s kind of dive into that and I’m gonna give you some background. A certification program is not one of these offers that we can launch, that you might just decide like a year from now you don’t want to do anymore.

    [00:09:31] This is a longer term business model, and we really need to make sure that it is going to align with your longer term goals for your business. So that’s step number. And there are processes in like the building and the frameworks of that certification that we’ll get into in a second that affect that.

    [00:09:48] But I want you to just like take a second here, and just because somebody says it might be a great idea to launch a certification, I want you to understand that just like launching a podcast, a podcast is a long-term game, right? We’ve been doing this for six freaking years, right? What, what is that going to look like for your life. For your teams, for your cadence, and what is launching a certification going to do to elevate your personal professional goals? How is it gonna look like on your time and your life and your travel and your profit?

    [00:10:22] If the answers to those questions are like, yes, this is gonna be amazing for me. This is exactly what I want. I’m ready to take leadership and ownership in this. , then you’re in the right place. Okay? If you’re like, gosh, I’m not really sure that I wanna be in a certification for that long, or I, I wanna be responsible for all these people, then definitely you do yourself a favor and take a pause. There are so many coaches out there that tell you guys, you have to launch a course, or you have to launch a mastermind. You have to launch a membership. All these things.

    [00:10:52] I’m here to tell you that yes, we can scale your business with all of those, and I will teach you exactly how to do each one. But they will affect your life. And if you’re like me, I travel with my kids six months a year, and my business model is very carefully engineered because I know the outcome of having that offer and what it will do to my time in my life.

    [00:11:12] All right, so I got that outta the way. Now you guys ready? Let’s go ahead and dive into the steps of how to create and launch your certification. Again, the checklist that goes along with it is a really important tool for you guys. You can grab by going over to sweetlifepodcast.com/269, or you can text the word certify to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, and you guys can grab this and you’ll be off and running.

    [00:11:44] All right, so step number one, to, creating a certification program, you need to have a unique method, process, or framework that guarantees results. All right? It doesn’t have to be totally different, and I have podcasts for you. We have resources, and I’m here to coach you on how to create a method, process or framework, but that’s not where we’re diving into today.

    [00:12:09] First and foremost, we just need to make sure that you have a method or process or framework that has been proven to get people results in the past. That is step number one. All right, so if you pass step number one, great. Let’s go to step number two. Number two, we need to then build out that into a coaching program with your process, your systems, your videos, your downloads, your assets, just like we are building it when we build it into a course.

    [00:12:38] So for many of you guys, you already have this built. Okay? We need to clone that because we’re gonna build it for a different audience now, right? So it’s not necessarily going to the end user. Now we’re fitting a middle user in the middle who is becoming your student, who’s becoming certified in your methodology.

    [00:12:58] So we wanna clone that because there are other things that we need to add to that, which I’m gonna tell you next. And there are other things that we might actually not include in a certification program based on what it is that you’re teaching and the audience you’re delivering it to.

    [00:13:14] So step number one is your method and framework as well established. You are like the bees knees at what you do. You’re amazing. You’ve got people results. Step number two is actually building out that training Now. Again, not getting into the nitty gritty of this, but on a side note, if you are licensing your certification program to another company to deliver for you, there’s gonna be different places where you may build out your program in, it might be in their l m s instead of your database.

    [00:13:44] Hit me up if you have questions about that. That’s what I help our clients figure out, but I just wanted to share that with you on a side note. Okay.

    [00:13:50] Number three, you need to be sure that you have gotten people results in this course before. I know that I feel like I’m beating a dead horse, but you guys have no idea how many people want to create programs to certify or license that have actually like never sold it before and you know, I just shared with you that story in the beginning, it will blow your mind again, we want your certification program to be like amazing.

    [00:14:16] Step number four, consider how this business model is gonna affect your life. Okay, so now let’s kind of get into this a little bit. With certifications, you’re gonna have a choice of how you deliver them. Is it only on demand? Is it on demand with some coaching? And what is the, like, the lifetime of a client or a student? Or a certified person going to look like? And is that something that you want to do and be responsible for? What is the cadence of your week gonna look like? Is this something that is going to fit into your long-term business model?

    [00:14:54] And does it elevate all those other things that you wanna do in your business? Or if this is the primary thing you wanna do in your. Awesome. That’s amazing. This is exactly what you should be listening to right now, but if this is just kind of another piece to a whole bunch of other stuff you do, we have to be really careful of what that’s gonna look like and frankly, how well you’re gonna be able to execute that based on your teams and your operations and how we’re scaling your company.

    [00:15:22] Number five, you are going to create a trainer guide. Okay, so this kind of Train the Trainer Guide actually teaches your students not only the contents that’s in the program, but then how to turn around and teach it. Most coaches, most people are actually not teachers. They just are great at doing their one area of expertise.

    [00:15:46] So it’s really important that you engineer an amazing Train the Trainer guide that teaches people how to deliver your systems, philosophies, and methods and processes to the end user in transformative ways. Nobody needs more content. They need a transformation. And we need to assure that those people that you’re certifying are going to be able to deliver a transformation to the people that they are delivering your processes to.

    [00:16:15] And so we have to have very serious conversations about making sure that we are creating and equipping them to do so. And what does that look like to you? You know, how do we get them into your mind? How do we get them into understanding like why you do things a certain way? All of that is within engineering of your program, by the way.

    [00:16:35] Number six, determine if you’re gonna give them marketing materials. Okay? So this is like this hidden amazing, like we’re gonna blow your business outta the water. When I talk about the swipe files and the marketing materials that we can give people who are certified in your method, It is so amazing because they’ve gone through the process of getting certified, and now we can create an entire marketing packet where they can share across their social that says, Hey, listen, I’m certified in April’s methodology and da, da da, da.

    [00:17:07] And what happens? It elevates your brand, it elevates your legitimacy, and it makes you more money in addition to making them look good. But not every certification program actually needs to include this. So you need to determine number six, if you’re gonna deliver marketing materials, licensing of your logo, your content, your videos, and your IP for them to deliver to their students.

    [00:17:29] All right, here’s a little sidebar. Come over here with me for a minute. Licensing and certifications in combination are the number one way that we can scale your business to exponential results and profit faster. But again, it’s not for everybody. If this is you, you wanna hear more about it, send me a message.

    [00:17:50] This is what we do again at the Sweet Life Company, but I want you to consider. When you are teaching somebody your method, are you also licensing your content to them? Are you also allowing them to use your materials? What does that look like to you? And we need to make sure that your licensing agreements are in place.

    [00:18:10] This is not a show on licensing your ip. I have many more of those, but I just wanna make sure that we’re talking about this in step number six is determining the marketing materials, the content, and the assets you’re gonna give people with a certifiication. This also helps us price your certification.

    [00:18:27] Number seven, are you guys with me? Is determining the best way to test for competency? Now let’s talk about that as well. The smartest people in the world. I think the smartest people in the world are terrible. Old school test, take test takers. They’re the people that like bomb the S A T s, and they’re the people that if you sit down and you let them explain exactly their awareness and understanding, they’re just going be amazing at teaching how they understand what you’ve taught them or sharing that.

    [00:19:06] So when we’re talking about measuring results, I want you to, I’m not gonna go into this in depth. This is what we do with our clients, but I want you to be okay with being disruptive in how you are measuring the learning based on what works for your program. It can be verbal testing, written testing, video, and audio submissions and more. But I want you to disrupt. The way things are done according to what makes sense for your program and your new certified student.

    [00:19:36] Number eight, consider if you will offer continuing education or require it. Not all certifications have to have continuing ed. So I want you to think about what this actually means for your business, and this is going to affect your life. All right, so whatever that looks like for you. Do you have advanced trainings? Can we actually take pieces of your program and offer them as next level certifications? What actually does that look like as far as your overall offer ecosystem?

    [00:20:11] And last but not least, what else can we do to scale your business through a certification? What other offers in that ecosystem can we create? Do you wanna build a mastermind? Do you wanna have retreats for your certified people? Do you want to have. Uh, online groups. Do you want to have office hours where you can troubleshoot with them some of the things that might be happening within their clients based on your certification?

    [00:20:37] Those are all ways where we continue to scale your business by having additional offers that always go back to support those certified students in your method. And when we as coaches do a really good job supporting our people, it builds their business, which therefore builds our business. Okay, so I hope you guys found this informative.

    [00:21:00] I know this is like a full blown crash course. Me just chatting here for 20 minutes with you. I promise you guys in the next generation here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, we’re gonna have high value shows in shorter time. So I have to be better at getting to the point for you, and I hope this did the trick.

    [00:21:16] In addition, don’t forget to grab that checklist for how to launch your certification program by texting the word certify to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. And of course you can apply to work with us to build your certification, your content licensing program in your industry, leading courses and programs online by visiting sweet life co.com.

    [00:21:40] And last but not least, if you wanna find the exact show notes, the transcription and all the links and everything I said here for you, you can just cruise over to Sweet Life podcast.com/ 2 69. The implementation for this episode is the checklist I gave you. Download that checklist and go through the process and make sure you’ve made strategic decisions in each one of these areas to build your certification program.

    [00:22:09] If you’re stuck, you guys can always hit me up online. I’m on LinkedIn and we are on Instagram as well. All right, hope you guys have an awesome day and it’s so good to be here with you again. I love being back and recording shows at year six and I really appreciate you. Have a great day everybody.

     
     

    10 Foundations of a Million Dollar Online Business – with April Beach (Episode 268)

    10 Foundations of a Million Dollar Online Business

    <

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Summary:
    Looking to build a profitable online consulting, coaching or expert service business? This episode breaks down the 10 foundations, created by April Beach that are required for a thriving company you’ll love. Once you discover these 10 online business foundations, your business will scale faster and you’l personally thrive as a CEO.
     
     
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
     
    1. Know the 10 Foundations of a Million Dollar Online Business
    2. Identify which building blocks are not aligned in your company
    3. Know how to take the first steps to fix them
     
     
     
    Resources mentioned: 
     
    Apply to work with us https://www.sweetlifeco.com/apply
     
    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    268

    [00:00:46] Hi guys. Welcome back to the show. This is episode number 268, and I’m so glad that you. With me today, this is the NextGen of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. We are entering year number six, and I am [00:01:00] so excited to be working with you again, thank you to all of our amazing listeners for allowing me to take that year off and just recuperate and, and help to think of the vision and how this show can continue to be of service to you as we move into the next five years. So thank you to all of our amazing listeners and all the messages you guys have sent. I’m super excited about all the shows that we have planned. So this is episode number 268, and in this show I wanted to unpack a strategy that I teach to our private clients only.

    [00:01:34] And I felt like it was time to introduce it to you guys here on the show. So we are talking about the 10 foundations of building a million dollar online coaching business. I know that sounds really, really big, but I’m gonna break it down for you today on the show and help you to see this clearly. In your business.

    [00:01:54] As always, all of the show notes can by be found by visiting [00:02:00] sweetlifeco.com. Very simply, just click on the podcast and this is episode number 268. All right, if you and I don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, and I help experts, coaches, and authors and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, content license programs, and certifications for the purpose of high profit, deep impact lifestyle freedom. So everything you’re gonna get here is proven. It’s not pie in the sky. 

    [00:02:32] We deliver trainings and strategies, whether it’s through or our amazing dream team of experts to come in and work with you. And so I want to let you know that this is proven. This is not a brand new podcast, and I’ve been doing this with online business expertise for 17 years. You can trust it, you can take it to the bank. 

    [00:02:49] So let’s go. Number one. We are going to walk away from this episode with you knowing what the 10 foundations are. I created these years back, but I really [00:03:00] felt like it was time to introduce them because a lot of people are missing these. Number two, you’re gonna be able to identify which of these building block foundations you may be missing, or which ones maybe we have spread too thin on in your business. That’ll make sense to you in a second here. And number three, you’re gonna know how to take the first steps to actually fix some of the building blocks and the foundations in your business if you were spread maybe a little bit too. . So if that sounds good to you, let’s go ahead and dive in. 

    [00:03:29] So the beginning of this is, let’s talk about why we need business foundations. So, Whether you, you’re just trying to hit your first consistent 10 K months. Most of you guys are, are well past that here, that listen to the show now, but it doesn’t really matter what it is as far as how, how well you’re doing financially. Sometimes clients come to me when they had built a business and they, they kind of don’t love it. Or they’re making a lot of money, but maybe they had like a lot of offers cuz they listened to what [00:04:00] everybody told them and they launched all this stuff everywhere and it’s just really not working. Okay. So no matter where, what I’m saying is no matter where you are in business, we need to kind of come back to home base. And it doesn’t matter how much money you’re making in these 10 business foundations, I want you to imagine them like we are building a house. These are the bricks that go underneath your house and there are 10 of them and they have to fit well together. All right. If your bricks don’t fit well together, if they don’t play well together, if the, if the, well, I can’t even imagine to even know masonry words.

    [00:04:38] So if the bricks don’t fit, your business is not going to be able to be built up structurally as high as it can be. Oftentimes, there are so many bricks laid in a foundation of a business that it’s spreading you thin as a business leader, and it’s causing you to, um, have things [00:05:00] that aren’t working well and functioning well in your business.

    [00:05:02] So today on this show, I’m breaking down all of these 10 bricks, these 10 business foundations. I’m gonna define them for you high level, and the goal is for you to take a pause, listen to each one of these foundational bricks, and to determine whether or not your bricks are fitting together well. Or maybe you have too many bricks and we need to get.

    [00:05:24] maybe you’re missing some and we need to pay attention to building some. So the 10 foundations that I have defined for building a million dollar online coaching business are as follows. The first foundation is, Business design. This is a unique term that’s unique to me. It’s unique to the Sweet Life Company.

    [00:05:44] We actually call it strategic business design. What this is is awareness of your business model and your ecosystem of offers and how they play together, and how they come together to form [00:06:00] the life. Uh, that you want in your business. So what do I mean by that? We can’t just launch anything. Your business model is what controls your entire business and your life.

    [00:06:11] Your business model is how you serve clients and how you make money. So your business model could be a membership, it could be. Uh, uh, a mastermind. It could be a combination of retreats and a subscription model. There are millions of different business models that we can customize for you, but the first foundation that you need to be aware of is the understanding of how to engineer your perfect business model with the culmination of all of your.

    [00:06:40] Do they all play well together? And does your business model, is it designed to give you that lifestyle and the profit that you want? This is so incredibly important and that’s why it’s foundation number one. It’s the first thing we do with our clients is unpacking what we want their strategic [00:07:00] business designed to look like.

    [00:07:01] Even if we don’t have a built yet, sometimes we’ve gotta tear things down to rebuild. All right, so if this isn’t thought about first, what happens is people just launch a bunch of offers because they could be profitable, and then we end up with a whole bunch of things that aren’t really strategically designed in your business, and that really sometimes maybe you’re overworked, maybe you aren’t making enough money, maybe you have too many teams.

    [00:07:25] There’s just, it’s kind of a hot. So the first foundation to building a profitable million dollar online coaching business is understanding how to do and how to conduct strategic business design. But in your mind right now, for the sake of being in this podcast, I want you to think is, are my offers collectively brought together in such a way that is design?

    [00:07:47] the business and the life that I want. Am I working the way that I want? Am I getting my time off the way I want? Am I making the profit that I plan to make when I launch that business? That is number one. So always [00:08:00] the first foundation and everything else goes out around that. The second business foundation is the engineering of your offers and your programs and your services.

    [00:08:09] So the second. Foundation is making sure that your programs are engineered to give what I call predictable, transformational, measurable results. We have a very, very special proprietary process that we teach businesses called transformational program design. And it’s the process of extracting your genius and making sure that your offers are guaranteed people as long as they follow the steps as you have laid out, are going to achieve the results that you promised.

    [00:08:38] So foundation number one is the whole design of your business foundation. Number two is the correct engineering of your offers. Did you just throw something up there, begin? I say this a million times. Nobody needs more content. They need a transformation. As a matter of fact, as we dive into all the shows going in the years to come, we’re really diving into the nitty gritty of offer engineering and how to deliver a [00:09:00] high value result, possibly in less time.

    [00:09:03] So I want you to really, really think about that. Foundation. Number three is your branding and your messaging. Once we have your offers. and your business ecosystem is created the way that we want it designed. We need to make sure that you have made a strategic decision of what message are you giving, what are you known for?

    [00:09:22] What do you want people to understand about your company? And that obviously holds hands with foundation. Number two, offer engineering. After your offer is engineered and your messaging is very clear, we also wanna talk about your marketing and your content. It’s an extension of making sure your message is clear.

    [00:09:42] Many businesses are out there and they’re putting stuff on social media, but they actually haven’t nailed their messaging. Or what they wanna be known for. And so they are constantly posting things across social media that kind of seem like a hot mess because there is zero messaging or known for strategy engineered behind it.

    [00:09:58] The marketing [00:10:00] and the content comes after identifying what you wanna be known for. And for some of you guys, this is such a review. I totally know that. Okay. But even those of us have been in business for decades. We come to these points of time where we gotta change up what we wanna do. We’re designing this next level of our business, and sometimes what we were known for before, we don’t really wanna be known for anymore.

    [00:10:25] Maybe it’s something new. So stop and take a pause even if you’ve done a really great job of this in the past for where you are professionally and where you are personally. And make sure that your messaging and your marketing aligns with the where you wanna go for the next 10. If that is a review for you.

    [00:10:45] The third thing that we wanna review and make sure it’s all aligned is your sales. Now, this is your sales process. This is how you’re bringing people into your ecosystem. There’s many different ways we can sell, right? We can just open up a shopping cart and somebody can buy it. You can hold [00:11:00] an application process.

    [00:11:01] You can meet with people even face to face. You know, we’re kind of coming back to more of that personal relationship with people. You know, your sales process. Is a natural extension of your messaging and your marketing and what you wanna be known for and the offer you deliver. So that fifth foundation, your sales foundation should be strategically designed to play well with your marketing and your messaging and your.

    [00:11:33] So to recap, we’ve covered five different business foundations that you need to strategize, or again, you’re welcome to apply to work with us. This is what we do strategize to make sure that they are playing well together. Number one is your business design. Number two is your offer engineering. Number three is your branding and messaging.

    [00:11:51] Number four is your marketing, and number five is your sales. We’re halfway through. We have half of the foundation of that house that you’re [00:12:00] gonna build up. However big you want it, your house is custom to you. We have half the foundation laid. Now these Knicks five are equally as important, but usually businesses can’t come to the determination of how to execute these until the first five are answered.

    [00:12:15] All right, so the next five are, number six is thought leadership and pr. Now, how are you then becoming known as a leader in your space? How are you going and sharing your message in changing the way people think? What sort of disruption of are you causing? We don’t, we don’t ever wanna cause disruption to be disruptive.

    [00:12:39] Let me just say that, you know, we hear this like disruption all the time doesn’t mean you’re like some big jerk that’s gonna come out there and just like make everybody upset to get attention. That’s. That’s not you. You’re listening to this show. That’s not you. That’s not me. We all know that, right? But we want to challenge the way people are thinking because the way that you teach [00:13:00] is maybe better, more innovative.

    [00:13:03] You know, we work with clients at the Sweet Life Company that are doing things that nobody’s done before or they’re changing the way things. , and those are also our podcast listeners, right? So I already know that because you’re listening to this show, you are challenging the way things have been done, or you wanna improve it or you want it to be better.

    [00:13:23] You know, you have a methodology or a process that is totally different than what other people have, right? You don’t fit into that copy cat cookie cutter stuff. . So when we’re going back to your business foundations, how are we making sure that the world knows that and that six foundation, that thought leadership PR goes hand in hand?

    [00:13:45] The strategy we use for that to get you out there goes hand in hand with the offers that we’ve engineered for you and the messaging and the sales process in your marketing foundation. Number seven is your tech stack. Okay? Here’s the. [00:14:00] Everybody loves their tech, but they love their tech that they know and they love.

    [00:14:03] We don’t endorse any one tech stack, right? So I don’t kid your, I don’t care if it’s Cajabi or ClickFunnels or go high level or whatever it is. How you communicate, how you deliver your. Services in the, in the experience that you create for your clients should be a custom engineered tech stack to you and to your business.

    [00:14:25] And just because something works for somebody else doesn’t mean it’s gonna work for you. So that Seventh Business Foundation is the strategy of building a tech stack that aligns with the experience that you wanna give people, what you wanna be known for, how your offers are engineer. And just aligns and, and speaks to your whole business culture.

    [00:14:48] And by the way, it’s totally okay if you are not super techy. Not everybody has to have an app. You know, one of the trends that we’ve seen, especially over the last three years, cuz everybody and their cousin [00:15:00] has now decided they’re an online business coach, right, is that people are paying for more personal curated experiences.

    [00:15:09] So maybe your tech stack is figuring out how to have a more personal curated experience. Foundation number seven is taking a look back at your tech stack and making sure it’s it’s laid out correctly. Two, accomplish what we’ve set out to do in business design, offer engineering, branding, and messaging, marketing, sales, and thought leadership.

    [00:15:29] See how they all stack on each other and these bricks are fitting together underneath your house. The eighth Business Foundation is teams. Now with scaling businesses, usually we see around $30,000 a month when businesses hit that $30,000 a month kind of threshold, anywhere from 20 to 40. So we call it 30 in the middle, is that if we don’t have our teams in place and we don’t know how to delegate, we start running into some bottlenecks.

    [00:15:59] I can [00:16:00] personally say that you guys, and I’ve said this a bunch, um, on the show in the past, I am not naturally a good. I suck at it. Okay. Let’s just be really, really honest. It is something that I’ve had to diligently work at stopping and thinking and, and deciding what I want things to look like before delegating it out to my team.

    [00:16:22] So entrepreneurs, you know, we’re kind of control freaks. We kinda like having control, but when you get to that 20, 30, 40 K a month reoccurring revenue, if you do not have teams in place and you don’t know how to step into a leadership role, in a leader role, instead of a doer role, we’re gonna run into problems.

    [00:16:45] So wherever you are in your business, we wanna have an assessment of that foundation, your team foundation, which is foundation number eight. And making sure that you have teams in place that are the right teams to start getting things off your plate. [00:17:00] Frankly, people that are better than I am at doing certain things, I should not keep things to myself, right?

    [00:17:07] There are a lot of people that are much better than I am at doing things in in you, and that’s what leadership is. Foundation number nine, amla Air are your. . Okay. Do we correctly have your operational systems, your client onboardings, your client experience, your billing systems, your client off onboarding systems, your marketing systems, you know your bill paying systems, your financial systems are your systems in place to get your business to a million dollars?

    [00:17:37] what systems are you missing? Literally, like systems are everything in your business. We have systems for everything. We literally have onboarding and off onboarding, podcast production systems, content marketing systems, coaching systems. Your systems are also part of. How you teach people to do what you teach them how to [00:18:00] do, or your strategy or consulting.

    [00:18:02] So how well are your systems engineered and are they in place? And then the last foundation I do not teach on, but you need to have, and the last foundation of a million dollar online coaching or consulting business is lifestyle. That is the, in my opinion, one of the most important bricks, and you can only decide what that looks like.

    [00:18:22] We talked about business design in the beginning of being the summary, the culmination of all of your products and services that you sell, working in a way that is, is going to get you what you want in your business. But the 10th Foundation lifestyle, this is all about. This is about making sure that you are continuing to grow as a leader.

    [00:18:44] Are you getting fed? Are you getting mentorship? Are you getting coaching? Is your body well and healthy? You are the greatest asset in your company. Are you taking care of yourself? Are you getting sleep? Have you pushed yourself to physical limits in the most amazing [00:19:00] way? Are you in flow state? Are you adventuring?

    [00:19:04] Are you spending time with people that light you up? That is lifestyle, and we have to very carefully make sure that your lifestyle is one of those 10 different business foundations. Otherwise, what we’ve done is we have built a business that might make a ton of money, but at the end of the day, the end of the day, Is that the way you really wanted to live your life?

    [00:19:27] And so that 10th Business Foundation is not less important than marketing. It’s not less important than offer engineering. It’s just one of the foundations that you need to strategize. So let’s recap the 10 foundations of building a million dollar business. Number one is business design. Number two is offer engineering.

    [00:19:44] Number three is messaging and marketing. Number four is, excuse me. Number three is branding and messaging. Number four is then the marketing of that. Number five is your sales, your sales processes. Six is thought leadership and pr. Seven is tech. Eight is teams, [00:20:00] nine is systems, and 10 is lifestyle. Now, what do we do with these things?

    [00:20:05] You’re like, okay, bro, this is great. These are all good to know. So I want you to write each one of these down, and I want you to make sure that each one is playing well with the other. If you have a marketing campaign that is not an extension of your messaging, then something’s wrong. If you have messaging that is not an extension of communicating well, what you deliver in your programs or your.

    [00:20:29] you’re gonna have trouble selling it. If your programs and your offers are just like a shot in the dark, cuz somebody told you you should, I don’t know, launch a certification program or whatever it is, and they haven’t truly been engineered as part of an overall business design ecosystem that’s gonna get you what you want in your life.

    [00:20:46] You’re not gonna be very happy. Even if you make a million dollars, well maybe you’ll be happier for a little bit. . But again, where did that time go? The one thing that we really, really, really can’t buy is reversal of time. And so time in my [00:21:00] opinion is more valuable than all the money you can pay me, and I think that’s probably the same for you.

    [00:21:07] So with that being said, all of these 10 business foundations have to fit together like a perfect puzzle to build. The ultimate million dollar online service consulting or coaching business. Can we build it other ways? Sure. But if one of the foundations isn’t well considered and strategically planned to fit well with the other one.

    [00:21:33] If you haven’t really given yourself permission to unpack what you’ve done and what you wanna do and what you wanna be known for, if you’re to that place where you are designing the next level of your business, the next ecosystem of offers. That next level of who you wanna be in your space and to yourself and to your family, and to the world, then now is the time to stop and do that.

    [00:21:59] I wanna [00:22:00] encourage you to do that because when these 10 business foundations are engineered to play well together, and they all are a function of the overall creation of a profitable, thriving, purpose-driven online business. I promise you, then you are finally going to be able to get exactly what you wanted when you first launched this baby.

    [00:22:23] Okay? And this is how we do it, and I’m so excited to be able to unpack this for you guys. So if you found this podcast helpful, please share it. I decided to, like, again, I, this is what I’ve been coaching. Clients privately on for over a decade, and I felt like it was really time to bring this out here into the podcast to share it with you.

    [00:22:43] If you’re at this place and you’re ready for next level business strategy and consulting, you can apply to work with us. You can go over to sweetlifeco.com, or you can visit the show notes for this episode by visiting sweetlifeco.com, clicking on the podcast, and this is episode number [00:23:00] 268. Or you can just very simply, Text the word apply to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and we’ll send you over an application and jump on the phone with you and chat a little bit more about this.

    [00:23:17] Regardless of what you do with this, the awareness of the 10 business foundations should hopefully, Give you an opportunity to now assess where you are and make sure each one of the bricks lays well together so we can build your house up instead of spreading new thing. I hope this was helpful. Thanks again for tuning into the show and I’ll talk to you next.

     
     

    Plan Your Online Business Calendar for Profit and Purpose – with April Beach (Episode 267)

    Plan Your Online Business Calendar for Profit and Purpose
    Plan Your Online Business Calendar for Profit and Purpose

    <>

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Summary:
    There is certain steps that you can strategically follow to create a predictable online business. This is not pie in the sky in the strategies we talk about in this episode we’ve been applying to our own business and teaching others for almost 10 years.
     
    In the show you will learn the step-by-step process to lay out your entire calendar year for high profit deep impact and lifestyle freedom. Including the nitty-gritty of how to plan out your online offers, your launch campaigns, and those big business projects you have been wanting to work on but I’ve never found the time.
     
     
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Know the order of operations in which to plan your yearly calendar
    2. Discover April beach is secret process that has predictably created up to six months of travel time with her family since 2011
    3. You will be able to immediately lay out your calendar and start applying this process to create more intention, and clear marketing campaigns in your online business. 
     
    Resources mentioned: 
     
    Guide
     
     
    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    267

    [00:00:46] Hey. Hey, you guys. Welcome back to the show. You are listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast as our intro said, and I’m super glad that you’re here. I’m April Beach Show host. And I can’t wait to dive into today’s topic with you. This [00:01:00] is what you can expect from today’s show. At the end of this episode, you are gonna know exactly my process that I have used now for 12 years to lay out my entire calendar year for my online business that has freed me up to, in this past year, have six.

    [00:01:16] Months of travel time with my family and with my kids. You know, we always hear that there’s this pie in the sky or like design your life through entrepreneurship and these kind of fufu unicorn things out there we see on marketing all the time. But here in this show, and what I do is I give you the exact strategy to actually make it happen.

    [00:01:37] And there is some strategy, there are some building blocks that we’re gonna talk about in this show that if you do not have them in. You’re not gonna be able to do this. And so I’m gonna break down the processes in which we go through every single year. And actually I just took a group of clients to Florida for a week to lay out their whole entire business for the year to come.

    [00:01:55] And I’m gonna unpack this process here for you on this show today. At [00:02:00] the end of this episode, you are gonna know this process and you’re gonna know everything you have to have in place to be able to complete this process. And I’m gonna share with. a little bit more of my strategy, some personal behind the scene things, and what we do here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast as well in the process of laying out our year.

    [00:02:20] So all of the show notes can be found by going to sweet life co.com. This is episode number 267. So first of all, I wanna give you a bonus with this. I have created the ultimate Guide to online offers. Now, let me explain why this is not just some freebie you download. So I have successfully had multiple different online offers, everything from MRIs to retreats to courses, and all these different type of offers that you can do, and I’m sure you guys.

    [00:02:53] Often told, you know, from other people, launch a course or launch a membership. So many people love to insert their opinion [00:03:00] in what they think we should do. , have you experienced that also? Uh, but the reality is, is each one of those business offers is going to affect your life. So in order to be successful in what we’re talking about here on the show, you need to.

    [00:03:14] How offering certain programs in your business is going to affect your time and your work cadence, and your family, and even your profit. So to really apply what we’re gonna talk about on this show, go grab the Ultimate Guide to online offers, and you can get that by going to sweet life co.com. Click in on the podcast and you can just search.

    [00:03:36] This is episode number 267, or you can very simply text the word. To the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and you can download it from there. Okay, so this show is for those of you guys that truly wanna make sure that the business you’re building is going to give you the time and life freedom that you’ve been looking [00:04:00] for.

    [00:04:00] Many of you may have very profitable businesses, may. Programs that you have been running a, a variety of offers in your suite, but your world is not functioning the way you want it to, maybe you feel a little bit trapped. So that’s why you’re here listening to this show. I’m gonna break down this step-by-step process that we use to lay out our entire calendar year with you.

    [00:04:25] You ready? Okay, here we go. So the first thing is that if you have a old school calendar in front of you, I’m, I’m 46, I’m a big advocate of old school things. If you have an old school calendar in front of you, bust it out, get it someplace down on a piece of paper, cuz I’m actually gonna take you through this step-by-step process.

    [00:04:45] And having an old school calendar is really, really helpful. Um, even with post-it notes where we can actually go. Move along our Post-It notes, um, based on what dates that you’re looking at. So step number one, the very first [00:05:00] thing that I do when I lay out my entire calendar. I do this towards the end of one year for the upcoming next year, but I don’t care when you’re listening to this show.

    [00:05:08] You can do this whenever you want. Is I block my time off. It’s the very first thing that I do. I block off my travel and my adventures and my time with my kids and my project time. So step number one is to look at your calendar, look at your personal life lifestyle calendar, and I want you to block off and fiercely protect your travel time.

    [00:05:31] This is very, very important. If you do not do it first, you’re never gonna get it. . Okay, so if you’re not really sure what that time is, I want you to go through and I want you to block off. Hey, I, I think I wanna take a trip sometime in August. Great. We are gonna block that off. Now here’s the thing about this, guys.

    [00:05:49] These things are non-negotiable. Are non-negotiable times off. This is how I approach this. My life always comes first. I learned how to design [00:06:00] businesses from my parents. If you’ve ever heard my story, we have a very long history of a family, of lifestyle entrepreneurs. What does that mean? It means we design our business around our lifestyle.

    [00:06:11] These are not hopeful things. We’re not gonna hope that you’re taking time off. You are going to take this time off. My time off when I block it out. Is absolutely end all, be all non-negotiable. And for me, like this past summer, I was back east with my youngest son at lacrosse recruiting. Years before that, I lived in Los Angeles with my middle son, who was a professional hip hop dancer.

    [00:06:34] Years before that, I traveled with my oldest son in lacrosse recruiting. So these were actually hard dates, so they actually helped me out because I can actually look at the calendar and say, Hey, listen, okay, we’re gonna be at these tournaments, these. And so it does help if you actually have solid dates regardless.

    [00:06:51] Step number one is you need to approach this in a way that is non-negotiable. Mark, off your time, that girl’s trip you wanted to [00:07:00] take, whatever that is, that gets blocked off on your calendar for the entire year First. And it’s like we’re gonna put those big rocks in your jar first. I know you guys have heard this, you know, analogy of, of filling up a jar with your year.

    [00:07:12] The biggest rocks go first. Those big rocks are not how we’re making money. They’re not our marketing, they’re your life. Step number one. Step number two, what you’re gonna do then is you are going to block off your business project time. Remember that book that you know that you really have been wanting to work on.

    [00:07:32] Maybe it’s a second or a third book you’re getting out there. Maybe you want to go on a speaking tour. Um, actually just got off a, a call with a client and she and her whole entire family are going on a month long speaking tour back east to promote her program. So exciting. , right? We have to plan for that.

    [00:07:48] We have to know that’s coming. So whatever project time, as far as work goes, that you need to block that off. That is the second thing you block off your calendar and here is what is gonna happen, [00:08:00] okay? After you’ve blocked off your family time, especially if you’re like me and then you’ve blocked off your project time.

    [00:08:06] There isn’t a lot of landscape like the geography is taken up. We’re looking at a calendar that doesn’t quite have a lot of space left to actually work. Praise the Lord . Okay, so what we do next is now we’re gonna take an inventory of your offers. If you know me, I’m an offer engineer. I help businesses build industry leading programs and offers at scale.

    [00:08:30] So the next thing and how it ties into. Episode bonus that I told you about of the guide of online offers is we need to take an inventory of your online offers, and you should know, number one, what is the most profitable offer that you have? Number one, what is your most profitable offer? Number two, what is the offer that’s most aligned with your life?

    [00:08:53] Basically, which one do you really wanna? , which one do you really wanna put your time into? Which one are you really fired up [00:09:00] about? What people do you really wanna work with? What is the one that like you would do it for free. You love it so much, even though, don’t worry, we are not doing that here. That is what I want you to do.

    [00:09:11] So we need to inventory your offers and you need to determine which ones you are going to sell for the year or the months to come, however long you’re planning this. Okay? Based on number one, which one is going to make enough money? for you to then take that other time off. And number two, which ones do you actually love to do?

    [00:09:32] Now, we’re not getting into this in this episode, but this is all the answers to these questions align around how you’re engineering your offers and the model and the delivery of it. And then the third thing you’re gonna do is you are literally going to plot out on your calendar your sales and promotion dates for your most profitable offer first.

    [00:09:54] Okay? That’s rule number one. Many of you guys have a variety of offers, but [00:10:00] we’re gonna plot out the most profitable one first. Nuro Uno, okay? And you’re gonna plot on your calendar, even if you sell it all year long. We still need to treat that offer as if we were having kind of a launch campaign around it.

    [00:10:18] So even things that are available all the time, anybody can join into them. We still need to plot on your calendar when the promotional times around that particular offer are going to. . So you’re going to now block off the calendar those promotional times. Now, if you’re like me, we don’t really have any promo times in June and July.

    [00:10:37] You know, like I said, I’m back east on a lacrosse field right now. So because of that, we have to make sure that we plot out our promotional times for people to come work with us other months out of the year. So what does that look like for you? Block off those promotional periods for your primary offer First.

    [00:10:56] The next step is to block off your promotional [00:11:00] periods for your secondary offers. So what other offers or programs? Maybe you have like mini master classes, maybe you have, uh, a retreat that you may do once a year or a couple times in a year that fill in around that primary offer, that primary program that you were.

    [00:11:20] And then the next step is you are going to block out the sales campaigns at times around each. So I know we’re sitting here if you’re watching this on YouTube or if you’re watching the video version of it. Awesome. I’m very handy. I use a lot of my hands in the air, but what I’m saying to you here is step number one, let’s.

    [00:11:40] You’re going to block off your personal travel time. Step number two, your business project time. Step number three, your primary offer. Step number four, your secondary offers, and then you’re gonna fill up the sales and marketing campaign times around them. What do I mean by that? I mean, are you having a a three week launch campaign?

    [00:11:58] Do we need to have [00:12:00] webinars? Do we need to build other things around that that are going to require your. And this is an overview of my yearly planning system. I promise you, when you go in this order and when you answer these questions for yourself, again, personal time off business, project time, primary offers, secondary offers, and then the sales campaigns around them.

    [00:12:22] Honestly, number one, you’re probably not gonna have that much time to sell. You know, we always talk about the fact that we probably don’t make enough offers, just hear. We talk often that if a business is having trouble selling something, it’s probably cuz they aren’t offering their services enough, they aren’t making enough offers.

    [00:12:41] And we see that extreme that we aren’t making enough offers. But then the other side of that is that, There’s some people selling stuff all the time. Nobody wants to buy your shit all the time. Mine either, , okay. Nobody wants that, right? So when [00:13:00] we lay out in the calendar of when we have these promotional times where somebody can pay you all the money for the amazing service that you deliver.

    [00:13:09] The other times, what it does usually when you’re traveling is that gives us that time to build relationships with your audience. And so when we look at this calendar, we’re actually gonna see that there’s probably a lot of consolidated sales times and a lot of consolidated relationship building times.

    [00:13:28] And that is amazing. If you’re looking at your calendar and you’re thinking, I don’t have enough time to, to sell things, I’m traveling all the time, and whatever that. No problem. Download that online Guide to the Guide, the Ultimate Guide to online offers, and you can create your own custom programming of offers, what I call your own offer ecosystem to actually fill that up.

    [00:13:53] You don’t have to have one primary offer that you sell all the time and, and then a secondary and a third. [00:14:00] You can engineer your ecosystem of offers according to what you need for your business and your life, as long as, here’s the rule, as long as that offer is guaranteed to be engineered, to deliver your client’s predictable, transformational, measurable results.

    [00:14:16] If you’re not sure about that, then we need to talk about that as. So let me recap the steps here. Number one, in order to lay out your entire year, your entire online business calendar for lifestyle first to actually get that. We have to block off the times that you’re taking personally and professionally off.

    [00:14:36] Then what it’s gonna do is going to give, give us a very sobering look at the months we are selling and the benchmarks we need to hit financially for you, and make sure that you have the right offers that are built and being delivered at the other times throughout the year to actually make sure that the whole entire year is covered.

    [00:14:55] That’s what we need to do, and that is this process. And then we drill down even deeper [00:15:00] into your content marketing calendar, and we plot out all of your marketing campaigns, all of your content marketing communications around, guess what? Your life and your business and your profit and your offers first.

    [00:15:16] And I promise you, when you do it in this order like me, you will get actually more and more time off. Now here, here’s the real truth. The first time I did this, It was really messy. It was back in 2012 and my kids were younger and, um, actually I was planning time off in my offers because my kids, when they were young had a lot of medical needs.

    [00:15:38] It wasn’t like I was taken off to Hawaii all the time. Um, and some, and most people actually don’t even know. That’s how I learned to engineer online business. Was because of my kids’ medical needs at first, and they’re totally healed and they’re awesome and praise God for that. But when you have these things that are non-negotiables in your life, believe me, you will build your business in the profit around [00:16:00] it.

    [00:16:01] So whether, whatever it is, hopefully your kids are super healthy or whatever that is, you’re designing your, your next generation business for, you know, over 50 or whatever this is for you, you, as long as you see it this time off, this way of engineering your business as a non-negotiable. It’s not flexible.

    [00:16:22] We can’t hopefully take this time off. As long as you see this as a non-negotiable, your time off and the offers you need to sell, and when you need to sell them, I promise you, you’ll nail it. It’s when we give ourself space to question whether or not we can do it, that we fail. If you in your mind know that the process of engineering, your offers around your profit and your life are in non-negotiable, I promise you, you will nail it,

    [00:16:55] But like I said, the first time I did it, I really didn’t even nail it. I got like three weeks off a [00:17:00] year, and then the next year we got more and more and more. So it has taken me a long time to do this practice. For now over a decade to get more and more time off each year. Each time you do this, you’re gonna get better at it.

    [00:17:12] But this process is the number one way. I own multiple companies and now have complete LA lifestyle and location and travel freedom with my family, and I want you to have that same thing. Even if you have a brick and mortar, there’s nothing more powerful than being able to just jump on a plane because you want.

    [00:17:33] and or because something cool is happening that you wanna attend or you wanna support a friend. It’s an amazing thing and this is how you do it. Okay, so to recap, in this episode, we talked about how to plan your entire online business calendar for profit and purpose, whatever that profit and purpose is for.

    [00:17:53] Awesome. I have given you a tool that you can download again. You can text the word [00:18:00] guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. You can download my, I think it’s now, it’s like 30 pages, ultimate guide. It breaks down every single online business offer from courses tos, even to podcasting as a business model.

    [00:18:13] To masterminds and retreats and hybrid program design to licensing and certification programs. And I’m gonna break down for you the type of model, and I’m gonna tell you exactly how that model will affect your life. Make sure you grab that, or you can very simply just go to sweetlifeco.com, click on the podcast.

    [00:18:31] This is episode number 267, and there will be a link for you to download and grab that guide and the show notes are in here as well, so that you can revisit what we talked about on today’s. I hope you found that super helpful. I promise you, if you follow these order op of operations and these steps, then you will in fact no longer have a pie in the sky.

    [00:18:53] I hope my business is designed for lifestyle freedom, uh, hope and a dream instead. It is a [00:19:00] strategy and it is a proven strategy that you can bank on, and I can’t wait to hear how it goes if we’re not connected. Please follow me on LinkedIn and over on Instagram so that I can hear about how you are doing in your process of designing your life for high profit, deep impact, lifestyle, lifestyle freedom. Thanks so much for listening to the show and I will talk to you guys next week.

     
     

    Next Gen. Kick Off: Preview of New Shows, Guests, and More! – with April Beach (Episode 266)

    Next Gen. Kick Off: Preview of New Shows, Guests, and More!

     

     

    Who is this episode for?
    This quick trailer is for our amazing listeners and those to come! Thank you! 
     
     
    Summary:
    The SweetLife™ Entrepreneur Podcast is back and delivering proven business trainings for coaches, consultants, experts, authors and speakers who are ready to scale their business online. We’re committed to another 5 years of helping you create leading online offers, programs, courses and services that scale your business past a million. Including how to license your content, courses or trainings, how to build certification programs and how to market, gain PR and become known as the leader in your space. 
     
    Get a unique and unfiltered view behind the scenes with online business leader, April Beach and her trusted leading friends, to build your business for high profit, deep impact, lifestyle freedom. 

    Resources Mentioned:

    Resubscribe on Apple

    Link to Apple Podcast

    Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    266

    [00:00:45] Hey you guys, we are back. Welcome back to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. Year six. I absolutely cannot believe it. Uh, first of all, thank you so much to our amazing listeners who have been sending me messages for the last year [00:01:00] where I took a little bit of a break. And if you are a listener to this show, you know, I share with you all behind the scenes.

    [00:01:06] So I’m gonna catch you up on what’s been happening and I am gonna let you know. All the amazing things that we have in store for you coming in the next year for the next five years of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. But step number one, if you have not subscribed to this show, please click the subscribe button wherever you are listening.

    [00:01:26] If you have been a previous subscriber, you’re gonna have to resubscribe because Apple loves to boot us out of shows we haven’t listened to in a bit. And so that would be really appreciated, um, to make sure that you’re also not missing out on all of the things that we have. If you and I do not know each other yet, I’m April Beach.

    [00:01:43] I have been the host here on this show for five years I’ve been coaching businesses. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs and mentoring businesses online for lifestyle entrepreneurship for high profit and deep impact and deep purpose for a total of 26 years, you guys . [00:02:00] It’s been a really, really long time.

    [00:02:01] With an expertise in online business scaling for the last 17. So you are truly in the right place if you are looking for trusted strategies that you can apply to your business. I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, so what that means is I help coaches and consultants and authors and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs.

    [00:02:24] Courses, trainings, as well as licensed package programs and certification programs for high profit, deep impact lifestyle freedom. So let’s talk a little bit about that. And first of all, I just wanna say thank you guys so much. As you know, I took a little bit of a break after having Covid in the beginning of this past year, and it had a little break.

    [00:02:45] Turned out to be, uh, a year. So let’s get very real for a minute. I was, Totally burned out on being here every single week. I can be real honest with you guys. And so the first [00:03:00] thing that I want you to do is think about things in your business that used to just totally light you up. And you may be doing them and you may be feeling a little bit burned out on them.

    [00:03:08] And I want you to think about what that could be in your business. And I want you to clean house a little bit, just like I. Because when we set out to do things that fire us up in the beginning and it feels like a job at the end, then that gives us pause to stop it and just decide maybe we need to take a little bit of a break.

    [00:03:27] So my little break turned into a long break, which was a beautiful time, as you guys know, because I share a lot of behind the scenes. I travel five to six months a year with my kids. I did that again this year. My kids are. You guys are not even gonna believe it, especially those of you who’ve been listening to this show forever.

    [00:03:43] They are 20, 18 and 16 now, so time does fly and uh, it was just really a beautiful opportunity for me to reset and think about what this show actually means to the online business space, what it means to me as a leader in a mentor and a teacher, [00:04:00] but most importantly, what this show is delivering to you and why.

    [00:04:05] We want to keep producing this show. I, uh, always say nobody needs more content. They need a transformation. And so before I dove back into committing to do the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, I really needed some time and space to find what I felt like I wanted to bring to the table for you guys this year as well as, and the years to come, as well as the things that I felt were important.

    [00:04:34] For you. And so let’s go back and do a little bit of a history for those of you who’ve been listening to the show for a while. In the beginning we started out and every single thing was get your business online, building your first funnels, launching courses, I mean, just amazing online business foundations.

    [00:04:53] and that was way back in 2017, right? So in the beginning we started talking about those things, but now your [00:05:00] businesses have grown. So for the next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast, we are gonna be focusing on scaling companies online, scaling entrepreneurs, those of you guys that. Are not only hitting consistent con 10 K months, but we’re actually working on building programs where we can license them to other companies and other businesses for hundreds of thousands of dollars.

    [00:05:21] And having an ecosystem of offers that surpasses seven figures in your business. So for you, the next generation of the show is gonna be completely dedicated to scaling companies online. If you are here and you’re still in that launch phase. Please go back and utilize and listen, the 250 episodes that we dropped in this show for the last five years that are all about leveling you up to get you to this place.

    [00:05:49] Because those are amazing and they’re powerful, they’re trusted, and they’re proven, and they are for you to eat up and utilize. And for those of you guys who are scaling your business, I’m so excited to move forward with you [00:06:00] into the next generation of the show and continue to help you level up your.

    [00:06:05] And your decision making, creating a business that truly leads to the life that you want while you’re making the impact. And of course, extracting your genius to create results for other people. So this is a little preview for you of what’s to come. First of all, everything, all of the show notes, all the amazing tools we give here on this.

    [00:06:26] Can still be found by visiting sweet life co.com and simply click on the podcast. Previous listeners, you guys know that with some of the shows, we actually drop totally free masterclass with certain episodes when you opt into them that week. We have given away thousand dollars masterclass to our listeners that subscribe when they opt in the week of that show.

    [00:06:50] So we’re really known. Dropping information for you to actually implement the things we’re talking about each week. So make sure that you’ve subscribed and make sure that you click over [00:07:00] to sweetlifeco.com for all the show notes, all the places to opt in, and of course, getting text messages, updates as well.

    [00:07:07] So let me give you a little sneak peek into what’s to come. As I thought about. How best to support you. I wanted to make sure that we’re consolidating our work here together on this show. So we are going to continue to deliver high value, but shorter time episodes. That’s the first change you’re gonna see here on the show.

    [00:07:29] The second is that we are grouping together our shows into series. So if you’re working on something in particular or you have an objective, I have already laid out the entire. Content show plan for the entire year, you guys, and I wanna give you a sneak peek of what’s to come for the first episodes.

    [00:07:48] After these new ones drop, we are leading into completely helping you become known. We’re talking about becoming known with your method and your frameworks and your value positions. Pitching, [00:08:00] pr, pitching, large scale media to help you become known. Podcast guesting stages and speaking local events. We’re even talking about how to network in your local area to become known after becoming known.

    [00:08:14] Then we are diving into million dollar offers, and I have a whole entire series plan for you on how to build a million dollar business with an ecosystem of offers that works for you, including how to do the math and make sure that you are assessing the profitable offers that you actually want to do versus what people out there are just saying, you know, you hear all the time, like lunch of course, or do a membership.

    [00:08:39] That doesn’t work for everybody, right? So we’re gonna be diving back into business models online offers in the series we actually did, going even deeper, right before I took a pause in this show, all about million dollar offers. It’s an entire million dollar offer and million dollar business model series, including masterminds, retreats, hybrid programs, content licensing, [00:09:00] certification programs, signature offer engineering, even low ticket offers, and so much more.

    [00:09:06] that is going to bring us through weeks and weeks of value that you’re gonna immediately be able to take into your business and apply. And I can’t wait for you to do it. So I promise to be quick. So I’m gonna be quick. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, this is just a hello and I missed you.

    [00:09:23] and message from me letting you know, first of all, thank you for giving me the time and the space that I needed to really assess this show and what, what it meant to me so that it could mean a lot to you. And I just appreciate you guys more than you know I missed you , and uh, that is, it’s been a real pleasure being able to take time off and have that space.

    [00:09:46] But I am super stoked to be back. You here. We have a new intro for you and, uh, this. New Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast should bring another level of energy and profit to your business. [00:10:00] That is my commitment to you, and thank you so much for being here. I’ll see you in the next episode.

     
     

    The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business – with April Beach (Episode 265)

    The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business
    The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for? 

    Phases 2-4
     

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to level up and stop copying others. Listeners who tap into this show want to get the formula to choose the perfect online business offers, courses, masterminds or coaching programs that give them the life they want. 
     

    Summary: 

    This episode kicks off a series called  “The Ultimate Guide To Your Perfect Business Model; For Experts, Coaches and Consultants”. In these shows we unpack the process of intentional business design, offer engineering, and business architecture to build a business for high-profit, deep impact, lifestyle results. 
     
    In this kick off to the series we discuss what business modeling is, who needs to go through this process and why this process is the fastest way to get the life and business you’re working hard for. You’ll also get April’s 7 Questions That Lead To Your Perfect Business Model and Offer Types. 
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know how to use the power of business modeling to get what you want
    2. Access April’s 7 Questions That Lead To Your Perfect Business Model and Offer Types
    3. Understand where in your business you may need to make changes and alter your offer model

    Resources Mentioned:

    Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    265

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much. 

    [00:00:30] And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:54] You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes [00:01:00] in there, for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place. If you’re looking for a resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back.

    [00:01:15] I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s as we roll into the new year, going from 20 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training or recording, a strategy for you every single week and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break. And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. 

    [00:01:51] What turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have [00:02:00] been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, that entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step back and get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. 

    [00:02:15] How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. 

    [00:02:50] You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit [00:03:00] different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company. That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air from experts, delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular. Over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you.

    [00:03:25] I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned. The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings, without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you, are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. 

    [00:03:42] So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and [00:04:00] the episode’s coming for you. And in the meantime, enjoy this best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mentor and entrepreneur activator, April Beach.

    [00:04:32] Hi guys. I’m so excited to talk to you today. This is one of my favorite topics, actually. We’re gonna be moving into my favorite topic for the next couple of weeks on the show. We are kicking off a series here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast that is all geared towards helping you make sure that you are designing your offers and your business structure and your business model correctly in a way that works for you.

    [00:04:57] And this is such an important time to do it. It’s the [00:05:00] end of the year. We’re about to roll over into 2022, and so I wanna make sure that you’re fully equipped. To see the business model, the offer structure, and the business design that’s going to equal that lifestyle and the profit that you want moving forward.

    [00:05:13] And so the next couple of shows are totally dedicated to helping you tap into the ultimate guide, the ultimate database for you to design your perfect business model. And so that’s what we’re talking about, kicking off today’s show. This is episode number 250 here on the podcast. And I’m April Beach host of this show.

    [00:05:36] Thank you so much for being a listener to us. We’re gonna be rolling on five years of producing here in just a couple of months, and I just appreciate you guys so much. So first of all, I just wanted to tell you how much I appreciate all of your listenership over the last four and a half years to this show, sharing this show with your friends.

    [00:05:53] We don’t have any advertising here intentionally. On the Sweet Life Podcast. I hate listening to podcasts and [00:06:00] they’re like, hang on just a second. Let me share somebody else’s unrelated message so I can make more money. Totally drives me crazy. Um, and so we intentionally have refused advertisers here on this show, and we’ll continue to do that because our goal is giving you business trainings and coaching that you can take to the bank.

    [00:06:19] And we would really appreciate if you’d share this show with your friends. And if you have never done so before, if you could just please leave us a review on Apple Podcast or wherever you listen to podcasts, that would just really mean a lot to us. So thank you so much for tuning in. I’m April Beach, as I said here at the, the host of this show and founder of the SweetLife Company.

    [00:06:40] And everything we do as a company is working with entrepreneurs like you to design your business, your suite of offers, your customer journey roadmap, your signature offers in your programs to deliver high profit deep impact lifestyle freedom. So if you would like to work with us to apply to join our business growth programs, please cruise over to [00:07:00] sweetlifeco.com, and I would love to personally meet with you. Okay. 

    [00:07:04] Back to today’s show. Here is what you can expect. Again, this is episode number 250, and there is a very important tool that goes along with this episode in the next couple of episodes. That tool is an 18 page, totally free 18 page ultimate guide to online business models. And so before we get started, you can grab that guide in two different very easy ways.

    [00:07:28] First of all, you can go to. SweetLifeco.com. Click on the podcast and go to this episode. It’s right there. Number 250, and there will be a link for you to download the Ultimate Guide, totally free. Grab that or if you’re on the go, you can text the word guide. Very simple, just lowercase the word guide and you wanna text it to this number.

    [00:07:51] That number is 8 0 5 2 4 5 0 8 8 0. So just text the word [00:08:00] guide to that number and I’ll send you a link so you can go download it there. Okay. This is gonna be an important tool moving forward because the ultimate guide summarizes all of the business models, the most common business models for coaches and consultants and experts and service based businesses in the online space.

    [00:08:18] And why this is so important is I’m literally saving you 20 years of time by giving you this guide. I have ran a business model in every single one of these most common ways, and so I break down in this guide the structure of that business model, everything from courses to masterminds, to live events, to membership communities, to group coaching programs.

    [00:08:40] I break it all down for you, but then I also tell you exactly how it’s gonna affect your life. because it’s all fine and good and dandy, right, when we see it, you know, structurally on paper. But in the end of the day, I’m a lifestyle business designer, and you went into entrepreneurship to change your life. So let’s make sure that the business model you’re choosing is in fact gonna [00:09:00] equal that lifestyle that you want.

    [00:09:02] So I literally drop in 20 years of online business experience. To you in this one ultimate guide so you can see the structure of the business model and I’ll tell you exactly what it’s gonna look like for your life. Here on the next couple of shows, we’re gonna be really diving in more to specific business models and having a conversation about them in depth.

    [00:09:21] So again, go grab that ultimate guide. It’s totally there for you and hitting you, not it will save you decades of time. That’s why I created it. Okay, so in this episode, this is what you can expect. This is a great show for those of you guys who wanna level up and stop copying what others are doing. 

    [00:09:37] Maybe you’ve joined a lot of programs. You have somebody said, oh, you should launch a course. Or, oh, you should host a membership community and it’s not really worked out for you. Or you have thought about doing those things, but you’re not exactly sure whether or not that’s gonna be the right solution for your business. So when you tap into this show, You are gonna get this formula specifically here on this one episode for [00:10:00] how to choose a perfect online business, offers courses and masterminds, and I actually give you my seven questions to ask yourself that lead to your perfect business model and offer types.

    [00:10:12] So I’m gonna tell you those seven questions to ask yourself as well, to get even more clarity, and I’m gonna dive into some of the actual workshopping that we do inside the Ultimate Guide. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in together.

    [00:10:33] Okay guys. So here we go. Episode number 250. This episode kicks off a series called The Ultimate Guide to your Perfect Business Model for coaches, experts, and consultants. And these next couple shows unpack the process of intentional business design. Offer engineering and business architecture to build a business for high profit, deep impact lifestyle results.

    [00:10:55] And so let’s go ahead and kick off this series together and let’s start with just the [00:11:00] basics. Okay. So the first question we’re gonna talk about and answer is, what is a business model? I was just speaking and teaching at a retreat in Costa Rica last week, and I was teaching on business model. Business design, and I asked the women in the room, you know, who can explain to me what a business model is?

    [00:11:18] And nobody could answer that question. And so if you’re sitting here and you’re listening and you’re thinking, oh gosh, I don’t really know what a business model is, you’re not alone. Right. So let’s kind of start at the basics, and it’s actually not as overwhelming and complicated as it may seem. So the term business model refers to your plan for making a profit by the types of products and services that you sell. Also known as your business model is the way that you serve your clients and make money. 

    [00:11:48] So examples of common business models for coaches and consultants and service based providers and experts are coaching one on one, group coaching, [00:12:00] online courses, membership communities, masterminds, retreats, live virtual events, and more.

    [00:12:08] Those are types of business models. So as we dive in, especially over the next couple of weeks when I’m talking about, Hey, how to find your perfect business model, what I’m really saying is, should you launch a course? Should you launch a membership community? Should you have a mastermind? Should you be doing live virtual events? Should you have a retreat? Those are all the questions that I would love for you to have more information to answer for yourself, and that’s why we’re doing this series. So if that sounds good, let’s keep going. 

    [00:12:36] So the next topic that I wanna talk about regarding business modeling is the power and the importance, and the depth of how your business model affects your life. And if you know me, this is not a surprise. If you don’t know me, let me make it really, really clear. I am a life first business designer. That means that for my own companies, and for [00:13:00] people that I work with, the very, very most important thing is like saying, Hey, listen. 

    [00:13:04] This is all great to make money, but money doesn’t necessarily buy happiness, so let’s make sure the business we’re engineering is in fact gonna give you that lifestyle that you want. And that’s my superpower. That’s my area of expertise. I want you to know that your business model is a primary driver to the life you wanna have. But the reality is, you guys, very few entrepreneurs are actually aware of that. They just think, I’m gonna be happy when I, when I launch a course and sell a thousand seats, or I’m gonna be happy when I have a successful mentorship program. That’s not it at all. The way to happiness is business model design. Then we reverse engineer it into high sales. But it really starts with picking the right business model. If you do not have the right business model for your life, you are not gonna find that happiness that you hoped to find in entrepreneurship.

    [00:13:55] And this is for you if you’re brand new in business. But I’ll be honest, the majority of clients I [00:14:00] work with have been in business for years and years, and they’re ready to scale their business and they really wanna intentionally make sure the programs they’re building in the future. Are done really well and mindfully and are gonna give them the results they want.

    [00:14:11] So whether you’re new or you’ve been doing this for 10 years, this is something that I wanna make sure that you’re aware of the power and the importance of this. Your business model directs the cadence of your year, your quarter, your month, your week, and your day. So your business model is going to determine how you flow through your year and your quarter, and your week and your day, and your months and your time, and all the things it drives, what you do, who you do it for, and how you do it.

    [00:14:43] And so let’s make sure you really, really love those things. And then it also drives your time and your schedule and the expectations that others have of. Those are all the things that your business model does. And so it’s incredibly important that we’re picking the right one for [00:15:00] you. So designing that perfect business model is our superpower, and that’s why I’m gonna geek out on this over the next couple of weeks because it’s pretty much the primary gem and jewel that we start working with clients on when they come into our business growth and mentorship programs.

    [00:15:16] And so I wanna make sure that you are tapping into this as. Okay. And then the next question that we need to answer is, what business models are available to you? The most common business models for coaches, consultants, mentors, experts, especially over the last 17 years, are online and virtual coaching and consulting, whether that’s one on one or one on group.

    [00:15:40] We also have online courses. And those courses are either evergreen, which means they’re available at any point in time. They’re prerecorded or they can be taught live. We also have memberships and communities masterminds, low ticket item grabs, and that business model we’re gonna dive into. And I’m [00:16:00] really excited to unpack that business model where everything is just like a, a smaller mini offer and a mini price.

    [00:16:06] And then of course, our also live virtual events and in-person retreats or in-person. Product based business models, which we are not. Just so you know, really clear up front, we are not diving into product based business models because this podcast is strictly designed for service based entrepreneurs, coaches, consultants, and experts.

    [00:16:25] But we are gonna be talking a little bit about products within the business models. And so those are the most common online business models and they are constantly evolving and as they evolve, one of the things that’s happened over the last couple of years is the business models we’re now designing with our clients are hybrid offers.

    [00:16:44] Starting in around 2016, we started designing what’s called hybrid models, so it’s a combination of some of these primary models that we talked about, and we’re also gonna be talking about hybrid offers and really how to engineer the perfect hybrid offer [00:17:00] here on the show in the series as. So those, those are the business models that are most common.

    [00:17:05] Now. There are so many cool outside of the boxings that are happening, and as things like virtual reality come into play and different technologies, these are gonna continue to grow. But here on the show, we’re gonna start with the core business models for online coaches, consultants, and service base providers.

    [00:17:21] So you can consider those and how they would scale with your business. And so the next question is really to ask yourself what’s happening right now in your sapce. You are an expert in your field or you’re becoming an expert in your field. And so what is available? What are people commonly buying or what are, how are the ways services are being delivered in your field right now?

    [00:17:43] And so first of all, I want you just to take a second and do like a mental inventory of how other people are buying your type of services currently in your area of experise and whether or not they have, or maybe they don’t have [00:18:00] a type of business model that you might want to create for yourself. Just because it doesn’t exist doesn’t mean that you can’t create it.

    [00:18:06] So I wanna encourage you in that. So what business models are available to you truly depends on, first of all, the content that you’re delivering. So your content is going to dictate your business model. That’s rule number one. And that’s also the number one mistake of not doing that that coaches and consultants make, is not letting the content drive the model, what you’re doing, what you’re teaching is gonna dictate the best way to deliver that to people.

    [00:18:33] So the formula, and this is the formula I teach and it’s so fun to teach it. The formula is connecting the way you want your lifestyle to function and your area of expertise in your content, and that’s gonna give us your perfect business model. And so let’s go ahead and move forward a little bit. How is it then that we take this business model and really start designing it for you?

    [00:18:57] So your business model. [00:19:00] Can be one way for one product or service that you offer, and you can have a suite of offers in your business, so a collection of services and programs in your business, and each of them can have totally a different business model. You don’t have to just have one. So we’re talking about business modeling and we’re relating this to one program or one offer, one signature offer, which I love to teach on, as you guys know, signature offers and signature program.

    [00:19:29] Or you can have one business model for all of your offers. And if your offers or your coaching programs take people through a long term journey of progression in working with you, you can have one business model that’s actually broken up into different phases of growth that people would continue to grow with you.

    [00:19:51] That’s how our programs work. And that’s some of the ways that we’ve been engineering our programs for and with our clients. And it’s really powerful because when [00:20:00] we’re doing that, we’re creating a long term roadmap and a client journey that keeps clients with you for years and years and years. So we have a ton of clients that have worked with us for over 10 years.

    [00:20:11] The reason why is cuz we’re constantly developing a different step to keep them growing more and more and more. And you can have one business model that is all of the steps in a long term journey. Or we can just talk about one business model for one offer of yours. So I wanna make sure I’m sharing that distinction for you.

    [00:20:29] If you’re thinking, wow, is this business model just for one program or one coaching program or one offer, or is it for everything? You choose? It can be either. So here are some questions and I want you to break down these questions and I want you to think about them. And this is how we’re gonna end this week’s episode.

    [00:20:45] Just processing these. These questions are also put in a worksheet for you in the ultimate Guide to business model, so make sure you download that, but I’m gonna share them with you so your brain can start processing them right now as we wrap up this week’s show. So I want [00:21:00] you to answer these questions as if it were five years from now.

    [00:21:03] If you can’t figure out five years from now, go to. If you can’t figure out three years from now, I want you to go to the next 18 months, okay? But start out as far as you can, and I want you to imagine yourself there. And if you’re building a business with intention for time freedom, geographic freedom and freedom to scale your services in a way that’s really gonna make you happy, these are important questions to ask yourself.

    [00:21:27] Question number one, how many hours per week do I like to? So again, try to focus five years from now, maybe three. You have to come in close enough. Then you can do 18 months. How many hours per week do you really like to work? How many do you want to be working in the future? How do you really love to serve your clients?

    [00:21:49] So I want you to ask yourself, how do I really love to serve my clients? Do you like meeting with them one on one? Do you like coaching in groups? What really fires you? [00:22:00] How do others love working with me? So do you have a team working with you in the future or is it only a solo gig? That’s question number three.

    [00:22:12] Question number four, do you move and travel or do you stay in one place? Again, this is in the future. Question number five, do you work at home or do you work in an office? What does that really look like to you? Lesson number 6. What are you really good at? We need to ask yourself, what am I really, really good at?

    [00:22:32] And what content are you delivering in your signature program or your signature offer? And then of course you need to ask yourself, what does my perfect client actually really need from me? So how do they need me to work with them? How do they need me to show up for them? 

    [00:22:50] And those are seven key question. Of starting the process of business model design, and there is an eighth question in there that is the most qu, most important question of all, [00:23:00] and that question is in the worksheet for you. So make sure you go ahead and download that. Now, like I talked about, over the next couple weeks, we’re gonna be diving into this entire series all about business modeling, all about business architecture and design.

    [00:23:15] I love this. We have done a ton of shows on this over the last five years because this is my area of expertise, but I’m super excited to do them in a series for you so you can go through and follow with me and process them as we go. And each episode’s gonna focus on one business model type, and I’m gonna give you the pros and the cons of that business model type.

    [00:23:35] And I’m gonna tell you the lifestyle result of that particular business model and whether help you figure out whether or not you’re, you would love that. So my goal is to save you literally at least five years of time launching the wrong kind of offer in this show. And you’re gonna be able to go through and choose which one’s gonna be right for you, so you can stop copying what others are doing, and truly design a business that’s gonna give you the profit and the life that you want.

    [00:23:58] And the reality is this, though. [00:24:00] Your business is totally gonna change just as you change. So by fully considering your long-term business model, revisiting it and revising it as needed for your life, and as your life changes and taking control of the circumstances by pre-planning and building services that can scale, you’ll always have a business that’s built around your life, not your life around your business.

    [00:24:25] And of course, because you know me, I’m always on a plane. I love to travel. If you’re like me or if you want to be like me, if you’re building a business with the, with the intention of time freedom, geographic freedom and freedom to scale your services in a way that makes you happy, then these are the episodes to make sure you’re tuning into.

    [00:24:42] And frankly, that’s what our business growth programs are designed for. So if you’d love to work with us, then you are more than welcome to apply. You can cruise over to SweetLifeco.Com and you can check out our Wavemaker program, our your signature offer masterclass, and our business launch programs as [00:25:00] well.

    [00:25:00] We would love to hear from you and connect with you. Really work through the process as to whether or not working with us is the right fit. And of course, you have these podcast episodes to eat up and take to the bank. Thank you so much for tuning in with us this week. This is Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, episode number 250, and all the show notes. Can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. Simply click on podcast and that is also where you can download the ultimate Guide to Business Models. And last thing, again, if you want to get it by text, just simply text the word guide to the number 8 0 5. 2, 5, 4, 0, 8, 8 0. Okay, that’s it for today. Have an awesome week, and I will talk to you soon.

     
     

    Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales – with April Beach (Episode 264)

    Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales
    Using White Board Sessions To Increase Sales

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs in launch, scale and amplify phases. 
     

    Summary: 

    Whiteboard sessions are a great conversion tool to convert leads to buyers. If you’re a coach, consultant or niche skill provider, you’re always looking for great ways to deepen your relationships with your followers and position yourself as the ideal solution. In this show I unpack how to use “whiteboard” sessions to further connect with your audience and increase sales. This show details the exact steps to fill and deliver your next white board session. 
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Have the exact process to fill and deliver whiteboard client conversion sessions
    2. Know how to plan your next whiteboard session into your launch

    Resources Mentioned:

    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    264

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much. And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into, for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers, and authors. 

    [00:00:43] And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com. You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes [00:01:00] in there for you, with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place if you’re looking for a resource. 

    [00:01:08] Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s. As we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. 

    [00:01:30] If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training, a recording a strategy for you every single week in winning awards for this show. I needed to step back and take a break, and you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. So what turned out to be one month off turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we [00:02:00] have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, that entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step. And get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. 

    [00:02:15] How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you’re growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like? So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. 

    [00:02:37] So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. 

    [00:02:58] It’s gonna sound a little bit [00:03:00] different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company. That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you.

    [00:03:25] I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned. The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you, are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. 

    [00:03:42] So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the [00:04:00] episode’s coming for you. And in the meantime, enjoy this best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to The Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hey, you guys, on this week’s show, we are talking about a very cool conversion tool, in order to turn those people on your list to buyers that fervently follow every single thing that you do. This is episode number 244 at the SweetLife Entrepreneur and Business Podcast, which means that all of the show notes can be found by visiting our website. Which is sweetlifeco.com. Simply clicking on the podcast, and this is episode number [00:05:00] 244. I’m April Beach, the host here at the show, and we are known for delivering proven business trainings that you can absolutely bank on. That other coaches will charge you thousands for you. Get them all here free. Advertisement free on this show because this podcast is an extension of the outreach that we do as a company. So welcome to the show. If you’re a new listener, I’m super glad to be connected with you. 

    [00:05:25] So this is what you can expect from today’s episode. First of all, this episode is great for businesses in phases two, three, or four of my business growth roadmap. If you are not sure what business phase that you’re in, please visit sweetlifeco.com/quiz, or you can simply text the word quiz to the number 8, 0 ,5, 2, 5, 4, 0, 8, 8, 0, and you can take a very short self assessment, which will give you a complete breakdown [00:06:00] of all the phases of business growth long term, and tell you exactly what you should be focusing on based on the phase of business that you are in right now.

    [00:06:09] So this show is great for people in phases two, three, or four. And it’s really great for those of you guys who want a conversion tool that moves your leads into buyers. So if you’re a coach or a consultant or a niche skill provider, you’re always looking for great ways to position yourself as the perfect solution to those people that you’re in connection with.

    [00:06:33] And whiteboard sessions are a great way to do that, and that’s what we’re gonna talk about here on today’s show. I’m gonna unpack how to use whiteboard sessions to further connect with your list and increase your sales. And I’m gonna detail out the eight steps that we use as a company and literally giving you our steps of how we plan and host our whiteboard sessions. And at the end of this episode, you’re gonna know our exact [00:07:00] process and you’re gonna be able to plan for your own whiteboard sessions to turn your leads into buyers. All right? So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.

    [00:07:19] First of all, let’s go ahead and answer the question. What is a whiteboard session? So a whiteboard session is like a live webinar where you work with your leads, you help them to solve a specific problem, thereby gaining trust and positioning you as the ultimate solution that they were looking for. 

    [00:07:38] You can host it in Zoom, you can host it in another live streaming platform. But overall, it’s very similar to the webinars of old, but you’re doing it live. It’s not prerecorded where you actually have people show up and you lit, literally get to work their problem with them, and they are an amazing conversion tool. So let’s kind of talk about [00:08:00] that terminology as well. A conversion tool is what we refer to as an event or a way to turn your leads into buyers. So we’re using these whiteboard sessions to turn leads that are already familiar with you into faithful buyers, selling them into your higher ticket programs. Now you can totally use whiteboard sessions to generate new leads as well. 

    [00:08:24] We, in the past, as a company have primarily used them to take our existing leads, our warm leads, and turn them into buyers. I would love for you to go and test these to cold leads as well, because I’m sure that would actually convert very high as well, because very few people are doing this. So I’m gonna break down the eight steps to host these whiteboard sessions and really just pull back the curtains on what we do as a company and give you this step by step process.

    [00:08:50] So let’s go ahead and get started. If you’re taking notes, this is a great episode to take notes. To save it, you can replay it. 

    [00:08:57] So step number one, I need you to choose a [00:09:00] specific problem that you are solving in your session. So one specific problem that you are going to address in your whiteboard session, your whiteboard session shouldn’t be, you know, let’s go ahead and solve the whole world’s, you know, hunger issue. it should be, let’s talk about one specific problem and let’s go ahead and whiteboard out some potential solutions to. 

    [00:09:21] And here is a pro tip for those of you that are really interested in being strategic about your business, I want you to make your whiteboard session a piece of the problem that you solve in your signature offer. So hopefully you caught what I just said. Right. So number one, you’re gonna choose one specific problem that you will solve in your whiteboard session, and one only. 

    [00:09:45] Number two, send out a warmup email to your list, letting them know that you’re aware of the problem that they’re facing and you’re planning something really special for them. It’s like dangling the carrot in front of them. Say, Hey, listen, [00:10:00] you guys, I know that you’re struggling with this. I know that this has been a common issue for many of you, and I just wanted to let you know I’m planning something really special to help you solve that. So stay tuned because I’m gonna tell you what that special thing is that you can be a part of very, very soon. So, step number two is get your list excited about what is to come. 

    [00:10:22] Step number three is to schedule your session. Now, here’s the deal. I recommend you pick two different times to host your whiteboard session. Usually within the same week, try to do them possibly even in the same day, one in the morning, one in the evening, depending on when your clients are, are most available.

    [00:10:39] When your audience is, is most working on the problem that you solve, picking two different sessions gives them an opportunity to say, Hey, yes, I wanna come to session number one or session number two, but make sure that you schedule this in. 

    [00:10:53] And then step number four is to send out an invite to this session. And when you send that [00:11:00] second email invite out and you’re saying, okay, here it is. This is what I’m doing. Call it a whiteboard session. I’m hosting this whiteboard session and it’s gonna be amazing. But here’s the deal. There are limited seats. Now, one of the things that we are not fully addressing here right now in this show. But if you’re a faithful listener to this podcast for the last four and a half years, you know that you will see these trends, right, where we have gone from these mass programs to boutique, very personalized events and programs and signature offers. People don’t wanna be part of the cattle herd. They don’t wanna be in a cookie cutter thing.

    [00:11:37] So when you offer something that’s limited seats, that’s really exclusive, those are the things that people are craving right now at the recording of this in 2021. So just be mindful, mindful for that. So Cindy and I, your invitation and say, Hey, listen, you know, there are limited seats to this. Fyi, make sure you RSVP for your seat right.

    [00:11:57] Step number five, get your tech [00:12:00] set up ready. Okay, so when we say a whiteboard session, I actually mean a whiteboard session. So that is usually a combination between an iPad or something that you can cast sketch on and cast it into Zoom. There are so many different tools that you can do this. We use iPad.

    [00:12:18] We used to use iPad with Notability, but that kind of broke a little bit. So now some of the solutions that we dive into are EAM mixed with Stream Yard. There are a bunch of different technology setups that you can actually do in order to host and cast your iPad live into a Zoom so people can see you actually sketching your whiteboard session.

    [00:12:40] Because this is a true whiteboard session that isn’t like a marketing thing , you’re actually gonna host a whiteboard session and sketch out their results, which I’ll dive into here in just a few minutes. So you need to get your text set up ready. 

    [00:12:53] So, so far you’ve chosen this specific problem. You’ve sent out an email to your list saying, Hey, listen, I know you’re, you’re having this [00:13:00] problem, something special is coming. You’ve scheduled your session in your own planning calendar, and then you’ve sent out the email to your list saying, Hey, it’s scheduled now. Get on the list right now. You’re filling those seats. Meanwhile, while the seats are filling to your event, get your technology set up, practice it, and get it ready. And that was step number five. 

    [00:13:21] Step number six is to send reminders out to your list to make sure they fill up those seats. Just cuz people sign up doesn’t mean they show up. So we need to send reminders, send dms. You wanna blanket those people who have registered, letting them know, Hey, you got one of these exclusive seats to this really special whiteboard. Don’t lose it. Like don’t miss it. Don’t miss your seat. This is really, really special. Get them excited about it. Reiterate how exclusive it is and send them tons of reminders so we’re increasing the show up rate for your event. 

    [00:13:55] And then step number seven is to host this event. And now I’m gonna break it down [00:14:00] into six substeps under the Hosting Your Event. So this is why, if you’re taking notes as a great episode to take notes too. So as you’re hosting your event, I recommend you only do a one hour event, okay? So you’re gonna deliver a lot of value in a very, very short period of time. So you want people wanting more, all right? So in the steps to host your.

    [00:14:23] Step number one is start by sharing like your philosophical genius, well rooted view on the problem that you are solving. So start by sharing. Here is a problem, here is why I know this is a problem. Here’s why I’m so well rooted in part of the solution to this problem. And load your view. Load your intro with case studies of how you’ve helped other people solve the problem that you’re helping this group of people whiteboard about. So you open it up, you position yourself as I’m aware of this problem, [00:15:00] I’m part of the solution to this problem. This is what other clients do that we have helped them work through this problem. And hey, now I’m here to work with you. So you’re fully positioning yourself as being completely aware. Being an expert in this space and having helped other people, and that’s how I want you to open up this strategy session, this whiteboard strategy session. 

    [00:15:22] Step number two is then you open the floor for others to share about their issue with whatever problem it is that you’re solving and why they’re still facing it. What is the problem? What is the struggle? Why are they still here? Why have they not moved forward? What are the other things they’ve. And if you’re a marketer right now in your brain, you’re realizing that these whiteboard sessions are super gold for doing, you know, figuring out what the problem is and doing market research as well.

    [00:15:50] Okay, so later we can talk about transcribing this and turning the, the voices and the, the issues people are saying into marketing copy. But right now [00:16:00] you’re hearing your present in this event. And I want you to open up the floor to others to explain those things. This is my problem. This is why I’m still here. This is my frustration. This is what I’ve tried and open the floor to those people that you’re helping in this whiteboard session to share sharing quickly, because we wanna keep the session moving. We wanna keep it fresh. We wanna, we wanna keep everybody engaged and we really do wanna give them a chance to talk, or at least a chance to post into the chat, depending on how many people you’ve allowed in your session.

    [00:16:29] And then step number three, you’re going to use your whiteboard to visually represent solutions. Demonstrating what people have said and documenting their comments. And collecting their frustrations. So part of your white boarding can be just writing down on the whiteboard, the words people are using, or a list of the problems, which by the way, you already know their problems.

    [00:16:52] But writing down a list. So each time somebody says, oh, this is a problem. Oh, this is a problem. You can be starting to use your whiteboard, [00:17:00] enlist out all of those problem. So you’re gonna document the things that they are saying, and you’re gonna collect it all in this whiteboard session based on what they’re sharing with.

    [00:17:11] And then step number four, you’re gonna summarize all of their pains collectively. And you’re gonna say, Hey, listen, I get it. This is what all you guys are saying. And so what we’ve done there in this whiteboard session is we’ve created community, we’ve created camaraderie amongst the people who’ve been there. They don’t feel like they’re alone anymore. They’re in a place where other people are experiencing the same pain. And guess what? You are the king or queen that leads them out of this. 

    [00:17:36] And so step number six is after you summarize their collective pains, then you start white boarding solutions for them. And this white boarding is gonna look totally different. It’s literally a sketch drawing of how you can take people from one place to one place, or maybe in your white boarding session based on your area of expertise, you can list out key words. Common solutions. [00:18:00] You’re literally going to whiteboard out and draw and draft solutions based on the collective communities problems in your event.

    [00:18:09] And if you have time, depending on how many people showed up, I want you to pull a few specific people out and ask them if they would like to have their specific problem solved for them. Right there in detail in the whiteboarding session. And what that has just done is it’s helped this one person, but it’s also shown everybody else your skills and what an amazing coach that you are and how amazing the results you can get people in a very short period of.

    [00:18:37] And then at the end of your session, you’re gonna restate why this problem exists and why it’s so hard for them to solve it on their own. And so what you’ve done in this session is you’ve positioned yourself as the perfect painkiller that leads them out of it, letting them know you fully understand what they’re dealing with, and sharing case studies of how you have to help the other clients.

    [00:18:58] You’re gonna open the floor for them [00:19:00] to share their collective pains and problems, and then you’re gonna use your whiteboard to visual. Collectively gather together all of their pains and document their comments. The next step is you’re gonna use your whiteboards to start sketching out solutions collectively for the group sharing solutions and doing a short teaching.

    [00:19:20] And then if you have time based on how many people show up, you can pick one or two people from your audience and you can actually go through their very hyper niche specific problem. And at the end of it, you’re gonna restate why the problem is big, why it exists, and you’re gonna position yourself as the solution for that which you’ve already done.

    [00:19:40] At this point in time, you have already fully established yourself as being not only capable, but the perfect solution to their problem. And so how we end these whiteboard sessions is then you make an offer for your next step to work with. Whatever that looks like. You could use a whiteboard session [00:20:00] as a perfect conversion tool into one of your primary offers, one of your signature offers or your whiteboard session could put them into another funnel that warms them up for maybe a live virtual event, then warms them up to, um, maybe have them apply to work for you, work with you, maybe your program is application based and so it’s continuing to be exclusive to work with you. And so your live whiteboard session could perhaps position them just to apply to work with you or you can sell right into your program, whatever works for you.

    [00:20:31] And that is how we use whiteboard sessions, and it’s very, very similar actually. It’s kind of how we use clubhouse rooms, but not as visual, and it doesn’t create such an exclusive community with your group of people that are there. Because when we do this in a whiteboard session, you can see people’s faces.

    [00:20:49] You can really get to know them, and you can help them on the next level because you’re not only having a conversation with them, you are giving them the results right there that they can visually see, and they don’t have to. Just [00:21:00] envision. Whiteboard sessions are a powerful, powerful way to turn your list into buyers. Very faithful buyers. And I’m so surprised that more people don’t do them. We’ve been doing them for years and I’m so happy to teach you how to do it here on this show. An insider mastermind who work with our clients very closely to create their whiteboard sessions and really pick out the problem they’re solving in them and how to convert their leads into buyers.

    [00:21:28] And so I want you to dive into this. Feel free to put this podcast on replay, share this podcast with your friends, and make sure you’re taking notes, because if you follow the steps that we’ve laid out here, you’ll have the same results that we have in our whiteboard sessions, and they’re hugely successful in order to help people build a closer relationship with us, which then in turn, of course, increase our sales because we’ve done a great job establishing you and establishing ourselves has the perfect solution to their problem.

    [00:21:57] Which in the coaching and consulting space, that [00:22:00] is always our number one goal when it comes to marketing. So I hope you found this episode helpful. I feel like I’m losing my voice a little bit here at the end, and I’m so sorry about that. So hope my scratchy voice doesn’t get in the way of your understanding these steps, because I really would love for you to apply them in your business.

    [00:22:18] And when you do tag me on, Instagram. Show me, say, Hey April, I am using this whiteboard session strategy. I’m so excited to do it. Here’s what’s happening. Tag me at April Beach Life because I always love seeing how you guys are applying the business training that we give you here on this show, and we’re here to make you more money and of course, help you build predictably the business and life of your dreams.

    [00:22:41] Thank you so much for tuning in, sharing this show with your friends and being faithful Listeners here of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast, again, all of the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com and clicking on podcast and if you’re interested in applying to work with us.

    [00:22:58] And have us roll [00:23:00] up our sleeves with you in your business and get very personalized business blueprinting, architecture, and engineering of your signature offers and your entire long-term business plan. You can find us at sweetlifeco.Com. That is our superpower, and that is what we love doing. Have a great day.

    [00:23:18] I’ll talk to you next week.

     
     

    How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business – with April Beach (Episode 263)

    How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business
    How To Disqualify Clients To Grow Your Business

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  3  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who believe in your offer, program and service and you’re ready to grow. 
     

    Summary: 

    Disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth. This concept comes from the idea that concentrating your sales and marketing on only the most qualified leads is a more successful way to increase sales. But how do you disqualify clients and find the perfect people you’re called to serve? That’s what we’re covering in today’s show. 
     
    This is not a training on “ideal client avatars” or niche coaching topics – these are the questions no one is telling you to raise, but they must be asked for your happiness and financial success, and that of your clients. 
     
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know what topics to qualify and disqualify clients on
    2. Have a list of questions to workshop for yourself to get clear 
    3. Gain confidence in developing a disqualification mindset in your business 
    4. Leave this episode looking at the current clients you have and immediate being able to see who is the perfect fit and who is not.

    Resources Mentioned:

    Organize your assets and ideas into a Signature Offer – 
     

    www.license2scale.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    263 (245)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes, with the most downloads, with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, Or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much. 

    [00:00:30] And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing. Though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com. You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes [00:01:00] in there for you with up to date links. Making sure that you’re getting to the right place. If you’re looking for resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back.

    [00:01:15] I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s, as we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training or recording, a strategy for you every single week and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break. And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. What turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have [00:02:00] been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, and entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step back and get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the SweetLife podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit [00:03:00] different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company. 

    [00:03:11] That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air, from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you. I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned.

    [00:03:27] The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something, they’re just coming in here to pour into you are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet, subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus, and I just, Love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the [00:04:00] episodes coming for you. 

    [00:04:01] And in the meantime, enjoy this. Best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to The Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator, april Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hi, you guys. Welcome back to the show. This is week and episode number 245. On the Sweet Life Entrepreneurial Business Podcast and I’m April Beach, host of this show and I’m so glad to talk to you. We are coming up on our fifth year podcast anniversary just in a couple of months, and we just really appreciate all of you guys who’ve listened to this show for so many years, and those of you who share it with your friends, we do not intentionally accept any advertising [00:05:00] on this show. I literally get pitched all the time, every single week from companies that wanna advertise in the show. And I just think that screws up with the flow of this show and our connection and how we really hang out together here. And it’s like you and I are sitting across the table from each other or having to cup of coffee, and we intentionally work hard to give you business trainings and coaching that other coaches charge thousands for. Totally free here on the show. So thank you so much for continuing to tune in. 

    [00:05:27] As you know, if you’ve been here before, all of the show notes and everything we’re gonna talk about today can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com, and this is episode number 245. So let’s get into what you can expect from hanging out with me here for a few minutes on today’s show.

    [00:05:45] Today we’re talking about why disqualifying clients actually helps your business grow. And this is for those of you guys who are in particularly in phase three of business. So this is the scale up phase of your [00:06:00] business. But I will say that I understand that I want you to apply this in the launch phase. There is just a little bit more of a psychological barrier to disqualifying clients when frankly you may not have ever served any before. This show really aligns with those of you who have served clients, you know how great your offer, your program, your solution is. And you’re really looking to scale up your business.

    [00:06:22] And one of the best ways we do that is by actually disqualifying or firing clients. So this is what you can expect. This is a great show for those of you guys who believe in your offer, your program and your service. And you know that you know that, you know that it gives people transformational, predictable.

    [00:06:42] So if that’s you, if you know what you do is amazing and there is no question whatsoever and how great you are at delivering people those results, then continue listening to this show. If you aren’t really sure, then that means that you should probably check out my [00:07:00] year Signature Offer Masterclass, and that’s a totally separate thing to talk about.

    [00:07:05] We have literally numerous podcast episodes here about how to create a predictable signature program. But right now, if you are not really sure about the confidence of your program, your course, your membership community, your mastermind, go to signature offer.com and there’s a lot of information there to get you started.

    [00:07:25] So for those of you who do know that, like you’re the bomb, right? Like you know that what you deliver is amazing, then let’s continue on to what we’re talking about today. We’re talking about the fact that disqualifying clients is an important part of business growth, and I get that this concept seems counterproductive to sales and marketing, and here is why it isn’t.

    [00:07:47] When you concentrate your sales and marketing on only the most qualified and the best fit leads for your business, then your sales become more productive and the success from your program [00:08:00] increases. And that’s a really important part of what we’re talking about today, and we’re talking about how to go about the process of disqualifying clients and finding the perfect clients that are really the right fit for what it is that you do.

    [00:08:12] So this is not, let me preface this. This is not an ideal client avatar or a niche business coaching podcast training, at all. We’re not talking about ICA development or client profiling. Instead, we’re talking about the questions that nobody tells you, that you really should be asking yourself about who you really want to work with, who you really want your clients to be, and they have to be asked and they have to be asked for, number one, your own happiness. Number two, your client’s happiness. Cuz when you have a great working relationship with your clients, then it’s gonna be much more successful for both of you and therefore for the financial success of both your clients and your company. 

    [00:08:51] At the end of this episode, you’re gonna know what topics or different areas you should be looking at to qualify and disqualify clients on. [00:09:00] You’re gonna have a list of questions to workshop for yourself. These are tough questions that I’m gonna give you in today’s show, and just run through them in your mind. Ask them in the air or when you’re on the treadmill, wherever you are, ask yourself these questions and come up with the answers to these and get some solid clarity, okay?

    [00:09:18] You’re gonna be able to gain confidence in developing your disqualification mindset in your business, and you’re gonna leave this episode looking at your current clients. And you are gonna have an immediate understanding of who’s really a perfect client for you and who might have been somebody that might not have been the right fit for your program.

    [00:09:40] Okay? So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.

    [00:09:53] Okay. Why does qualifying clients helps your business grow? So I totally get, this may sound counterintuitive, but disqualifying clients is an [00:10:00] important part of business growth. I know it sounds scary for those of you guys who are still working to become profitable, but this concept comes from the idea that concentrating your sales and your marketing in only the most qualified and best fit leads is actually more suitable to help your business grow.

    [00:10:18] And so the deal first of all, like in most things, it starts with your mindset. So let’s first start there. If you wanna serve everybody, you’re gonna serve nobody. And here is why you’ve probably heard that statement a million times over again from tons of business coaching. It’s because in order to deliver a top notch result, you need to curate and customize your program.

    [00:10:43] So lemme say that again. In order to deliver a top notch result for your clients, you need to properly curate and customize your program or your solution. And customize solutions don’t serve everybody, right, or they wouldn’t be [00:11:00] customized. So the first thing that we need to realize it is in order to be really great at what you. You have to customize it for a certain group of people, not for everybody, because it’s not gonna give them amazing results. And then from a marketing standpoint, if you don’t speak to a certain specific audience, your message is just gonna be so broad. It’s gonna be lost in all the noise of, of online marketing and nobody’s gonna resonate with it.

    [00:11:23] So let’s get those things out of the way first. Those like negative thoughts outta the way first if, if you might have been having those. And let’s actually dive into the deeper conversation that I wanna have today, which is the point of this show. So we’re talking about disqualifying clients. When you disqualify clients, you make more money because the qualified clients you do accept, number one, have better results with your program.

    [00:11:47] And number two, they have a deeper commitment to their own success. And maybe I should’ve flipped those around the other way. it. It really should. They have a deeper commitment to their own success, and therefore they have better [00:12:00] results in your program. So it all starts with a process of determining who wins with your coaching and who actually doesn’t.

    [00:12:07] Now, don’t forget the prerequisite to applying this strategy is having a proven signature program that delivers a transformation. So everything we’re talking about today is with the understanding that you’ve already met the prerequisite of understanding that your solution you deliver is full blown, top notch, like the best guaranteed transformation for your people.

    [00:12:31] Okay? So it all starts with determining who wins and who doesn’t with that program you’ve already created. All right? So if you’re thinking this ideal client avatar, that’s totally not what I’m talking about. What I’m asking you is this. Do you know where the line in the sand is between the people who are all in for your coaching and service, and those who have one foot in and one foot out? And taking it a step further, [00:13:00] understanding and accepting that only the best clients that are gonna get the best results are the ones who are all in on your program, is what we need to talk about getting to the root of today, and here’s why. Knowing where your clients are psychologically in the belief of themselves and of your services, will affect the results they get with you.

    [00:13:23] Okay. So how your clients are mentally entering your service business, your coaching business, is totally gonna affect how great of results they get, regardless of how great your program is. So even if you have this amazing program in course and service and in coaching, and you have gone through all the steps we’re talking about to layout an industry leading signature program or offer, when it comes down to it, you still have to be able to identify who psychologically is a great fit and who is not a great fit.

    [00:13:57] So here’s an example. Let me give you an example of this. You’ve gone through all [00:14:00] the work. You have this amazing signature offer, this amazing program or course, or whatever it is that, that you lead, that your business model within your, in your company, right? So if time or financial commitment is a barrier, a hesitation in somebody who’s having a conversation about working with you, then you have already started out by putting yourself in a bad position that you’re gonna have to handhold them.

    [00:14:25] If time or finances or even questioning their own ability to be successful is something they’re already bringing up in the beginning. And these are big red flags, then you’re already starting out by having a struggle to get them results. So these are some of the things that may happen to you. If you’re in a relationship with a client like that.

    [00:14:48] You may feel like you need to show up every single day proving yourself again and again as to why you know what the heck you’re doing. You could feel like you’re walking on eggshells. You could have to hold their hand every single day and reassure ’em how great they [00:15:00] are on top of the strategy coaching that you deliver instead of being the expert and coach that they really need a hundred percent. If you are having to show up and, and reconvince, and it’s almost like reselling them on what you do every single day within the process after they’ve already bought, that is a red flag that they are not gonna get great results in your program. And frankly, it has nothing to do with you. It’s the mindset that they had coming into it. So here are six questions to ask yourself to determine who really wins with your coaching. 

    [00:15:34] Question number one is how committed do they need to be? How committed to themselves, according to your area of expertise and what you teach on, do they need to be to be successful?

    [00:15:46] Some of you guys might have a program where you’re building up their self-confidence, and if that’s a case, Then probably not very committed because that’s your area of expertise. If that’s your area of expertise, then it’s gonna be a different degree of [00:16:00] commitment than somebody who may need their clients to show up fully in and vetted already.

    [00:16:05] Okay? So this totally is dependent on you and what you deliver in the solution you provide within your offers and program. So question number two is how committed do they need to be? Excuse me. Question number one is how committed do they need to be? Question number two is what time allotment do they need to have?

    [00:16:24] If they’re already struggling to find the time to be successful in your program right now, might not be the time for them to join your program. And you should be really honest with them and say, Hey, look it, this is exactly how many hours you need to put into this each, each week, and when you put in this many hours, these are the results you can.

    [00:16:43] Those are things you should be able to answer about your signature offer. Okay? And so then you can ask yourself, what time allotment does somebody need to have in order to be super duper successful within the programs that I provide? 

    [00:16:59] Number three, [00:17:00] what attitude do they need to show up with? So according, again, to you and your expertise in what you do, what is the ideal attitude/ mindset? Of the person who is going to get the very best results with your coaching. 

    [00:17:17] Number four, what might they need to leave behind? This is a really big deal. So a lot of people, especially people who have bought a ton of courses, they’ve spent literally thousands of dollars on coaches in the past. I hear this all the time, you guys, people come to us and they’re like, oh my gosh, you don’t have any idea. I’ve spent $50,000 on coaches and I still don’t have a result. Right. Well that really sucks for them and that’s really devastating and it shows why you really need to question who you’re receiving coaching from. Again, that’s a totally, another podcast. We should do an episode on that. But if they’re coming to you with that background, [00:18:00] you need to make sure that you’re having a conversation with them about why you’re different, why your solutions are proven, why your transformation in working with you is vetted again and again and again.

    [00:18:10] So what might they need to leave behind in past experiences or, you know, bad experiences or good experiences? What preconceived notions or things that don’t serve them might they need to leave behind when they come to work with you? 

    [00:18:27] Number five, what should they be ready for? Some of you guys deliver insane results within your program. Some results are so good that people are like, oh my gosh, shit, I can’t believe this is, this is so amazing, right? If that’s you and you know you deliver an insane result, what do your clients really need to be ready for in working with you? and what other things do they need to have in place to be ready for that? That is a really big deal. That is definitely something that we vet clients before they come in our your signature off a [00:19:00] masterclass. Are they ready for this? And you ask yourself like, are people actually really ready for what I’m about to give them? For this awesome sauce that I’m bringing to the table that I’ve worked so hard to curate for them? Are they actually ready for it? What do they need to do to get ready? 

    [00:19:14] And then number six, what personality best fits with your program? This is particularly important for those of you guys that have a community within your program. If somebody is like a total B I T C H and you have this amazing community of these sweet people that are in there, I’m telling you what, like that one bad apple can spoil the bunch, right?

    [00:19:37] And so your onboarding process, your onboarding presale, pre client acceptance process should include somebody talking and vetting and disqualifying people whose vibe and flow just might not align with the rest of your community. And that’s totally okay. But just be honest with yourself about what personality best fits within your program.[00:20:00] 

    [00:20:00] So those are six questions, hard questions that you should know the answers to in order to disqualify. And then let’s flip that around. Pre-qualify the perfect people for your program, your service, your solution, your super power. So here are some of the exercises that we can go through to look a little bit deeper to actually make this job of asking yourself these questions a little bit easier for you.

    [00:20:27] Number one, what was the mindset? We’re talking about past clients now, what was the mindset of past clients and what was their personality of those that got the best results? So in looking at those people who’ve already been clients in the past, what was their mindset and what was their personality like of the freaking winners? The A gamers, the ones that did everything and they came and they saw and they kicked ass, and then they took names and then they went and they were just absolutely incredible. Shouting from the mountain tops about how amazing your program is, right? [00:21:00] What was their mindset and their personality? 

    [00:21:02] Also, looking at your past clients, who did you love working? Who was like the best person that when you got on those Zoom calls or when you saw this person on your calendar, you’re like, yay, I get to talk to so and so today. And what was it about them that you loved working with them? Number three, who contributed to others in your course or your community? Again, for those of you guys that have a community base, who was the one that was always cheering other people on?

    [00:21:31] Who was the one that was always lifting other people up? Who was like that conversation starter? Who was that cheerleader and what was it about them that made it so amazing when they contributed to that space? Number four, who did the work without question. Like who, no matter what happened, and we all know stuff happens all the time in our life, that’s going to get in the way of some of the things that we’re working on, right?[00:22:00] 

    [00:22:00] But who did the work, even when all the things got in the way? Who pushed through? Who was super tenacious? Who were the fighters who refused to quit? Number five, who always needed coddling ? Who always showed up and they’re like, oh, well I don’t know. I don’t know how I am today. What do you think? Like, who needed that?

    [00:22:24] Is that something that you want to help with? That would not fly so well in some of the programs that I have. Let’s just be honest, right? You can probably tell you, listen to my podcast. Like if somebody showed up every day and they were like having major excuses to why they couldn’t do it, I’d be like, you’re right. You can’t. Cause that’s how you’re showing up here. You know? I mean, are you the same way as I am? Is your program a safe place for people to show up who do need your support, who everything you do is to just to pour into them and you’re [00:23:00] the reminder of how amazing they are because they forgot it or they never were told it in the first place.

    [00:23:06] Whatever it is, whatever the degree. Is this, with your past clients who showed up needing that level of support, number six, who complained about the work, the time, or the money. So who complained, if at all? I hope this has never happened to you. I’ve never had this happen to me, but I’m sure this has happened before.

    [00:23:25] Like, who was like, oh my gosh, you know, this takes so much time to do That probably means that you didn’t do a good job explaining the commitment in the beginning if that is the case. So certainly look at the structure of your program and, and how you are selling your program. But after you did that, let’s just say like you totally nailed that.

    [00:23:42] Who still came complaining about the work, the time and the, or the. Number seven, who questioned your processes? Okay. If you are in a space where you deliver a system, a method, or a framework, like most of our clients do, do [00:24:00] you have people who’ve showed up who’ve always kind of questioned what you do? If that is the case, then take a look at their personality.

    [00:24:09] And I’m guessing that that is not the perfect person for your program. Right. Right, and again, this is saying that you’ve gone through the process to develop your signature program in method and framework. That being aside, we’ve established that prerequisite. If people still showed up and they’re like, really?

    [00:24:27] Are you assured you really think that’s the way to do it? And they just constantly have a back and forth, I’m guessing that they are not the perfect fit for you. And then number eight, who left and told all of their friends about how amazing you are, who is like, let me give you testimonies. I can’t wait to tell the whole entire world man alive 95. This was the best money I ever spent. Those people, those are the people we wanna go after. Those are the people that are your perfect fit for your program. [00:25:00] So if they are not like those past clients that were doing all the stuff like that in like making a banner because they love you so much, then they probably need to be considered for disqualification.

    [00:25:13] So after this episode, I’m about to give you some action steps here and how to apply all this. But after this, Then as you move forward, know that you deserve to be praised for the hard work and the time that you have put in strategically developing a solution for people’s problems. And let’s make sure that you are disqualifying the people that aren’t the perfect recipient of your solution.

    [00:25:39] Because when you do this. You’re gonna be able to focus all of your attention, all of your relationship building, all of your actions on those perfect personality mindset, people that are the right fit for your program, and when they are successful, you are successful. Your client’s success. [00:26:00] My client’s success is a direct reflection, A direct correlation to my success. To your success. 

    [00:26:08] So we wanna pick the people that are the A gamers, right? We wanna pick the ones that we know we’re coming to the table mentally and physically prepared for what it is that you are going to give them solutions in, for your solution. And these are just some of the questions that when we talk about like ideal client avatar and client profiling and customer targeting, nobody’s saying to ask these questions and so I really felt like it was important to talk about this.

    [00:26:38] We actually, I actually had this conversation a few weeks ago with a couple of women in our business client family, and this has really come up and I think it’s an important conversation to have and so, Is your action plan moving forward? 

    [00:26:53] Number one, look at your sales copy and see if it clearly disqualifies the wrong people. [00:27:00] So after you’ve gone through the questions above, now let’s like put it into action, right? We’re gonna say, and how do we do this? We’re gonna take it from high level to eye level. Number one, look at your sales copy, copy, look at your marketing copy, and make sure that you’re clearly disqualifying the people that are not the perfect right fit. For you or your service or your program. 

    [00:27:21] Number two, add questions to your sales call process to filter those who are not the perfect fit. So if you use sales calls to qualify or disqualify clients, Make sure you’re adding questions in there that correlate with the answers you’re looking for to either qualify or disqualify clients. Make sure you add those into your sales process. Don’t be afraid to ask the tough questions. Where in this sales call, they might be like, oh wow, yeah, you know what? That’s not me. And that is a great opportunity for you to say, you know what? I am so glad we had this conversation because guess what? [00:28:00] What I have is not the right fit for you. And I don’t want you spending another X, Y, Z amount of money on a program that’s not gonna be the right fit for you. But I have a great friend I can refer you to that might be a better fit, right? These are important things to do in your sales call. You don’t want this person as a client if they do not fit into what you need to deliver the great solutions within your program. And so don’t be afraid to disqualify them right there in the triage call, in the sales. And send them somewhere else. Just bless them to go somewhere else. But you have to make sure you’re adding questions into your sales call process that can give you the answers to that. 

    [00:28:40] And number three, talk to your team. This is for those of you guys with teams that manage your marketing. Some of you, you know, have people that help you do your sales call, help you do your coaching, talk to them about the importance of positioning your solution and your service as the prize. It’s very, very important that once [00:29:00] you have done the work to create a leading signature program or course or offer, it is the prize.

    [00:29:07] It is the pain killer, as one of my clients calls it, it, it’s like the perfect language. Oh yes, it’s a pain killer. Okay? Make sure that you hold it close to your own confidence level that you worked your booty off to make sure it was a perfect pain killer for them, and that is the prize. And this quote is like one of the best quotes I’ve ever heard from Angela Lauria. She said, ‘the prize never chases’. Let me say that again. The prize never chases, and so here are some final thoughts I wanna leave you with. I totally get that. The thought of disqualifying somebody that comes your way that isn’t the right fit, sounds really scary, especially when you haven’t hit consistent 10 K months or 20 K months, 30 K months, especially when you’re first starting out.

    [00:29:59] [00:30:00] And that’s why at the beginning of this episode, I said, if you are in the launch phase and you haven’t served a ton of clients yet. I get and understand that it’s important for us to go through the process to test your solution on different clients, making sure that you are going through the testing and the traction to find the right fit after, of course, doing market research.

    [00:30:21] So I understand that if you’re listening to this and you’re in the launch phase, definitely take this with a grain of salt. I’m keeping it real, but never, ever, ever sell your program to somebody that you don’t believe a hundred percent, that you can give them results. That is for sure. I don’t care what business phase you’re in that is aligned, we don’t ever cross.

    [00:30:41] If somebody is not a good fit, do not sell to them. Right? But for the rest of you, Don’t be afraid to say no to the money because when you say no to something, you’re opening up your capacity to say yes to more things, and you don’t wanna be [00:31:00] stuck with clients that take a ton of extra time in order to get them results because they didn’t show up with the mindset and the prerequisites in place to get the best results with the service.

    [00:31:13] You. The truth is, you should be disqualifying clients to work with you if they don’t come wanting the results you deliver in full force. If their personality won’t jive with others in your community, if they consistently need affirmation that you know what the heck you’re doing, although please make sure that you know what the heck you’re doing and if they’re only partially committed to their own transformation.

    [00:31:38] And one last thing I’m gonna leave you with today, stop wondering if you’re good enough. And taking clients that don’t fit the whole bill of what you deliver. When you go through the process to diligently develop your signature offer, stop taking clients that don’t fit the bill for the solution you [00:32:00] provide, because we know that you can lead a horse to water, but you cannot make him drink. And I really, really, really want to remind you to only work with clients that are super duper thirsty. 

    [00:32:15] Okay, this was episode number 245 here at the SweeLife Entrepreneur Podcast. You can find the show notes and all of the other amazing info that our guests drop in here for free by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And if you are struggling. If you do not know how to turn your ideas into a leading industry, leading signature course, offer program, mastermind coaching event or retreat, then go to signature offer.com. Our Your Signature Offer masterclass is reopening in October. We only open this masterclass twice a year.

    [00:32:54] That’s it. Only twice a year can you get into this masterclass, and it is opening in [00:33:00] October, 2021. So depending on when you listen to this, that’s an important date to note for your calendar. In the event that you’re not listening to this live, you can also go to signature offer.com at any time and be notified when this masterclass opens up again.

    [00:33:15] All right, you guys, go grab all the show notes. Thank you so much for staying tuned to this show. I hope you’re having an amazing day, and I truly appreciate your listenership and just being a supporter of this show. Have a great one. Bye-bye.

     
     

    3 Types Of Content Companies Will Line Up To License From You- with April Beach (Episode 262)

    How To License Your Course Content or Program
    How To License Your Course Content or Program

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs who have an established method, framework or process and are ready to scale exponentially. 

    Summary: 

    People don’t talk about licensing. In fact, it’s a secret weapon that most companies don’t tap in to. However, licensing when done properly can be the catalyst to higher profit than you ever dreamed possible. And there’s no catch! In fact, the business model of licensing your content, course, or program is quite simple. This week we’re continuing our conversation about from episode #235 and talking about the types of content companies line up to license.
     
    I’m also sharing behind the scenes details of how I’ve licensed my content, methods, frameworks and processes for over a decade. And you can too! 
     
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know what makes your content valuable enough to be licensed
    2. Know how to license what you already have and not re-create the wheel
    3. Know how to decide if licensing is right for you
     

    Resources Mentioned:

    www.license2scale.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    262 (236)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our best of episodes. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads, with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen this episode you did was really powerful for me.

    [00:00:28] Thank you so much. And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:54] You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes in there for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place if you’re looking for a resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been

    [00:01:12] waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s. As we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business, training, a recording, a, a strategy for you every single week in winning awards for this show. I needed to step back and take a break, and you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. So what turned out to be one month off turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, and entrepreneurs have relied on.

    [00:02:06] I needed to take a step back and get a perspective. If what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show, how should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the SweetLife podcast for you and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been. The fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company.

    [00:03:10] That is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air. From experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you. I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned.

    [00:03:27] The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known in the Experts. So we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you are Absolut. Epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the episode’s coming for you. And in the meantime, enjoy this best of it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hi guys, and welcome back to this show. I’m April, and I’m so glad to be talking to you. Today’s podcast is an extension of last week’s podcast, episode number 235. Honestly, if you haven’t listened to episode 2 35 yet on licensing 1 0 1, how to license your course and your content to scale your company exponentially, that’s where I would start.

    [00:04:53] But if you were with me last week, I’m so glad that you were back here again and I can’t wait unravel this conversation a little bit more today. We’re continuing our conversation by specifically talking about three types of content. Companies will line up to license from you and all the show notes and everything that we’re discussing today can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:05:19] You can just click on the podcast and everything is right there for. Now a couple of kind of behind the scenes as I’m recording this for you guys. This morning I took an ice bath. It was the polar plunge, and I still feel like I’m a little bit shaky, but frankly, I feel better than I ever have in my life.

    [00:05:38] We were hosting a human performance summit at our lab, and I usually don’t talk about this very much here on the show, but we actually own an entrepreneur lab, which is a place where we help entrepreneurs turn their thoughts into reality in Boulder, Colorado. And we dive into a lot of peak performance things and it’s really amazing. So four 30 this morning I was in an ice bath, completely focused and visualizing what we want our 2022 to look like and um, I just wanted to share that with you first of all, because I get so many comments from you guys about when I share stuff behind the scenes and the fact that you appreciate it.

    [00:06:20] But then also to show that it’s so important that we’re always working on ourselves, physically on top of what we’re doing in our business. And all these shows, all these podcast episodes are quote ,unquote business strategies and trainings that you can take to the bank, right? But the truth is, it really does all start with you.

    [00:06:40] And so I wanted to bring that up. So before we start diving, How literally you can blow your business up through licensing. I wanted you just to take a pause and just to reflect on what did you do for your physical body and for your mind this week, because that’s where it all starts. And I just wanted to encourage you in that.

    [00:07:02] Okay. Squirrel moment over . Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show. Here is what you can expect by hanging out with me for the next couple of minutes. First of all, this is gonna be a shorter episode because the last couple episodes have been a little lengthy longer than we usually do for the summertime, and I know that you’re busy and out there living the dream or building the dream or both.

    [00:07:24] And so I wanna be respectful of your time. This particular episode is for those of you guys who are in business phases three, four, or five. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, you can take the quiz by visiting sweet life co.com/quiz. And this is a great show for those of you guys who have an established method, framework or process, and you are ready to scale your business exponentially.

    [00:07:51] So here’s the deal. People don’t really talk about licensing. In fact, it’s like a secret weapon that most companies don’t even realize that they can tap into. However, licensing, when it’s done right, can be like the super catalyst for a higher profit than you truly ever dreamed possible because, and if you listen to that last week, you know this.

    [00:08:15] Because we are giving other companies the power to distribute your content. It’s not always coming directly from you. And frankly, there isn’t any catch to this. The business model of licensing is really simple, and that’s what we’re talking about even more in depth than last week. So if you didn’t listen to last week’s again, go back and listen to episode number 235.

    [00:08:36] At the end of today’s episode, you’re, you are gonna know what makes your content valuable. And whether or not you are ready to license your content and you’re gonna have more information so that you can really lean on and even evaluate the opportunity of licensing. Most companies that we talk to love the idea, but it’s very new to them because frankly, business coaches don’t talk on or teach on this very often. And so I understand this might be a totally new concept to you, and so you’re gonna have more awareness and understanding of whether or not this is a great opportunity for you and your company moving forward. So let’s go ahead and dive into the show.

    [00:09:23] Okay, so let’s do a mini recap of last week’s episode. This will not replace listening to last week’s episode, and I really don’t want you to miss out. So this is just kind of a refresher if it’s been a hot minute since you listened to last week’s. First of all, what is licensing? Licensing is creating content for other companies to use so that they can grow faster, they can make more money. Or they can provide better services because of licensing your content.

    [00:09:52] The sister, I’ll call it a sister, the twin of licensing, which the process of doing this is almost identical to the process of creating your license material, is training other people in your method. So if you have a signature method or a signature framework or a signature process that you wanna train other people, even if it’s under your brand or they can become certified in your process. It’s the same thing we’re talking about here. So really getting your wheels spinning. Have you been listening maybe the last weeks and you’re like, gosh, you know, I don’t really know if I wanna do this.

    [00:10:29] But then when I say, Hey, but what about bring in other people underneath you and training them on your method, just so you know, pretty much the exact same process to get your content. So that’s a little recap of last week. The benefits of licensing are number one, for you to demonstrate thought leadership in your space.

    [00:10:48] So when you start licensing your material, all of a sudden people look and they’re like, oh, wow, man, she’s awesome. Look at that. She’s licensing her material that they, you know, other companies or he, you know, number two, increases credibility across your own audience. So even if your audience isn’t the one, Licensing the material from you, they think you’re even more badass because of the fact that you’re licensing your material to other people.

    [00:11:14] It certainly helps you exponentially scale because in the process of licensing, we really create something one time and then you can profit through multiple different opportunities and it is a perfect bridge for those of you guys who have been a B to C. Moving over to a B2B or even a B2 G, like a business to government.

    [00:11:36] Great opportunity here for those of you guys who are, who are interested in that. So whether or not you are ready to license your programs and you’ve met kind of those prerequisites for licensing, go back and listen to the last week’s episode because we, we dive into that even more in depth. So today we’re talking about the three types of content that companies literally will line up to license from you.

    [00:11:59] I have companies line up and join my wait list to license our courses and I release them one month a year, and that has been happening for over 11 years. Actually, probably should look at the date and throw myself a big ass party for that. I think that’s actually more than that. The deal is, is we create something that is amazing, that gives you the advantage that other companies want and they need, and then they literally will line up to license this material.

    [00:12:29] Why is it, why do they do that? Why do they pay so much money? Is because you are giving them the ability to profit faster and or you’re making their life easier. And or you are positioning them to be better at the content they’re already delivering. Maybe what you are licensing fits a missing piece to what a company needed, or maybe they’re taking your whole entire program in white labeling it, which we talk about last week. So those are kind of some of the reasons why this is such an incredible opportunity for you.

    [00:13:05] So three types of content that companies will line up to license. Number one is actual content itself. So content that people need to fill every distribution channel. Let me say that again. The first type of content that people will line up to license, I say people that companies, organizations, or other entrepreneurs will line up to license from you is content that feeds every distribution channel.

    [00:13:32] Examples of that are blogs, articles, newsletters, emails, so written emails, imagesand videos are examples of that type of content. So anything that another company needs to fill their content distribution channels, if you already have great content in that area, believe me, I mean, let’s take another sidebar here for a second.

    [00:14:01] You and I both know how tiring and time consuming and exhausting it is sometimes to create content, video content, written content, podcast. Content. Right? Content is king, right? The truth of the matter is, is that if you can speed up that process by delivering amazing content for other companies to distribute on their channels, through their channels, they will line up to license that content from you.

    [00:14:29] That’s number one. Number two, type of content that they will line up to license are. Let me give you an example of assets. Assets are anything that these companies need to communicate an end result or to add to their established content or program. So an example of an asset could be, it’s something very workable and usable.

    [00:14:54] It’s like a tool. Examples of those could be worksheets or blueprints or templates or forms. Anything that is an asset, that is a tool that they need, that they can add to their established content, that becomes a tool within what they are already delivering. So number one is content to feed their distribution channels.

    [00:15:20] Number two are assets. And third, and which is the king of them all are, I call them completes. These are complete package. That companies and other entrepreneurs or organizations need. Here are examples of completes. These could be your complete program or services, your complete courses curriculum, even if it isn’t built into a course yet. Steps of service systems or processes, so these are complete packages that companies can take. It is like full blown turnkey. You already have these complete programs. and you are giving another company, an organization or another business, an opportunity to plug and play where you’ve already created your complete package, your videos, your content, your worksheets.

    [00:16:17] It could even include you coming in and teaching some part of that live. And this is when you have the great privilege of creating an amazing custom package. Whatever works out for you and the licensee. Completes are where it is you guys completes, are the ones that companies are really paying hundreds of thousands of dollars for.

    [00:16:40] Or you can start really down, and I don’t even mean to say down, but you, you know, it doesn’t have to be licensing your whole program to a corporation org organization. You can start by licensing your content to other small businesses starting at only a couple thousand dollars. Whatever works based on the value of the content that you are delivering.

    [00:17:01] But completes are really where it is. And the more complete and the more valuable your program, the more of a transformation you deliver within your program, then the more somebody is going to pay you to use it to license it from you. So let’s go ahead and recap the three types of content that companies line up to license.

    [00:17:21] Now, if you’re driving and you can’t take. I wanna invite you to a totally free one hour video. It’s called Content Licensing 1 0 1, where I go even more in depth than all of this, and you guys can tap into that video anytime. I would call it a webinar, but I’m not selling you anything on it, there’s, you know, I’m not like there with you live saying, and now, you know, do this.

    [00:17:44] It’s literally a video. For those of you guys who are interested in learning more about content licensing, you can tap into this video anytime by visiting license, and then the number two and then the word scale.com, or by visiting our website sweetlifeco.com. So if you can’t take notes, I break down these three types of content. And I actually show examples of these inside that video, and you’re welcome to tap into that. So let’s do a really quick recap. Number one, content to feed any distribution channel. Number two, any sort of assets or tools. Again, these are worksheets or blueprints or templates or forms. And then number three are completes. These are your curriculum or your course, or your complete program, or your complete service package that’s already done and ready to go. And those are the three types of content that companies, organizations, and corporations and other entrepreneurs will line up to pay you to please let them use it in their content distribution or in their program.

    [00:18:48] Please let them sell it, and it’s a win-win for everybody. A couple things moving forward, and I’m not gonna dive into these things in depth because we’ve covered so much over the last two podcast episodes, but I want to make sure I’m at least getting your wheels turning because I want you making more money faster by using the work you’ve already done.

    [00:19:10] And so what I want you to do at this point, if you’re thinking about this, definitely cruise over to license2scale.com. Grab the resources we have there for you, but just be thinking right now, what do you already have? What do you already have in your arsenal? What do you already have that you have already created that other companies could use that you see other companies missing? It could be a good opportunity for both you and another company. What do you already have that you can maybe repurpose or tweak? Maybe you just need to scale it up just a little bit and then you can have an opportunity to sell that exponentially. It could be a course or a mini course or a training, written content, programs.

    [00:19:54] And don’t forget, going through the process of packaging your material to license to another company is the same process we would take you through if you want to certify or accredit or train others on your method. These are the same steps in the same process. It’s just the distribution and the actual usage.

    [00:20:15] The sales side of it looks a little bit different. So licensing your content is the same process that we take clients through as those of you guys who are launching a certification or a train the trainer type program. So if you don’t have assets, then we wanna really think about what are you currently building in your business that we can mindfully in advance, build in a way for part of it to be licensed out.

    [00:20:41] And there are a lot of things to consider really, like what is best for your brand. I was in a clubhouse room a couple of months ago and I was talking about licensing and, and somebody asked me, you know, what’s the deal with white labeling? And I answered that question. In last week’s podcast about whether or not white labeling is is right for you. And so again, make sure you tapped into last week’s podcast. And of course I discuss it more in that license to scale video for you as well.

    [00:21:09] So other decisions you need to make, and we again talk about it in this video, are, should you license your material only locally to businesses, or are we talking about licensing your content to companies that have a global reach and they’re completely online? Should you geographically bind or restrict the content you license to maybe only a limited number of companies or organizations, either within a certain geographic area or perhaps within a certain niche. Those are all strategic questions that we go through in this video training, but also that those are great things to think about, and I want you to be thinking about how the answers to these affect you and your brand and your leadership first, before we’re thinking about how they affect the end user.

    [00:21:57] And then of course, other things like do you license your content as is or are you willing to update. What’s the minimum price? What is the license length? How many people is your licensee allowed to distribute your content to? There’s so many other details frankly, there are questions you didn’t even know you had, but I wanted to hone in on these two podcast episodes and start with the foundations.

    [00:22:19] This is content licensing 1 0 1. This is the conversation that is so exciting you guys. This is literally how I brought my first business consulting firm to seven figures and it. Hard work. I’m not gonna lie about that. It was definitely hard work, but it was way easier than I ever expected because I have, and I had something that was incredibly valuable that other companies want.

    [00:22:44] If you have something that other companies, organizations, entrepreneurs, want and need, that again makes them make more money faster. It makes them be better at what they do. It can level up their brand and it cuts their time. Then you have just made yourself the most valuable person in the room. I guarantee it, and I’m super excited about talking about this content, this, this topic.

    [00:23:10] I geek out on it because I’ve experienced it personally and I’ve seen the opportunities my clients have had when we help them build out their license programs, and I want you to have those opportunities as well. So this is episode number 236 at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. I’m April Beach your host.

    [00:23:30] Thank you so much for hanging out with me. Happy summertime. I hope you’re doing something that you love that makes you laugh. That’s good for you and good for all the people that you love, and that you get a chance to really spend some quality time. And don’t forget to invest in yourself. You might not wanna jump in an ice bath at 04:30 in the morning like I did, but whatever it is for you, okay, now I’m just gonna do a little, little teeny tangent.

    [00:23:55] This is what I learned about myself today. I am way stronger mentally than I even thought I. And I’m really proud of myself for what I did today, and it feels really, really good. And frankly, I was in that ice bath for a really, really long time, and it was unexpected how good not my body did. My brain and my mental toughness surprised me today.

    [00:24:21] And that was freaking awesome. And so I just wanna encourage you to push yourself and you will surprise yourself. We are so much more than we even think we are. We have so many more resources and so much more strength that we can tap into. And when we put ourselves in those positions where we have to see what we’re made, You will not only rise to the occasion, you will blow past it.

    [00:24:47] I know you will. Whether we’re talking about licensing your content or building funnels or launching your first online course, or your business or mastermind or we’re sitting here and we’re helping you determine how to take a great article you wrote and get it distributed so that you can make thousands of dollars, whatever it is, we’re into holistic business building here, and that is your body, your mind, your family.

    [00:25:12] and of course, High profit, deep impact lifestyle for you. Thanks so much for hanging me, hanging out with me today. See, I’m still a little bit shaky here. I’m like drinking my coffee. I really appreciate you guys. I can’t wait to connect with you. Connect with me on Instagram at April Beach life and of course on Clubhouse where I’m there every single week at April Beach, and I would love to hear what you are doing to invest in yourself this summer.

    [00:25:39] And I am there to take your licensing questions, especially in Clubhouse. So don’t forget to hit me up with those because that’s what I’m there for, is to support you guys in these business. Okay. Have an awesome day, and I will talk to you next week. Bye-bye for now.

     
     

    How To License Your Course Content or Program- with April Beach (Episode 261)

    How To License Your Course Content or Program
    How To License Your Course Content or Program

     

    This episode is for those in Phase  3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    This Episode is Great For: 

    This is a great show for established entrepreneurs who are interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially  through licensing your content, course or program. 
     

    Summary: 

    If you’re an established entrepreneurs with a proven programs, courses, or content, and you’re looking to grow exponentially, then this episode is for you. By creating content to license you can demonstrate thought leadership in your space, increase credibility across your audience, expand your business to B2B or create a dual business model. 
     
    This an intro to licensing for entrepreneurs those want to know how content licensing works, those who want to demonstrate thought leadership in your space through Licensing, those interested in transitioning from B2C to B2B in some capacity. This show will give you a good foundation and knowledge base to consider your options. 
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. know what licensing is and how to make money doing it
    2. know the business model of licensing and if it’s right for you
    3. know the prerequisites to license your content 

     

    Resources Mentioned:

    www.license2scale.com

    April Beach on LinkedIn

     

     

     

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    261 (235)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our “Best of Episodes”. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, Hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me. Thank you so much.

    [00:00:30] And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing, though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com.

    [00:00:54] You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes in there for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place. If you’re looking for a resource. Now special message to those of you guys that have been

    [00:01:12] waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s as we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23, and I can’t thank you guys enough. If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training, a recording, a strategy for you every single week, and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break.

    [00:01:46] And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. What turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, that entrepreneurs have relied on.

    [00:02:06] I needed to take a step back and get a perspective of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the SweetLife Podcast for you and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off.

    [00:02:46] But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true, proven business trainings that are transformational.

    [00:03:09] For your company, that is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air, from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you. I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned.

    [00:03:27] The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known in the Experts. So we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings. Without a hook to sell you something, they’re just coming in here to pour into you are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet, subscribe to the show, please click subscribe.

    [00:03:45] Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus, and I just, Love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the episodes coming for you and in the meantime, enjoy this best of, it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason.

    [00:04:08] I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, Simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:32] Hey guys, and welcome to episode number 235. This one is really juicy. It is jam packed with the secrets to how I grew my first business consulting firm to over seven figures. So I’m super excited to share this with you and all the resources that we have here available for you on the show can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com. And this is episode number 235.

    [00:05:00] Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast of your new my name’s April Beach. I am the host here of this show. I am a business consultant and strategist that works with entrepreneurs and experts to design, launch, and scale your business in today’s episode is literally a secret weapon.

    [00:05:18] If you are listening to this, if you’re a regular subscriber or you just happen to land here, this is something that nobody’s talking about and I’m so excited to share it with you on today’s show. We’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit.

    [00:05:35] And this particular episode is a best for you, it’s most appropriate for you if you are in phases three, four, or five. Of my entrepreneur roadmap. What that means is that you have to be in a specific phase to be ready for this level of business, scalability and this level of growth. And so if you’re in phases three, four, or five, this is a great episode for you to listen to.

    [00:06:00] If you don’t know what phase of business design, growth, scale, and impact you are in. Take a second pause here and cruise over to sweetlifeco.com/quiz and you can take a really short quiz and I’ll tell you exactly where you are in your business and what you should be working on right now. You can also text the word quiz to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0.

    [00:06:32] So here’s what we have in today’s show. It’s really great for those of you guys who are established entrepreneurs and you’re interested in learning how to scale your business exponentially through licensing your content course or program. If you have a proven program, course or content, and you are looking to see even the greater impact that you can make.

    [00:06:55] You’re trying to find even more ways to make more money and to create the impact that you know that your program can, than this episode is for you. And so at the end of this episode, you are gonna know what licensing is and how to make money doing it. You are gonna know the business model of licensing and be able to have insight on whether or not this is even right for you, and you’re gonna know the prerequisites that you need to have in place in order to license your content.

    [00:07:24] And there is a super special bonus with today’s episode. If you wanna know more about this, you do not want to miss this bonus. I am giving you a completely free one hour licensing your content, Quick Start video training, and you really don’t wanna miss it. It’s one hour training on the quick start guide of how to prepare and license your content, and you can find that totally free by visiting licensetoscale.com.

    [00:07:58] It’s the word license. The number two and then the word scale.com, and I’ll make sure that that is in the show notes for you. So that’s another resource for you to grab here. I love giving you guys awesome very highly valuable stuff here for free that other businesses charge you thousands for. So definitely go grab that.

    [00:08:18] Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. This is episode number 235, and so all the show notes can be found by visiting sweetlifeco.com number 235 under podcast.

    [00:08:41] Okay, so let’s start out by answering the question. What is licensing? Licensing is creating content for other companies to use. Think of it as renting your content, renting your course, renting your program, so it’s creating content for other companies to use, and they rent it from you and it’s called licensing so that they can grow faster or so that they can make more money or so that they can provide better services or training or support for their people, whoever their people happen to be. And now let me read you the legal definition of licensing. But just so you know, I wanted to make sure I gave you the, the April entrepreneur regular person’s definition of it too. So the legal definition of licensing is content licensing is a legal agreement between two parties known as a licensee and a licensure.

    [00:09:38] Licensees can purchase the rights to republish content from a licensor. Licensing is extremely versatile and allows for brands to repackage content in a variety of forms across desktop and mobile platforms. And that official definition came from news cred. So let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit more.

    [00:09:59] You have a program or you have a course and you wanna make more money, you want to go from what I call in our business, where we take our clients from scale to amplify. There is a difference between scaling your business and amplifying your business. And this my friends, is how you do it. So the benefits of licensing are really important to think about as you’re considering whether or not you wanna license your program to other companies.

    [00:10:28] Here are some of the benefits that you can flow through your mind as I’m saying these to you, and really hold each one up and see if it fits you right. The first one is if you wanna demonstrate thought leadership in your space. If you wanna become a thought leader in your particular niche, your particular area of expertise, then licensing is a benefit in that area.

    [00:10:53] Number two, licensing increases credibility across your own audience. So even though you’re creating content that’s used by other companies, when your audience knows that other companies are buying your content, all of a sudden they are really confident in your ability to get them direct results.

    [00:11:14] Number three, licensing enables for what I call exponential scalability. So let’s talk about scale for a second. Scale in most cases, as we talk about here on the podcast, and most entrepreneurs and online businesses are familiar with it. In that case, we’re talking about taking a one-on-one service or a one-on-one program and turning it into one on group. We’re creating different business models so that you can reach more people and increase your profit usually in the same amount of time.

    [00:11:46] Scaling is a precursor to licensing. Licensing is where you still create that one piece of content and then you’ve tested it in the scale capacity and now you are willing to rent it or allow other companies to borrow it from you called licensing it for them to distribute. So we have gone from scaling you to literally exploding so fast your reach with your content through licens. And then another benefit of licensing is for those of you, if you’re listening to this and you wanna figure out how to go from B to C, so you have a consulting firm or a coaching firm, or you’re a speaker or an author, and you are used to serving one particular client that gets direct results from you and you wanna transition, you wanna start coaching other businesses.

    [00:12:39] Licensing is also a really great benefit for you. So there are multiple benefits to licensing your content, if any of those fit into what aligns with your strategic objectives for your life and your brand.

    [00:12:53] So really the question that we need to dive into here before I share anything else is, is licensing right for you? But not only that, are you ready to license? I have so many people. Literally, we have a waiting list of entrepreneurs who really want to learn how to license their materials, but they aren’t ready yet. So let’s talk about what is a prerequisite for being. To join my masterclass called License to Scale. To learn how to do this, the prerequisite is that you have to have a proven course or program or content that’s gotten people transformational results in the past.

    [00:13:39] So this means if you have never created a course before, or if you do not have a membership community with curriculum, if you have not developed transformational curriculum or a transformational program and you have not tested that, you are not ready for licensing. And so at this point in time, if that is you, of course you’re welcome to sit here and hang out with me for the rest of this episode, but I would put it on pause because we have a program to teach you how to do that.

    [00:14:07] You can find that program by visiting signatureoffer.com. And so the process we take companies through is first we help businesses launch, and then the second phase is scale, where entrepreneurs join our transformational program Design masterclass. Again, you can find that at signatureoffer.com if this is where you are.

    [00:14:26] And then you can go onto licensing your material. So the prerequisite is you have to have a proven program course or content that’s gotten people results in the past. If you don’t have that, you’re not quite ready for that yet, and that’s okay. This is a very cool episode to know what is the potential for you is in the future.

    [00:14:44] So I’m gonna give you guys a peek behind the scenes. I’m pulling back the curtains, and I’m gonna share with you two case studies out of five different case studies in which I have licensed my content for over 12 years, because I want you to get your wheels spinning about what you have or what you can do with your business.

    [00:15:02] All five case studies and they’re all different. All five case studies are available by going to licensetoscale.com and joining that licensing 101 webinar. But I’m just for the sake of time and to get your wheels spinning. I’m gonna share with you two here. Okay, so the first case study I wanna share is the fact that I had a collection of courses, a collection of online courses back in 2009.

    [00:15:29] I’ve been doing online courses before they were even a thing. You listen to the show, you know that, right? So I had a collection of eight full online courses and there were eight different courses that were for a very specific niche. They were totaled 198 slides, 13 hours of recorded classes, and they came with teacher guides and supplemental worksheets and even project plans.

    [00:15:53] I licensed. That collection of courses and I have licensed these collection of eight courses that is currently still to this day, licensed in over 13 countries to other businesses. They included business coaching videos, swipe files, and we licensed it in different formats so that the business could use it in even co-brand it.

    [00:16:15] So that is case study number one. So I had a collection of courses that served a specific audience. And people line up, people literally join my waiting list to license my courses. I only release them once a year in the month of November, and they join a waiting list to license my courses once a year.

    [00:16:36] And I have been doing that since the beginning of 2009. And so that’s one way. So if you have a collection of courses, not just one. Think about all of the material you have created, all of the mini videos, all the things that you’ve done, that we can package together into a complete package. And I promise you, when it’s done correctly, they will line up to license that from you.

    [00:17:01] So I’ve done this for years and I’m still doing this today. So that’s case study number one. And then case study number two is that I have a full coaching program that includes the courses, but it also includes consulting for corporations and content that that corporation can distribute to all of.

    [00:17:21] People, in this case it’s a corporate program, and so they wanna take my content and my courses and use my consulting. And that’s another case study. And I first started doing this back in 2010. So these are two case studies and again, I have five some smaller ones for those of you guys that are just getting started.

    [00:17:39] And you can see all five by going to the license to scale.com and you can join that information webinar. So hopefully that gets your wheels spinning a little bit about what you already have. We want to dive into your assets, dive into your method, dive into your process and what you’ve already created, and then have a conversation about who can this really benefit so it’ll benefit your business and it’ll benefit their corporation and their company as well.

    [00:18:09] The next thing I wanna kind of transition here because I know that for many of you, this is a new conversation. This is a new topic, is sharing with you that there are three primary ways to license your content, and each one of these ways is going to equal the branding and the future goals for you that you have for your.

    [00:18:32] So the first way you can license your content is straight as it is with your branding, your logo all over it. So that would be somebody borrows or quote unquote licenses, rents your course or your class, and they plug it into their lms. They plug it into their system or wherever they’re distributing it, but it’s your logo all over it.

    [00:18:54] That’s way number. Way number two is co-branded, where you allow for your them to add their name and logo to it. It could be co-presented by, co-branded by, and that’s a really great way for you to retain the ownership and the authority of that content, but also to really help your licensee level up as well.

    [00:19:17] And then the third way you can license your content is completely white labeled. White labeled is where nobody even knows it’s yours. Some operations expect that to happen, so some companies will only license your content if it’s completely white labeled. Some companies only wanna license your content if it’s co-branded, and so every single one of the licensees has their own goals for licensing in your content.

    [00:19:42] Now let’s like talk about for a second what is really actually good for you, those three levels. Number one, straight As is, is your trademark. Number two, co-branded, or number three, white labeled. They follow the flow of the value, which means that someone will pay you less to take it straight as your own, a little bit more to co-brand it and a little bit more to white label it, or in some cases, a significantly more amount of money to let white label your content.

    [00:20:15] But let’s ask the really important question here. Is that right for you? Is it right for you to have no stake and for nobody to know that that was your genius? And out of all the companies and all the entrepreneurs that I coach to license their courses and their content, very, very few of them go with the white label, even though the end user, the licensee, will pay all the tea in China.

    [00:20:43] Is that really worth it to not get recognition for your brand? And so those are some things that I just want you to be thinking about. I know this is an intro to licensing conversation, so I wanted to make sure that you knew about those three primary ways to license your content. So as you’re going through, as you’re thinking about what you have that you can license, you’re also thinking about in what capacity that that could work best for you and what you want your brand to be 2, 6, 10 years down the road.

    [00:21:14] And then the last question I wanna answer for you today is, who licenses your content? Who should you license it? This is a very common question. I answer this in clubhouse rooms all the time, and I get emails very often, especially when we are leading up to opening up my license to scale masterclass and people are saying, Well, who, who wants this? Who do I sell it to? So let me give you two very clear examples of who should you license your li your content too. The first one is other companies who are not in direct competition with you. But they serve the same audience and they wanna look better or expand their reach, grow their list, increase their sales, and save time.

    [00:21:57] The second opportunity for an audience for you are companies that are exactly like yours, but they’re missing something they need, and they want your expert content. They want turnkey offers, so they wanna be able to take your course and just plug it in to their system and sell it right away. And they wanna have faster, instant results.

    [00:22:21] So you can license your content to a company whose audience needs it, but the company is not in direct competition with you. Or you can license your content to a company that is just like yours, but perhaps they don’t have as great of content as you do. Perhaps they need some more content to level up what they already have to shore up their offering, and they need your help to do that.

    [00:22:44] So those are two general examples of audiences who you could consider licensing your content. So today we’re talking about how to license your content to scale your business and increase profit. And I talked about a lot of things. We talked about what is licensing. We talked about the benefits of licensing.

    [00:23:04] We discussed whether or not you’re ready to license. I gave you two of five different case studies of when I have licensed my content. And hopefully in doing so, your wheels are spinning and you’re thinking about what you already have that you can license or how you can package together. Content courses, programs, your framework, your methodology to license to other people.

    [00:23:28] We also talked about three primary ways to license your content, and we talked about who should you license your content to. So we discussed a lot, but I’ll be really honest. This isn’t even the tip of the iceberg. I have so much more to share with you. So if you are interested in licensing your content or learning more about licensing your content, I highly recommend you join the licensing 1 0 1 training, and it’s totally free where I’m also gonna give you a quick start guide.

    [00:24:01] To learn how to get your content licensed faster and to determine if it’s right for you, and you can grab that anytime by visiting license. And then the number two, and then the word scale, S C A L E.com Or of course, all of the show notes will be found in the episode show notes. This is episode number 235.

    [00:24:25] And you can visit us at sweetlifeco.com, click on the podcast, and this is number 235. And just so you know, this is part one of a two part podcast episode I’m doing for you. Next week in episode number 236, I’m going to tell you the four types of content that companies line up to license. They will literally line up flood your list, begging for you to license your content to them.

    [00:24:56] And there’s four different kinds of content that companies line up to license. We’re talking about that next week on the show. That’s gonna be episode number 236. So thank you so much for joining me. I am very excited to share this. This has been my secret weapon. Many of you might not know. I own two different business consulting firms and this is how my first, very first business consulting firm really broke through that glass ceiling, and I’m so excited to share this with you. It’s been kind of a secret. I’ve been holding in my pocket for quite a few years, and I’ve had the privilege of working with so many businesses, one on one to do this, but we do have our license to scale masterclass.

    [00:25:38] Visit licensetoscale.com. If you are ready to take the steps and license your content to hit that amplified level in your business. All right, you guys have an amazing night. Happy July, 2021 when I’m recording this. I hope you’re doing something super fun that you love that really fills you up. I’ll talk to you in another episode soon.

     

     
     

    How To Lead In Your Niche By Creating Your Scalable Signature Program or Offer – with April Beach (Episode 260)

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Episode Bonus:

    This Episode is Perfect For: 

    Coaches, consultants, speakers and authors who need to increase sales, and scale your business with a leading offer, course, training or program.

     

    Summary: 

    If you’ve been spinning your wheels or struggling to get noticed, you’re not alone. In today’s fast paced world of online leaders, it’s not a surprise when new and established businesses struggle to get traction. So… how do you become known in world where every one is an “expert” and you’re too busy in the grind to toot your own horn to stand out. 
     
    The answer… develop a core signature offer guided by your leading framework, method, system, or process.  When you create a signature program, online course, membership, event, service, offer, and method things quickly change in your company that will impact your message, marketing and profit like never before. In this show we also dive into the most common types os scalable offers and which may be right for you. 
     
    “A signature offer is a unique service, that you create from your experience, method, framework, or expertise, that delivers predictable-transformational-measurable results”  – April Beach 
     
    This show is an expansion of the Your Signature Offer™ masterclass provided by April Beach and the SweetLife™ Company.
     

    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Identify if you’re ready to scale with a signature program or offer
    2. Identify areas of need you may have to stand out in your niche
    3. Know the most common types of scalable offers
    4. Know the two types of signature offers 
    5. Know the true definition of what a signature program or offer really is
     
    This show is an expansion of the Your Signature Offer™ trainings provided by April Beach and the SweetLife Company.  Join the next Your Signature Offer™ Masterclass or Offer Engineer™ Accelerator online.

     

    Resources Mentioned:

    What is scalable?

    www.signtureoffer.com

     

     

     

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    260 (213)

    [00:00:00] Hi you guys and welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, your host, and I am so glad you’re here. You have tapped into one of our “Best of Episodes”. These episodes are cherry picked from our most popular episodes with the most downloads with the most comments. So these are the ones where whether it’s in a speaking engagement, or whether it’s by writing to us or sending us messages on social media where you guys have reached out and said, ‘hey, listen, this episode you did was really powerful for me’.

    [00:00:28] Thank you so much. And they’re also the other episodes that we believe are the most important as we move into the next year for the online business landscape that we are going into for coaches and consultants and experts and speakers, and authors. And so this episode is absolutely amazing.

    [00:00:46] Though it’s previously recorded, all of the resources can be found by clicking on sweetlifeco.com. You can visit us online and just very simply select the podcast and you’ll find all of the show notes in there for you with up to date links, making sure that you’re getting to the right place if you’re looking for a resource. 

    [00:01:08] Now special message to those of you guys that have been waiting for this show to come back. I am so excited to announce that the next generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast is dropping the week after Christmas, before New Year’s as we roll into the new year, going from 22 to 23 and I can’t thank you guys enough. 

    [00:01:30] If you are a new listener to the show, you probably have no idea what I’m talking about, but after five years of faithfully dropping a business training or recording, a strategy for you every single week and winning awards for this show, I needed to step back and take a break.

    [00:01:46] And you guys have been so gracious in actually encouraging me to do that. So what turned out to be one month off, turned out to be about a year off of recording this show, but the reality is, is that we have been producing so many business trainings, hundreds and hundreds of them for five years, and entrepreneurs have relied on. I needed to take a step back and get a perspective. Of what you guys really needed for the next generation of the show. 

    [00:02:15] How should this show actually help you to continue to grow your businesses? And many of your businesses have significantly grown since we first started this show. And you are growing and we’re growing and what does that actually look like?

    [00:02:27] So I have had the gift of spending almost a year to build the entire next generation of the Sweet Life Podcast for you, and I can’t wait for you guys to hear it. I’m so excited. So the wait is almost over and I wanted to send you a message about it. Thank you for the emails and the comments on social media encouraging me to enjoy my time off. But April, please come back. I need your show to grow my business. You guys are amazing and you have really been the fuel to the fire. That has helped me see clearly, clearly of where this show is gonna go in the next gen. It’s gonna sound a little bit different, but it will continue to be the place where you can come to for true proven business trainings that are transformational for your company, that is business coaching that isn’t pulled out of thin air from experts delivered to you in such a way that you can implement it. That’s why this show has been so popular over the years, and that’s what we will continue to do for you.

    [00:03:25] I can’t wait for you to hear what we have planned. The first series we’re kicking off is called Becoming Known and the Experts, so we have in here that are teaching you these proven business trainings without a hook to sell you something. They’re just coming in here to pour into you are absolutely epic. I can’t wait. So if you haven’t yet subscribe to the show, please click subscribe. Please share this with your friends. Please resubscribe in case that you were unsubscribed during my little hiatus. And I just love you guys so much, and I’m so excited to be back here. I can’t wait to drop the whole entire NextGen of the show and the episodes coming for you.

    [00:04:01] And in the meantime, enjoy this ‘best of’ it is very powerful and it’s been chosen for you for a reason. I’ll talk to you guys soon.

    [00:04:13] You’re listening to The Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, Simplified strategies to grow your service business, and launch a life you love faster with business, mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach.

    [00:04:31] Hey everybody, and welcome to episode number 213 here today. I’m April Beach your host. And it is such a pleasure to be able to talk to you again, yet another week here on the show. Today we’re talking about how to lead in your niche by creating your scalable signature program or offer. It is one of my favorite topics to discuss because this is one of my superpowers, is helping you create your signature offer in your unique methodology.

    [00:04:57] And so, we’re continuing the conversation we had on episode 212 last week, and we’re diving into the signature program creation side of your business. We’ve honestly talked about this so many times on the podcast. You can cruise to our podcast website at any point in time. All you have to do is type in the words signature offer or signature program, and you’re gonna be able to pull up all the times over the past four years that we’ve discussed this topic to help you get better results in this area.

    [00:05:27] So here we are for another show about this, and let’s be really specific in who this episode is for. So this is for any of you guys who are really ready to scale your business. You have an established business. You’re ready to, and we’re gonna talk actually, about the fundamentals of scaling on this show.

    [00:05:43] But you’re ready to increase your profit and it’s time. It’s time to create a framework of programs and offers that you have so that you can scale your business, increase your profit, and um, duplicate yourself. Even faster. So that’s what we’re diving into. If this is you, this means that you are in phase three of my start to scale up system.

    [00:06:08] If you aren’t sure what phase of the start to scale up system you’re in, you can cruise to sweetlifeco.com/quiz and you can take a really short quiz and you’re gonna find out exactly where you are and this whole entire lifestyle business roadmap. This particular show is for those of you guys who are ready to scale, you know you’re ready to scale, and this is phase three.

    [00:06:31] This is a great episode for you entrepreneurs and experts who are ready to take the lead and become the undisputed leader in your space. Here’s the issue though, so this is why you know it’s good to hang out and listen to this show. So if you’ve been spining your wheels and struggling to get noticed, you’re definitely not alone in today’s everything, everybody is a leader, expert everywhere. You know exactly what I’m talking about. Everybody is an online expert of some kind. It’s really not a surprise that you might be struggling to stand out even if you’ve been in business for a really long time and you wanna become known. You’re probably very, very, very good at what you do, and you might be struggling with communicating that across the board, in your business, across social media, and really across your messaging too.

    [00:07:18] We’re gonna dive into that today. The answer to that is to develop your signature offer, and that’s guided by your leading framework, method system or process, which we discussed last week on the show. When you create a signature program, an online course, a membership, an event, or a service, or really an offer, and it’s derived from your unique method. It will change things in your company and it will impact your message and your profit like never before. So that’s what we’re diving, diving into on today’s show. 

    [00:07:53] And at the end of this episode, you can expect to; I’d be able to identify if you’re ready to scale with a signature program or offer. You’re gonna be able to identify areas of need that you may need to stand out in your niche. You are gonna know the most common types of scalable offers, and you’re gonna know the two different types of signature programs and offers, and you’re gonna know the true definition of what a true signature program and offer really is. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in.

    [00:08:35] Okay guys, so first of all, I have to apologize to you because I’m slightly losing my voice. If you have been hanging out with me on Clubhouse for the past couple of months, then it’s not a surprise. You totally know why I’m spending a lot of time, our whole company and our whole team is spending a lot of time on Clubhouse, and we have actually talked about how to create your signature offer multiple times in private and public rooms on Clubhouse.

    [00:09:00] If that’s a topic beyond this podcast that you wanna dive into more with me, please do so. You can follow me at April Beach on Clubhouse, and we have our own Clubhouse Club now. Our Clubhouse Club sounds funny to say that Clubhouse Club, our Clubhouse Club is called Sweet Life Entrepreneurs. Of course it is. And uh, you can follow our club or officially join our club. If you are on clubhouse, just search the word sweetLife, one word under the clubs. We jam a lot on this, and I actually get to take your signature offer questions on clubhouse. But with that being said, that is why I’m losing my voice and I’m just super glad to be sharing this message with you on episode 213 here as well.

    [00:09:46] So thanks for being here. So this is what we’re talking about. We’re talking about how to lead in your niche by creating your scalable signature program or offer. But first, let’s take a look at actually why this is important, why this is an important conversation to have and why you may really need to be focusing in and leaning in with me here.

    [00:10:07] Number one, it’s hard to stand out with your marketing. If you’re struggling with your marketing, it’s usually because you aren’t being specific enough. And instead with this philosophy of going through and creating your signature program and offer, you’re gonna gain an immediate audience who clearly understands what you do and identifies you as the undisputed leader that’s gonna guide them. So the problem is you’re having trouble standing out. Your marketing is not specific enough. 

    [00:10:37] Problem number two is actually going through the process of creating a leading, scalable offer. It’s important for you to understand how to organize your ideas, how to turn your thoughts into reality, how to turn your expertise into a signature program, and actually regroup those things into your signature offer and the signature offer that scales.

    [00:10:58] So we’re gonna talk about that as well here on today’s show. And if you’re struggling because you have a lack of systemization in the back of your business, so your systems. Aren’t able to be scaled. You might not even have systems yet in certain places. Creating your signature offer certainly solves that problem in a faster way as well.

    [00:11:19] So first of all, let’s talk about some fundamentals here. What is a signature offer? This is a definition I wrote, Ooh gosh, back in 2018 when we first launched your signature offer masterclass. It was important to define actually what this is because there’s a lot of businesses out there that just launch a signature offer because it might be the most popular one or the most common one that sells. That’s not really what a signature offer is. Don’t worry. I’m gonna give you a lot more resources here. That will help you take this to the next level. 

    [00:11:51] But let me just start out by reading this definition. A signature offer is a unique program or service that you create from your expertise, method, and experience that delivers predictable, transformational, measurable results for your client every single time. Okay, so it’s created from your, IP, your experience, and we’re gonna dive more into this as. The reason why we’re talking about this so much here on the show and on Clubhouse is because right now our industry leading signature program called Your Signature Offer is opening again. We open it up a few times a year to help you, so we can roll up our sleeves with you to create your signature offer and become the indisputed leader in your space.

    [00:12:38] And so we’re talking about this on the podcast in our clubhouse rooms, in our live stream, in our 1 0 1 calls. It’s all about the most important thing I’m so passionate about for you is creating your signature offer, because it’s all in an effort to help you do two things. Number one, identify if your business is ready to develop your signature offer. And number two, if you’re ready for an expert to guide you through the process and give you the step by step method to develop your signature offer. So if that’s you and you already know you want more help with, please visit signatureoffer.com and we’ll make sure that is in the resources for you as well. But if you’re ready to dive in with us and have us link arms with you and give you our process to do this, visit signature offer.com. 

    [00:13:28] Okay, so now let’s go ahead and dive into how we’re gonna break out the business training of this episode. We’re actually breaking it out piece by piece from the title. So let’s read the title of what we’re talking about here again today. The title is How to Lead in Your Niche, by creating your scalable signature program or offer. So I’m gonna break this up into three different parts that’s hopefully helpful for you to take these little pieces, wrap your head around them and start implementing them right here from the show.

    [00:14:01] I love being known as a podcast that gives you step by step business trainings that other coaches are gonna charge you thousands for. So I wanna make sure you’re leaving with awesome action steps to get profitable and clear results just from this podcast alone. So part one, we’re gonna talk about how to lead in your niche. Part two, we’re gonna talk about scalable, what scalable really means. And then part three of this show, we’re gonna talk about the actual definition of what is a true signature program or offer. 

    [00:14:30] So let’s go ahead and dive into part one first. Breaking out the title of this show, How to Lead in Your Niche. I know some of you say it niche. Sorry, I, I just call it a niche. So how you do this is by number one, having the very best program, that you are the best of, the best of the best at what you do, That you are undeniably the program to go to in your space, in your market, in your area, in your geographic area, whatever that is for you. Most people, it’s online area, so that you have the very best program. That’s a number one way. It’s a development of your content into your program. That is how you. And this is not in any particular order. These are all parts of the ways of how you lead. Number two, that you deliver the most transformational results. You guys are probably, especially those of you guys that listen to the podcast a lot and and are always in our online business community, you’re probably sick of hearing me say transformational results. I say like, predictable, transformational, measurable results. Those are the three words, and you’re probably sick of it, but here is what that means.

    [00:15:41] This is why, you need to deliver transformation through your signature program. There’s a bunch of different types of transformation you can deliver based on your area of expertise, but how you lead in your niche is by creating the very best program that delivers a transformation of your area of expertise, in your area of expertise. Also, how you lead is by becoming the most trusted leader. Now really let’s kind of break out what trust really means. That means somebody is submitted to your guidance and your leadership, that they are sold out in buying into the fact that you are going to navigate the way when they might totally be blind in this area, they completely trust you. When you develop a program, and this is all obviously around developing your signature offer, but when you develop a program and you move forward and you are the trusted leader for the people, they haven’t just bought your program, they actually trust you and they’re trusting you to guide the way, then that’s how you lead in your niche.

    [00:16:47] Also, you have the clearest message and therefore the clearest marketing messages. If you do not have your signature offer or your signature program developed, you might be struggling with this. You might be one of the many entrepreneurs that I talk to, even those that have been in business for years, that there’s so many messages cuz frankly, you’re so good at so many different things.

    [00:17:12] You wanna talk about it all. But what that does in today’s day and age of online business, way too loud, overwhelming drowning noise is. It doesn’t create that clear message and that clear marketing of your specific primary superpower. And so how to lead in your niche is to have the clearest message and to have the clearest marketing.

    [00:17:36] Also, we want you to have some of the best, highest, most profitable sales. One of the ways that we know you’re a leader is that you’re making the most money doing this because people trust you, because you deliver transformational results because you have the best program. So therefore, naturally you’re gonna be, if not the most profitable, one of the most profitable programs because people trust you and you deliver that transformation.

    [00:18:05] And this is what this means in order to become that leader in your space. When you do these things, it means you have the deepest client commitment. It means that you are sold out in love with giving your clients and your customers a transformation, that you promise that there’s nothing that’s gonna get in the way of you committing to do that for your clients, and it also means that you have the most thoughtful client experiences. And when we talk about client experiences, it’s really important as we talk about Signature Offer development. We teach this in our year Signature Offer Leaders program, is that there’s so much psychology behind the tactical things you’re delivering as well. That there are a lot of mindset and important psychological benchmarks that your clients have to hit and you are responsible to plan out, map out, and guide them through in order to be the leader in that space. 

    [00:19:07] Part one, based on the title of this show, How to Lead in Your Niche, You need to have the best program with the most transformational results, that you’re the most trusted leader with the clearest message in marketing, that you have some of the highest sales, if not the highest sales in this area, That you have the deepest client commitment and the most thoughtful client experiences. So that’s part one. And I promise you we’re breaking this up into three. 

    [00:19:33] Part two. Let’s go back and summarize our title again. We’re talking about how to lead in your niche, which we just covered by creating your scalable signature offer. So now we’re diving into part two, which is by creating your scalable. Signature offer. So what is a scalable offer? Scalable refers to a company’s ability to increase profit customers or services by creating systems and offer structures that deliver those results. So in quick terms, it basically means the ability to make more money by creating systems and offers that decrease time, increase efficiency, customer served and profit.

    [00:20:16] It means we are creating structures in your company systemization, behind the scenes. Automation behind the scenes, but the offers, the programs, the services, whatever they may be, courses, memberships, we’re gonna dive into that here in a second, is that they are built and designed. The structure of them, the architecture of those programs is designed in order to increase your capacity while either keeping your time the same or actually decreasing your workload. So that’s what we talk about when we talk about what a scalable offer really, really is. It eliminates or reduces one-on-one work by adding this traditional type of online service. In most cases, it’s a course or a membership community or an online event, but that isn’t it.

    [00:21:08] I love to talk about other ways, other unique, customized, scalable offer creation strategies as well. But those are the most common that people know. Scale’s also reached by designing custom or disruptive programs. Now this is usually a hybrid type of a program, so these are also offers and services unique to your business goals, profit and purpose.

    [00:21:34] You probably have heard me say before and you’re probably thinking yourself, frankly, you know, just because everybody else is launching a course, does that mean I need to do it just because everybody else is, you know, creating this sort of a program? Does that really what’s right for my business and my goals and my profit plan? And of course, the most important your customers. So when we talk about scale, it’s really about the architecture and the design of what you’re doing and how you’re delivering your services, and it enables you to deliver the same results to more people, either the same time as you were working before or reduced time.

    [00:22:10] Scaling also streamlines the processes that you teach, coach, or deliver so that then you can grow in your scale and scale your team. We don’t just scale the offer, we scale your way of delivering it so we can actually scale your method, scale your teaching, scale your processes so that we can grow your team. And that’s what we talk about when we work with businesses to actually scale your team. And it really moves you from overworking to what I call cluster working. That’s a very important thing, especially for entrepreneurs. You became an entrepreneur because you wanted quality of life, and this is how we do it.

    [00:22:52] It’s in the process of scaling your business that you really start to achieve this life design that you had always hoped for. And as long as you do it in a strategic way. And your entrepreneur IQ is leveled up on how to do that. As long as you fully understand how to do that, you will achieve those results. Scaling also streamlines your operations and your systems. So it’s not just your team systems or your coaches system. It’s all of your system. It’s your client onboarding system. It’s your client onboarding system, it’s your communication systems, your marketing systems. When we talk about creating scalable offers, all of these things need to be part of.

    [00:23:30] And just for one clear definition, Webster’s Dictionary defines ‘scalable’ as capable of being easily expanded or upgraded on demand. So there is the definition, so that’s the closure of part two. Again, part one, we talked about how to lead in your niche. Part two we’re talking about by creating scalable, and so we kind of defined here really what scalable is.

    [00:23:58] It’s not only the offers, but it’s the systems. It’s taking your methods and reaching and serving more people at less time or reduced time to increase profit. 

    [00:24:09] And then the part three of this week’s episode, this is number 213, is by creating Your Scalable, which talked about signature program or offer. And so we have to answer the question, what actually is that? What is a true signature offer or program? Again, I’ll read the definition that I originally wrote about four years ago, just to help you put it into context. So your signature offer is a unique program that you create from your intellectual property, that your experience, your method, and your expertise that delivers people predictable, transformational, measurable results every single time.

    [00:24:55] Okay, so the first note we have to make here is that there are actually two kinds of signature programs or offers. This is very important to understand because where you are in business, once we kind of understand this fundamental baseline, Signature program/ offer creation. It’s gonna help you understand the lines of thinking that you can have to move forward to get results faster.

    [00:25:21] So there are two kinds, and I’ll reference all the other podcast episodes over the last couple of years when I’ve talked about this as well. Two kinds. Number one is foundational. Number two is influential. Where you are in your business is gonna dictate really what type of your signature offer you’re building.

    [00:25:40] Both of those foundational and influential can scale, but which you choose truly depends on your business growth needs and capabilities right now. So a foundational signature offer, this is for those who have never created a signature offer or program before. You may be new in your niche. And this creation of your foundational signature offer gets you on the map, either in a certain area of expertise online or in a geographical area based on where you’re located. Or it’s for those of you guys who established business owners, but you really have not gotten the traction, or you really haven’t become known for something specific yet. So that’s a foundational signature offer. 

    [00:26:24] An influential signature offer is for those of you guys with an established track record of getting people results. So you are known usually in a one-on-one setting for getting people results in this particular area that you’re creating your signature offer and program around, and this influential signature offer stems from your unique method, process, framework, programming, mapped out steps, whatever you wanna call it, which you have tested and proven to be true.

    [00:27:00] Your signature offer or your signature program stems from your unique method or framework, which you have used in the past or you’re in the process of creating based on your experience or expertise. And an influential signature offer makes you known for a specific outcome, deliverable experience, program service, and it makes your method well known as.

    [00:27:26] And an influential signature offer when it is built correctly, can establish you as the leader in your industry so that other businesses are trying to follow along, trying to play catch up to you. This is how our, your signature offer program is. We’ve had this program for years. and honestly people are just popping up trying to create programs like it, but we’re well rooted in establishing our area of expertise in this because it’s our signature offer program, and that’s what I want for you as well.

    [00:28:02] The what you do. Others are going to try to follow you, but you are the undisputed leader because nobody does it the way you do it. Nobody has your unique method, your unique process, and frankly your experiences that come into it. Your personal opinions in the way you go about doing it, and the method in which you get people results.

    [00:28:26] So an influential signature offer can also really change the landscape of an industry and disrupt the space. Now let’s actually talk about, kind of breaking down some of the fundamentals here. What makes a signature offer an actual signature offer? Because we had talked about this in the beginning that just cuz it’s a thing that sells the most, or you know, if you are, let’s say for example, a graphic design firm, the most common product somebody may purchase from you is a logo design. But that doesn’t mean it’s your signature. Okay, so I actually get asked this question all the time, and I teach the components of a true signature offer in my Your Signature Offer Leaders Program. But for the sake of this podcast and just wrapping up this post question again, we’re answering the question of the title of this particular episode, How To Lead In Your Niche By Creating Your Scalable Signature Programmer Offer.

    [00:29:20] This is what I want you to take away. Your signature offer is unique to you. It’s created by you. It’s derived from your experience, your expertise, your views, your theories, your styles, and your beliefs. Your signature offer is built from the foundation of your method, your process, your system, or your framework.

    [00:29:43] And you can listen to last week’s episode 212 to dive all into how to create your unique method and your unique framework, and the difference between a method and a framwork. Your signature offer delivers predictable, transformational, measurable results. That’s what a real true signature offer is also. And your signature offer provides the roadmap for your clients to navigate the physical, psychological, and or tangible roadblocks that they have hit while trying to do it on your, on their.

    [00:30:16] But now your signature offer is that roadmap that helps ’em guide through the way you are the trusted leader when they feel blind ,or at least partially unable to see you know how to navigate through and get to the end result that they are looking for. Examples of business models of what your signature offer could be. So we don’t start with the actual business model. I’m a really big advocate for this. We don’t just say, Oh, I’m gonna launch a course. Oh, I gonna launch a membership site. That is the last thing we do, is actually building out the structure of the business model. The first thing we do is extracting your thoughts, turning your thoughts and your expertise into reality in the form of your signature offer.

    [00:31:03] And then here are the most common business models that Signature offers manifest and build into. It could be a full blown program. This could be a corporate program or a healthcare program or an educational program. Our clients develop amazing signature corporate, educational, industry leading signature programs. It’s really impressive. So that’s one of ’em. It could be a course. And how you deliver that course, whether it’s live or on demand. That’s, those are, We have a million other podcasts we can, you know, dive into about those. You’re welcome to search our podcast website. Just literally type in the Word course and it’ll bring you to every other podcast episode about courses and how to create your course.

    [00:31:51] It could be a membership community, it could be an event, a live virtual event, or an in-person event. Your signature offer could be a service. It could be a one hour of service. You could have like the crazy, most amazing transformational one hour service that is your signature offer that you are known for.

    [00:32:13] It could be a mastermind. And of course it could also be a hybrid business model, which most of our clients are, are building hybrid business models in order to get their clients results. And of course, I always want you to be realizing and remembering and frankly just thinking along the lines of the fact that it can be anything else. Just because a business model hasn’t been created yet doesn’t mean that you can’t create it. If that what works best for or your clients. So if you’re thinking, Wow, well I just kind of wanna do and deliver my, my signature content this way, and my signature offer this way and my signature program this way, but nobody’s really doing that. Please listen to yourself. You can do anything that you’re willing to build and strategize through. 

    [00:33:05] Here’s a quick story about that and then a will just wrap up this episode for you. In 2008, I had a crazy thriving consulting firm. I had licensed my trademark to offices in seven different states, and I had three babies at home at that time. By 2008, they were all under the age of six. and I could not do one-on-one consulting work anymore. I did not have the bandwidth, and so I, without even being some strategy, decided to launch an online course, and it wasn’t because it was the sexy thing to do. Nobody was doing online courses then you guys. I mean, it was like we had duct tape the thing together with a prerecorded Cisco WebEx. It was really, really, really clunky. So I didn’t copy what anybody else was doing cuz nobody was doing that yet. I did it because I literally had to figure out how to scale and increase profit while not even keeping the same time.

    [00:34:04] This mama, I had to decrease my time because I was freaking exhausted. So I just wanna inspire you that it wasn’t something that I just was following the crowd. I literally had to do it because that’s what worked for me. And frankly, the companies that were coming to me to learn to launch their own business, a lot of them were international in my time here in Colorado, didn’t work for their time in Australia or Switzerland. And so they wanted things on demand. So I launched my first and one of the first Evergreen on Demand courses. Because it needed to be done. So I share that story with you because if you’re thinking about delivering something some way that has never been done before, do it. Like go through the process. I would love to roll up my sleeves with you and help you develop out that new business model.

    [00:34:53] I’m a big advocate that we’re always evolving and there truly is always a better, deeper, and more efficient way where we can get our clients results. So I’m just gonna end this episode with encouraging you to be disruptive, to be creative on purpose, if that’s what works best for the creation of your signature offer.

    [00:35:10] So thank you so much for hanging out with me today. Again, this was episode number 213 here on the SweetLife Entrepreneurial Podcast. I’m April Beach host here on the show. We’re gonna begin re begin bringing a lot of our experts back into the show coming up here in the next few episodes, So I’m excited to dive into back to some business trainings in the form of interviews, and today we talked about how to lead in your niche by creating your scalable signature program or offer. If you would like to work with me and my team to create your signature offer, we have two really fun things coming up. If you’re listening to this podcast in real time, you can very simply go to signature offer.com.

    [00:35:52] We have a one day live virtual event to create your signature offer, and we have our your Signature Offer Leaders program, which is opening up in the end of February as well. And I would love to link arms with you and give you my system to make sure that you are creating your signature offer and process to become the undisputed leader in your space.

    [00:36:16] I would love to do that for you. Okay. I hope you guys have a great afternoon or morning or night wherever you’re listening to, whenever you’re listening to this, and I’ll look forward to talking to you again soon. Bye-bye for now.

     

     
     

    Episode 257: How To Create More Time Freedom As An Entrepreneur – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
    Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

    Summary:

    Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
    In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

    At the End of This Episode You Will

    1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
    2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
    3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,
    we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.
    So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.
    You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,
    with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,
    but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,
    that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,
    I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.
    And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,
    as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,
    which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,
    cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,
    we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.
    First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,
    that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?
    Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,
    what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,
    because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,
    okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.
    It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?
    Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.
    Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.
    So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.
    And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,
    it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?
    Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,
    you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,
    okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.
    And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,
    like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,
    you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.
    Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.
    We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.
    And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,
    who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.
    Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.
    And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,
    that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,
    but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.
    This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,
    which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.
    And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.
    They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,
    okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.
    And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.
    And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,
    you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,
    to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,
    why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,
    you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.
    We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,
    I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.
    I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,
    including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

    Episode 256: The Business of Podcasting – Part 2 – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs who are thinking about launching a podcast.

    Summary:

    When it comes to podcasting, everyone thinks ads are the way to monetize, but in this episode I’m breaking down other ways to grow your business with a podcast, and how to choose which is right for you. Podcasting is a great way to become known, grow your following and build relationships with your audience. Podcasting is also a great way to fill your coaching services, but it’s definitely not for everyone. 
    Tune into this show to hear behind the scenes of the business of podcasting, how to use a podcast for business exposure, and how to monetize your podcast in the best way for your goals and capacity.  For most people, monetizing a podcast is a no-brainer but figuring out how to go about doing it in the right way for your company can be tricky. This show solves that issue.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have a clear understanding if you should launch a podcast
    2. Know the 3 ways to monetize your podcast

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 255: The Business of Podcasting – Part 1 – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs who are thinking about launching a podcast.

    Summary:

    When it comes to podcasting, everyone thinks ads are the way to monetize, but in this episode I’m breaking down other ways to grow your business with a podcast, and how to choose which is right for you. Podcasting is a great way to become known, grow your following and build relationships with your audience. Podcasting is also a great way to fill your coaching services, but it’s definitely not for everyone. 
     
    Tune into this show to hear behind the scenes of the business of podcasting, how to use a podcast for business exposure, and how to monetize your podcast in the best way for your goals and capacity.  For most people, monetizing a podcast is a no-brainer but figuring out how to go about doing it in the right way for your company can be tricky. This show solves that issue.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have a clear understanding if you should launch a podcast
    2. Know the 3 ways to monetize your podcast

    Resources Mentioned:

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 254: Should You Launch A Membership Program? – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for businesses who are investigating the idea of launching a membership community.

    Summary:

    This is a great show for businesses who are investigating the idea of launching a membership community. If you want to increase profit and serve more people at a time in the form of a membership community, this show will give you more clarity on how that type of program structure will work in your business and your life. 
    Membership programs deliver reoccurring information, content, trainings and/or engagement to clients on an ongoing basis. But, to create an excellent membership program that keeps people engaged, with ongoing monthly reoccurring revenue, you need to do a few things right. In this episode, we’re talking about those things…

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Understand membership offer structures
    2. Get insider help on how to keep your members engaged
    3. Have a structure to scale your time for more money with less work

    Resources Mentioned:

    Text CALL to 805-254-0880 to Receive a Free Business Priority Mapping Call


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 253: How To Launch Group Coaching – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for coaches and consultants who are ready to grow and increase sales.

    Summary:

    When it comes to the business of coaching or consulting, 1-1 services dominate the market, However, coaching people 1-1 takes a great deal of time and you’ll hit a financial and physical ceiling. This mistake often causes coaches to stay stuck in busy work and lifestyle cages and then many burn out completely. Instead, we’re diving into the business model of group coaching and how to shift your business from 1-1 to 1-group.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Hear how easy it is to go from 1-1 to 1-group
    2. Know why your 1-1 clients will like group coaching better
    3. Have the steps to move into group coaching services 

    Resources Mentioned:

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 65: Doing Things That Don’t Scale – with John Lee Dumas

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 252: How To Launch Your Coaching or Consulting Business – with April Beach


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 252: How To Launch Your Coaching or Consulting Business – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for individuals who want to launch a coaching or consulting business. 

    Summary:

    In this episode we break down the difference between coaching and consulting and determine which is the right business offering for your new company. We also dive into how to structure your services, packages and initial marketing plans. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Understand the difference between coaching and consulting
    2. Have clear steps to package your first coaching or consulting packages
    3. Have a good understanding of how to market yourself during initial launch

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 251: The Ultimate Guide To Launch Online Courses – with April Beach

    251 SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to level up and stop copying others. Listeners who tap into this show want to get the formula to choose the perfect online business offers, courses, masterminds or coaching programs that give them the life they want.

    Summary:

    This is the second episode in our series called  “The Ultimate Guide To Your Perfect Business Model; For Experts, Coaches and Consultants”. In these shows we unpack the process of intentional business design, offer engineering, and business architecture to build a business for high-profit, deep impact, lifestyle results. 
    In this show we break down the structure of online courses and how to use them to grow and scale your business. We talk about the history of online courses, why many today are failing, the types of online courses you may want to consider and how to use online courses the correct way to increase profit. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know the two primary ways online courses are delivered
    2. Know what audiences are currently buying online courses
    3. Know if online courses should be part of your business model architecture

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    Episode 250: The Ultimate Guide To Design Your Perfect Coaching Business – with April Beach

    Sweetlife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the FREE Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models and Virtual Services

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for entrepreneurs and companies who want to level up and stop copying others. Listeners who tap into this show want to get the formula to choose the perfect online business offers, courses, masterminds or coaching programs that give them the life they want.

    Summary:

    This episode kicks off a series called  “The Ultimate Guide To Your Perfect Business Model; For Experts, Coaches and Consultants”. In these shows we unpack the process of intentional business design, offer engineering, and business architecture to build a business for high-profit, deep impact, lifestyle results. 
     
    In this kick off to the series we discuss what business modeling is, who needs to go through this process and why this process is the fastest way to get the life and business you’re working hard for. You’ll also get April’s 7 Questions That Lead To Your Perfect Business Model and Offer Types. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Know how to use the power of business modeling to get what you want
    2. Access April’s 7 Questions That Lead To Your Perfect Business Model and Offer Types
    3. Understand where in your business you may need to make changes and alter your offer model

    Resources Mentioned:


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach Hi guys. I’m so excited to talk to you today. This is one of my favorite topics. Actually, we’re going to be moving into my favorite topic for the next couple of weeks on the show.

    We are kicking off a series here on this wheat life entrepreneur and business podcast that is all geared towards helping you make sure that you are designing your offers and your business structure and your business model correctly in a way that works for you. And this is such an important time to do it. It’s the end of the year. We’re about to roll over into 2022.

    And so I want to make sure that you’re fully equipped to see the business model, the offer structure and the business design. That’s going to equal that lifestyle and the profit that you want moving forward. And so the next couple of shows are totally dedicated to helping you tap into the ultimate guide, the ultimate database for you to design your perfect business model.

    And so that’s what we’re talking about. Kicking off today’s show. This is episode number 250 here on the podcast, and I’m April beach host of this show. Thank you so much for being a listener to us. We’re going to be rolling on five years of producing here and just a couple of months. And I just appreciate you guys so much. So first of all,

    I just wanted to tell you how much I appreciate all of your listenership over the last four and a half years. So this show sharing the show with your friends. We don’t have any advertising here intentionally on the sweet life podcast. I hate listening to podcasts and they’re like, hang on just a second. Let me share somebody. Else’s unrelated message so I can make more money.

    Totally drives me crazy. And so we intentionally have refused advertisers here on this show, and we will continue to do that because our goal is giving you business trainings and coaching that you can take to the bank. And we would really appreciate if you’d share this show with your friends and if you have never done so before, if you could just please leave us a review on apple podcasts or wherever you listen to podcasts,

    that would just really mean a lot to us. So thank you so much for tuning in I’m April beach. As I said here at the host of this show and founder of this wheat live company and everything we do as a company is working with entrepreneurs like you to design your business. Your suite of offers your customer journey, roadmap, your signature offers in your programs to deliver high profit deep impact lifestyle freedom.

    So if you would like to work with us to apply, to join our business growth programs, please cruise over to sweet life co.com. And I would love to personally meet with you. Okay. So back to today’s show here is what you can expect. Again, this is episode number 250, and there is a very important tool that goes along with this episode in the next couple of episodes,

    that tool is an 18 page, totally free 18 page ultimate guide to online business models. And so before we get started, you can grab that guide in two different, very easy ways. First of all, you can go to sweet life co.com, click on the podcast and go to this episode. It’s right there at number 250, and there will be a link for you to download the ultimate guide.

    Totally free to grab that. Or if you’re on the go, you can text the word guide, very simple, just lowercase the word guide, and you want to text it to this number. That number is 8 0 5 2 4 5 0 8 8 0. So just text the word guide to that number and I’ll send you a link so you can go download it there. Okay. There’s going to be an important tool moving forward because the ultimate guide summarizes all of the business models,

    the most common business models for coaches and consultants and experts in service-based businesses in the online space and why this is so important as I’m literally saving you 20 years of time by giving you this guide, I have ran a business model and every single one of these most common ways. And so I break down in this guide, the structure of that business model,

    everything from courses to masterminds, to live events, to membership communities, to group coaching programs, I break it all down for you, but then I also tell you exactly how it’s going to affect your life because it’s all fine and good and dandy, right? When we see it structurally on paper, but in the end of the day, I’m a lifestyle business designer and you went into entrepreneurship to change your life.

    So let’s make sure that the business model you’re choosing is in fact, going to equal that lifestyle that you want. So I literally drop in 20 years of online business experience to you in this one ultimate guide. So you can see the structure of the business model, and I’ll tell you exactly what it’s going to look like for your life here on the next couple of shows.

    We’re going to be really diving in more to specific business models and having a conversation about them in depth. So again, go grab that ultimate guide. It’s totally there for you and getting you not, it will save you decades of time. That’s why I created it. Okay. So in this episode, this is what you can expect. This is a great show for those of you guys who want to level up and stop copying what others are doing.

    Maybe you’ve joined a lot of programs. You have somebody said, oh, you should launch a course or, oh, you should host a membership community. And it’s not really worked out for you, or you have thought about doing those things, but you’re not exactly sure whether or not that’s going to be the right solution for your business. So when you tap into this show,

    you are going to get this formula specifically here on this one episode for how to choose a perfect online business offers courses and masterminds. And I actually give you my seven questions to ask yourself that lead to your perfect business model and offer types. So I’m going to tell you those seven questions to ask yourself as well, to get even more clarity. And I’m going to dive into some of the actual workshopping that we do inside the ultimate guide.

    So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive in together. Okay guys. So here we go. Episode number 250. This episode kicks off a series called the ultimate guide to your perfect business model for coaches, experts, and consultants. And these next couple of shows unpack the process of intentional business design, offer engineering and business architecture to build a business for high profit,

    deep impact lifestyle Results. And so let’s go ahead and kick off this series together and let’s start with just the basics. Okay. So the first question we’re going to talk about in answer is what is a business model? I was just speaking and teaching at a retreat in Costa Rica last week. And I was teaching on business model and business design. And I asked the women in the room,

    you know, who can explain to me what a business model is in. Nobody could answer that question. And so if you’re sitting here and you’re listening, you’re thinking, oh gosh, I don’t really know what a business model is. You’re not alone. All right. So let’s kind of start at the basics and it’s actually not, is overwhelming and complicated as it may seem.

    So the term business model refers to your plan for making a profit by the types of products and services that you sell. Also known as your business model is the way that you serve your clients and make money. So examples of common business models for coaches and consultants and service-based providers and experts are coaching one-on-one group coaching, online courses, membership communities, masterminds,

    retreats, live virtual events, and more, those are types of business models. So as we dive in, especially over the next couple of weeks, when I’m talking about, Hey, how to find your perfect business model, what I’m really saying is, should you relaunch a course? Should you launch a membership community? Should you have a mastermind? Should you be doing live virtual events?

    Should you have a retreat? Those are all the questions that I would love for you to have more information to answer for yourself. And that’s why we’re doing this series. So if that sounds good, let’s keep going. So the next topic that I want to talk about regarding business modeling is the power and the importance and the depth of how your business model affects your life.

    And if you know me, this is not a surprise. If you don’t know me, let me make it really, really clear. I am a life first business designer. That means that for my own companies and for people that I work with, the very, very most important thing is like saying, Hey, listen, this is all great to make money,

    but money doesn’t necessarily buy happiness. So let’s make sure the business we’re engineering is in fact and give you that lifestyle that you want. And that’s my superpower. That’s my area of expertise. I want you to know that your business model is a primary driver to the life you want to have, but the reality is you guys, very few entrepreneurs are actually aware of that.

    They just think I’m going to be happy. When I, when I launch a course and sell a thousand seats, or I’m going to be happy when I have a successful mentorship program, that’s not it at all. The way to happiness is business model design. And then we reverse engineer it into high sales, but it really starts with picking the right business model.

    If you do not have the right business model for your life, you are not going to find that happiness that you hoped to find in entrepreneurship. And this is for you if you’re brand new in business, but I’ll be honest. The majority of clients I work with have been in business for years and years, and they’re ready to scale their business. And they really want to intentionally make sure the programs they’re building in the future are done really well and mindfully,

    and are going to give them the results they want. So whether you’re new or you’ve been doing this for 10 years, this is something that I want to make sure that you’re aware of the power and the importance of this. You’re a business model directs the cadence of your year, your quarter, your month, your week and your day. So your business model is going to determine how you flow through your year and your quarter and your week and your day and your months and your time and all the things it drives,

    what you do, who you do it for and how you do it. And so let’s make sure you really, really love those things. And then it also drives your time and your schedule and the expectations that others have of you. Those are all the things that your business model does. And so it’s incredibly important that we’re picking the right one for you.

    So designing that perfect business model is our super power. And that’s why I’m going to geek out on this over the next couple of weeks, because it’s pretty much the primary gem and Juul that we start working with clients on when they come into our business growth and mentorship programs. And so I want to make sure that you are tapping into this as well.

    Okay. And then the next question that we need to answer is what business models are available to you? The most common business models for coaches, consultants, mentors, experts, especially over the last 17 years are online and virtual coaching and consulting, whether that’s one-on-one or one on group, we also have online courses and those courses are either evergreen, which means they’re available at any point in time,

    they’re prerecorded, or they can be taught live. We also have memberships and communities masterminds, low ticket item grabs that business model we’re going to dive into. And I’m really excited to unpack that business model, where everything is just like a, a smaller mini offer and a mini price. And then of course are also wide virtual events and in-person retreats or in-person events,

    product based business models, which we are not just so, you know, really clear up front. We are not diving into product based business models because this podcast is strictly designed for service-based entrepreneurs, coaches, consultants, and experts. But we are going to be talking a little bit about products within the business models. And so those are the most common online business models and they are constantly evolving and as they evolve,

    one of the things that’s happened over the last couple of years is the business models. We’re now designing with our clients are hybrid offers starting in around 2016, we started designing what’s called hybrid models. So it’s a combination of some of these primary models that we talked about. We’re also going to be talking about hybrid offers and really how to engineer the perfect hybrid offer here on the show in the series as well.

    So those, those are the business models that are most common. Now, there are so many cool outside of the box, things that are happening. And as things like virtual reality come into play in different technologies. These are going to continue to grow, but here in the show, we’re going to start with the core business models for online coaches, consultants,

    and service-based providers. So you can consider those and how they would scale with your business. And so the next question is really to ask yourself, what’s happening right now in your space, you are an expert in your field or you’re becoming an expert in your field. And so what is available? What are people commonly buying or what are, how are the ways services are being delivered in your field right now?

    And so, first of all, I want you just to take a second and do like a mental inventory of how other people are buying your type of services currently in your area of expertise and whether or not they have, or maybe they don’t have a type of business model that you might want to create for yourself, just because it doesn’t exist doesn’t mean that you can’t create it.

    So I want to encourage you in that. So what business models are available to you truly depends on first of all, the content that you’re delivering. So your content is going to dictate your business model, that’s rule number one. And that’s also the number one mistake of not doing that, that coaches and consultants make is not letting the content drive the model,

    what you’re doing, what you’re teaching is going to dictate the best way to deliver that to people. So the formula, and this is the formula I teach, and it’s so fun to teach it. The formula is connecting the way you want your lifestyle to function and your area of expertise in your content. And that’s going to give us your perfect business model.

    And so let’s go ahead and move forward a little bit. How is it then that we take this business model and really start designing it for you? So your business model can be one for one product or service that you offer. And you can have a suite of offers in your business. So collection of services and programs in your business, and each of them can have totally different business model.

    You don’t have to just have one. So we’re talking about business modeling and we’re relating this to one program or one offer one signature offer, which I love to teach on. As you guys know signature offers and signature programs, or you can have one business model for all of your offers. And if your offers or your coaching programs take people through a long-term journey of progression in working with you,

    you can have one business model. That’s actually broken up into different phases of growth that people would continue to grow with you. That’s how our programs work. And that’s some of the ways that we’ve been engineering our programs for and with our clients. And it’s really powerful because when we’re doing that, we’re creating a longterm roadmap and a client journey that keeps clients with you for years and years and years.

    So we have a ton of clients that have worked with us for over 10 years. The reason why is because we’re constantly developing the different step to keep them growing more and more and more, and you can have one business model that is all of the steps in a longterm journey. Or we can just talk about one business model for one offer of yours.

    So I want to make sure I’m sharing that distinction for you. If you’re thinking, wow, is this business model just for one program or one coaching program or one offer, or is it for everything you choose? It can be either or so here’s some questions. And I want you to break down these questions and I want you to think about them.

    And this is how we’re going to end this week’s episode, just processing these, these questions are also put in a worksheet for you in the ultimate guide to business models. So make sure you download that, but I’m going to share them with you so your brain can start processing them right now, as we wrap up this week show. So I want you to answer these questions as if it were five years from now.

    If you can’t figure out five years from now, go to three. If you can’t figure out three years from now, I want you to go to the next 18 months. Okay. But start out as far as you can. And I want you to imagine yourself there. If you’re building a business with intention for time, freedom, geographic, freedom,

    and freedom to scale your services in a way that’s really going to make you happy. These are important questions to ask yourself, question number one. How many hours per week do I like to work? So again, try to focus five years from now, maybe three, you have to come in close enough and you can do 18 months. How many hours per week do you really like to work?

    How many do you want to be working in the future? How do you really love to serve your clients? So I want you to ask yourself, how do I really love to serve my clients? Do you like meeting with them? One-on-one do you like coaching in groups? What really fires you? How do others love working with me? So do you have a team working with you in the future or is it only a solo gig?

    That’s question number three, question number four. Do you move and travel or do you stay in one place again? This is in the future question. Number five. Do you work at home or do you work in an office? What does that really look like to you? What’s the number six. What are you really good at? We had ask yourself,

    what am I really, really good at? And what content are you delivering in your signature program? Or you’re going to drop her. And then of course you need to ask yourself, what does my perfect client actually really need from me? So how did they need me to work with them? How do they need me to show up for them? And those are seven key questions of starting the process of business model design.

    And there is an eighth question in there that is the most, most important question of all. And that question is in the worksheet for you. So make sure you go ahead and download that. Now, like I talked about over the next couple of weeks, we’re going to be diving into this entire series, all about business modeling, all about business architecture and design.

    I love this. We have done a ton of shows on this over the last five years, because this is my area of expertise, but I’m super excited to do them in a series for you. So you can go through and follow with me and process them as we go. And each episode is going to focus on one business model type, and I’m going to give you the pros and the cons of that business model type.

    And I’m going to tell you the lifestyle Results of that particular business model and whether it help you figure out whether or not you’re you would love that. So my goal is to save you literally at least five years of time, launching the wrong kind of offer in this show. And you’re going to be able to go through and choose which one’s going to be right for you.

    So you can stop copying what others are doing and truly design a business. That’s going to give you the profit and the life that you want. And the reality is this, though, your business is totally going to change just as you change. So by fully considering your longterm business model, revisiting it and revising it as needed for your life and as your life changes and taking control of the circumstances by pre-planning and building services that can scale.

    You’ll always have a business it’s built around your life, not your life around your business. And of course, because you know me, I’m always on a plane. I love to travel. If you’re like me, or if you want to be like me, if you’re building a business, when the, with the intention of time, freedom, geographic,

    freedom, and freedom to scale your services in a way that makes you happy, then these are the episodes to make sure you’re tuning into. And frankly, that’s what our business growth programs are designed for. So if you love to work with us, then you are more than welcome to apply. You can cruise over to sweet life co.com and you can check out our wave makers program,

    our, your signature offer masterclass and our business launch programs as well. We would love to hear from you and connect with you and really work through the process as to whether or not working with us is the right fit. And of course you have these podcast episodes to eat up and take to the bank. Thank you so much for tuning in with us this week.

    This is Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 250, and all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and simply click on podcast. And that is also where you can download the ultimate guide to business models. And last thing again, you want to get it by text, just simply text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Okay. That’s it for today?

    Have an awesome week. And I will talk to you soon.

    Episode 242: Should Live Virtual Events Be Part Of Your Offer? – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Grab the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models 

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for coaches, consultants and service based experts who want to grow their leads and increase their sales with pre-qualified buyers. 

    Summary:

    In this show we unpack the online business model of “live virtual events” and help you determine if they should be part of your business strategy moving forward. 
     
    Live Virtual Events are not new. In fact, we’ve been hosting them for years. They’re an upgrade from sales webinars and could be a good option to increase sales in your business. But, like all business models, Live Virtual Events aren’t for everyone. In this episode we dive into the model of Live Virtual Events and how offering them can impact your business and lifestyle both positively and negatively. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Understand the structure of a Live Virtual Event
    2. Compare Virtual Events to Sales Webinars 
    3. Know the most common way to fill your Virtual Event
    4. Have complete clarity as to if Live Virtual Events are the right strategy for you

    Resources Mentioned:

     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach I, you guys, and welcome back to the show. We have a little bit of housekeeping to do before, before we dive into tonight’s episode. And so let’s go ahead and talk about that first,

    For those of you who are faithful, sweet life podcast listeners, thank you so much. You may have noticed that the previous episode, 241, which dropped on August the 23rd, 2021 was removed. And I want to talk about that. I’m always honest with you guys. And I want to just cut right to the chase. Our guest, who is an amazing human was asked by a former business partner to remove the episode out of respect for our guests.

    We removed it, but in almost five years of podcasting, we have never removed an episode or we have never not produced an episode. So first and foremost, I want to apologize to you. This was an amazing episode. It was so good. I want to tell you this, that if you would like to have a recording of this episode, you can get a recording of it by emailing podcast@sweetlifeco.com.

    It was an incredible episode, and I will release a recording to you. As long as you send the request to podcast@sweetlifeco.com. So there was a previous episode that was titled how to build a million dollar business with live virtual events. It is incredible. And if you still want a copy of that, I will release it to you. However, we did pull it off of iTunes,

    out of respect for our guests and frankly, a very, just messy situation that I’m not going to take our time to talk about what I will say, learning moment here. This is exactly why I don’t like partnerships. You guys is because shit like this happens. So that’s all I’m going to say about it, but I want to thank you for being a listener to this show.

    Again, happy to give you a copy of that episode. If you missed it, as long as you email it, the request for episode number 2, 4, 1. Now what’s happened because we had to remove the episode is that our numbers got a little messed up. So last week’s episode, you’ll hear me referring to the show notes as going to episode number 242,

    but our numbers kind of squished back one. So this episode that we’re going to talk about here, and yes, I’m talking about live virtual events. It’s a really hot topic we’ve been talking about for almost a year. This episode is officially numbered, 242, but there’s a little bit of some confusion in there because last week’s episode was supposed to be 2 42.

    I hope that makes sense to you. You can find all of the show notes for all of the episodes by going to sweet life co.com. Even the show notes for the previously removed episode. And there you have it. So let’s go ahead and dive into what we are going to talk about today. So we’re going to talk about today is answering the question should live virtual events,

    be part of your offer. And we’re going to be talking a lot more about live virtual events here on the podcast. We’re going to continue to talk about it and clubhouse with live event, amazing leaders like Barry and blue with Sage and all these great entrepreneurial leaders who are hosting live virtual events. And so we’re going to continue to talk about this here on the show.

    So this is definitely not the end of the story. This is the beginning of a, I don’t want to say a launch, an awareness of an amazing way to warm up your audience and pre-qualified buyers, and to increase your sales. So on today’s show, this is for all of you who are ready to scale your business online, and you’re considering maybe webinars in the past.

    We’re going to talk about the status of webinars in this show. And we’re going to talk a little bit about how live virtual events compare to webinars as well. So it’s a great show for those of you guys who are coaches and consultants, who are all of our listeners, are your service-based expert who want to grow your leads and increase your sales with pre qualified buyers.

    In this show, we unpack the online business model of live virtual events and help you determine if they should be part of your strategy moving forward. So here’s the deal live. Virtual events are not new. In fact, we’ve been doing them for years. They’re an upgrade from the previous old-school sales webinars, and they can be a good option for your business,

    but like all business models, they’re totally going to affect your lifestyle and your time. And you know that I geek out on those things for you. There’s nothing worth building. If it’s not going to give you the lifestyle and the time and the profit freedom that you want. And so we’re going to dive into those discussions on two day ship. At the end of this episode,

    you will understand the structure of live virtual events. You will compare live virtual events to sales webinars, and know really which one, if either could be a good fit for you. You’re going to know the most common way to fill your live virtual event. So how do we get people in there? And you’re going to have complete clarity as to whether or not this business,

    this business model is for you. So again, all this show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com and just click on over there. And this will be the most, most current podcast available if you’re listening to this real time. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show So the first question we have to talk about when we’re talking about live virtual events is to answer the question are webinars dead.

    If you are in business and you are selling to other entrepreneurs, webinars have been not converting well for about two years. Let me give you some history on this. We first started selling our courses and programs through webinars back in 2008. I mean, that’s like ancient times. That’s like the dark ages of online business. Okay. So webinars and sales conversion,

    Weber’s about it had been around for a really long time. So if you are selling to other entrepreneurs who are used to being in webinars all the time, you’re going to have a hard time filling your webinars and converting from your webinars. And so inter live virtual events. Now, if you have a business that doesn’t sell to establish entrepreneurs that are new to webinars,

    webinars can work great for you. So we don’t want to totally throw the webinar baby out with the bath water, but I just want to address kind of the elephant in the room and like, Hey, what’s really happening to sales webinars. And so those are just some of the trends that we have seen. So let’s just take a moment of silence of gratitude for the sales webinars of old that have made many of us thousands and thousands and thousands of dollars.

    Okay. Moment of silence over at times are changing. And here’s the deal. When is the last time that you like raise your hand to be in somebody’s webinar funnel, right? And you’re saying, Hey, you know, please let me sign up for your webinars. So I know you’re going to sell to me. And the last 10 minutes, none of us want that over the last couple years,

    we have bond back, which I know when you’re thinking automation and, you know, press and go businesses where you do not want to be present webinars on demand. Evergreen webinars are great, but we’ve been moving back from so much on demand because people, especially in the last year and a half want curated experiences, they want personal attention. They want to know that you know their name or that,

    you know, what they look like or that, you know, their story or, you know, people frankly just really like to talk and they like to share what’s going on with them. And so they can’t do that in a webinar setting. But when we curate an atmosphere where people can share where they can talk, where they can share a little bit about why they’re there and what their story is,

    all of a sudden we have created an environment where they feel like they belong and that environment can be done in your live virtual event. And it’s magical. So let’s kind of talk about live virtual event structures. The first thing you need to about a leverage event is pretty much just like a webinar format, but instead of using a system like zoom webinar,

    where it’s just you up there on the big jumbo screen talking, some of the best live virtual events are where, you know, we can see all your others, attendees faces. So we can use zoom meeting and different software for that as well. Live virtual events are most commonly held in 1, 2, 3 or five day settings. Now these are live events, okay?

    These are not prerecorded. These are live events where you get to show up and you bring all your energy and you interact with people and they offer powerful strategies in a workshop setting. It’s like a duet with you setting. That’s what you do when you offer live virtual event. And what’s so cool about them is you can bring in your expert content that perfectly tees up your high end offer,

    which you sell at the end, kind of to the middle, to the end of your live virtual event. And because you’re weaving in these emotional journeys and these emotional connections for your attendees throughout your live virtual event, by virtual events, commonly have breakout rooms. People commonly get personal attention, and there’s a lot of implementation that happens within that, the event itself.

    So whether or not people actually choose to join your high ticket offer, I fill up virtual events, really give them an amazing transformation. And if you’ve been listening to me in any of my shows for the last four years, you know that I am an engineer of transformational offers. And so anything we do, I believe we need to deliver a transformation and live virtual events are one of the best ways to do this.

    Now let me peel back the curtain a little bit more for you. Like I said, we’ve been doing leverage events for years, but the king and queen of live virtual events and how to use live virtual events are Berry and blue with Sage. Let me tell you a little bit about them and I’m going to make sure that you have their information to connect with them further here in our show notes.

    So at first connected with barium blue and clubhouse, and they delivered some amazing masterclasses, totally free to hundreds of people throughout late 2020 at the beginning of 2021, when we first all got on clubhouse. And since then I’ve co moderated multiple rooms with blue. And so a lot of the strategies that we use, we have learned from them. This is very important to know like who is the king and queen and the live virtual event space.

    Currently. I know there are a lot of other people that are doing it really well. And my friend Eileen Wilder does live virtual events well. And so I just want to make sure that you’re getting all the resources and that you get to tap into and learn from the same amazing leaders that we have been. So we hosting live virtual events for years before this,

    in this same setting, but my IQ and how we do our live events is, has really changed. And we’ve been able to curate even better experiences because of these leaders. So I always want to give credit where credit’s due. And so I’ll make sure that you have their resources to some of these amazing leaders in our show notes. So let’s go ahead and we’re going to dive into three different areas of live virtual events.

    Now that we’ve talked about the structure of what it is as a business model, before we move on, if you have not yet grab my ultimate guide to online business models and offers, I just updated it to include the details of live virtual events. It’s totally free. It’s 18 pages of the ins and outs of all the different offers and business models that you can deliver in your business.

    And I tell you exactly how they will affect your time in your life and your profit. You can pause this podcast episode in just text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Or you can very simply go to the show notes@sweetlifeco.com and I’ll make sure that that is in there for you as well. Okay. We’re going to talk about live virtual event pros.

    We’re going to talk about live virtual event, mid considerations, and we’re going to talk about live virtual events, lifestyle considerations, because at the end of this episode, I want you to be able to answer the question, which is the title of the episode should live virtual events, be part of your offer. And this is how I’m going to help you do that.

    So let’s, first of all, talk about the pros of live virtual events, live virtual events, deliver an amazing customer experience. They build deep relationships with your leads and they build trust faster. Now, one of the things you need to know is live virtual events are not offered free. You sell tickets to your library to event or a library to event ticket.

    Currently at the recording of this, we commonly host a live virtual event is $77. So it’s not a ton of money. It’s just a little bit of change. But the thing is, is it helps people know that, Hey, you know what, I’m going to show up because I paid for this and I’m expecting to get value. So at the recording of this,

    the most common price for live virtual events that are used as conversion tools into higher ticket offers are anywhere from $47 to $97. We picked 77 right in the middle, just so you know. So they’re super fun and high energy. I mean, it feels so good to interact with people and get them results in people really feel like they belong. Live virtual events are answering the need of isolation for a lot of people over the last year and a half.

    And they’re different from Sydney to the zoom. They’re just not sitting there in a zoom, you know, having a chat, having a boring chat engineered, just like in person events, live virtual events are engineered and laid out just like we’re there in a room together having this amazing interaction at time live local event, but we’re engineering them to be hosted virtual.

    And they’re very, very special and very powerful when you do them, right? And they establish you as an expert and the solution holder for what people need. And they do that in a really fast way. And so therefore live virtual events pre-qualify and they disqualify your perfect buyers. So those are some of the pros of live virtual events. And I want to make sure we just head out the gate with those,

    you know, live virtual events for us, again, pulling back the curtain for you in order to host our library to events, we lay out our 12 month calendar of when we’re going to host our live virtual events multiple times a year, and they lead into our signature offer and program. And so it’s really powerful and people love it. And we even have huge faithful fans that chose not to purchase our signature higher ticket program because they got amazing results in our live virtual events.

    And they are lifetime fans. They love us because our engineer or the way we engineered our event was so powerful for them. So that’s great. Again, there are some of the pros of live virtual events. Now let’s talk about some of the mid consideration. So these are kind of like lukewarm, not hot, not cold. I just want to make sure you’re aware of these.

    If you’re thinking about doing live virtual events, they are alive. They are not pre recorded, live means live. So you have to show up in. So does that align with your personality? Does it align with your schedule? Is that something that you feel like doing? Are you like somebody with high energy energy that loves to interact with people or does that not really align with,

    with your personality as a leader? So those are some of the things yeah. You really need to consider when you’re considering this type of business model. Are you good live, are you good on the fly? Can you stand up in front of anybody in teachers zone of genius and how easy is it for you to flow in that? Even though obviously your content is planned,

    you’re still alive. It’s like you’re speaking for an extended period of time. And so you need to be comfortable with that. And the other mid consideration before you just go and start launching a live virtual event, is that the architecture of the rest of your funnel. So your marketing in your ads, your lead magnet, and then after your live virtual event,

    your call to action into your higher ticket offer has to be nailed. You don’t want to host a live virtual event all by itself until all of the, of the rooms in that house are built. Okay. So it’s, it’s something important I want to mention, because I don’t want you to leave in this show and being like, oh yeah, I’m going to get a live virtual event on the calendar.

    We want to reverse engineer your success. If you’re one of my clients and you’re listening to this, you hear me say this all the time. First, we have to know what you’re selling, right? What is that signature program and an offer. And then we can go a little bit closer in, so, okay, what’s a conversion tool in this case,

    we’re talking about live virtual events, and then we can go a little bit closer. We can say, okay, what’s that lead back that that’s going to lead into that leverage hold events, lead magnets can be challenges that can be quick little videos. They can be downloads. They could be quizzes or assessments. There’s a variety of lead magnets that people use to feed into leverage events.

    The most common lead magnet that everybody is using is a challenge. Just so you know, everybody is using that right now. And it’s working really well. We use that ourselves. Okay. And then you reverse engineer that little bit closer, and what’s your marketing strategy. What’s your ad spend and how are you, how are you filling your live event?

    So those are some mid-level considerations that I want you to think about. You know, first we talked about the pros, like the high highs, and now we’re like, okay, let’s come down to earth a little bit here. What actually has to happen in order for you to pull this off and nail it. Okay. Want to make sure that I’m uncovering all of that for you,

    and you need to have a consistent flow of new leads to run this model more frequently. So if you want to run a live virtual event every single month, you need to make sure that you have an adequate ad spend or another source to generate leads, new leads into your business to continue to continue to fill your live virtual event every single month. Okay.

    Now let’s talk about how this is going to affect your life. And again, this is my favorite thing to talk about because, well, you know, I just came back from taking like all summer off, going around and adventuring and traveling with my kids and, and moving my oldest son back to college and all the things that we do or all of the things we want to do.

    Right? And so every time we consider a business model, we first want to consider what is this going to do to your life and your time? And so when we’re talking about live virtual events, it is definitely going to affect your lifestyle and your travel and your family time. And there are some ways around that. As an example, I host zero live virtual events in the summertime because I’m Mia,

    right? And you can do that too, but just know that if this is going to be part of your flow, it is going to affect your family time positively or negatively. This could work great for you. Number two, plan your live virtual event, calendar 12 months in advance. You can always then plan your travel, your adventure, your other business operations,

    your passion projects, your philanthropy, whatever it is you do, right? So you want to take a 12 month calendar and you want to plot when you are selling or opening your signature program. And then prior to that is when you want to host your live virtual events. So how often are you selling or opening your signature program? Is it available all the time?

    Those are some of the things that you want to consider. Number three, many live virtual events that do well are held on the weekends Friday, Saturday, Sundays. How does that work for you? I work on weekends quite often during the months of the year that I work and I love it. My brain works really great. And then some weekends,

    I don’t feel like working at all and I totally check out, you know, what does that look like for you? Are you okay with having a business model where the people that are going to attend really need to be there on a Friday, maybe even a Friday night and Saturday and a Sunday. How does that work with you and for your life?

    Number four live virtual events that are currently performing well are done in one, two and three day segments. We have shorter live virtual events that do well. So our current live virtual event is a half of a day. It’s awesome. We’re in and out. You’ll love it. Other friends of ours host live virtual events that are for five days. It really depends on what your signature program is and what you’re selling and what content or what transformation needs to happen in that live virtual event.

    If you’re talking to Barry in blue with Sage, they love three-day live virtual bats, but just know for you. Are you cool with doing leverage events that could be three days straight or five days straight? What does that look like to you? Number five, really think about scheduling these on repeat for your lifestyle considerations. These do need to be on repeat.

    So some of our clients, and we have a lot of clients right now that we’re coaching and working with them to design and build their live virtual event. Some of our clients are doing them every six weeks hosting their live virtual event. Every six weeks, some of them are doing them quarterly. So what does that look like for you? Do you want to host a live virtual event every month or every quarter or every trimester,

    whatever that works, whatever that looks like for you, just make sure that you are looking at that 12 month calendar. Like we talked about before and scheduling them on repeat, do you have to do this? No. I’m just teaching you and sharing with you, how we scale businesses for higher profit, right? You can host one live virtual event and it can be just one little Allah cart event and it’s great and you’re done,

    but that becomes more like a signature offer program that changes your live virtual event from being a conversion tool into your signature offer or program. If that makes sense. And then the last thing, just being really honest, what does that really look like? As far as your energy and your personality, are you like the super high energy person and you love engaging with others or you,

    somebody that is like, wow, you know what? I just don’t know if I can be at that higher energy for that period of time. Now let’s dive into that being very real. First of all, your live virtual event is going to be yours. It does not mean you have to have dance parties. Can I just say for the record?

    I hope I don’t hurt anybody’s feelings. I can’t stand the dance parties. If you get me on your live virtual event and have me dance, I am not liking you very much. It’s just not who I am. So what I’m seeing is you do you in our live virtual events, I will never make you dance, but I do like have you get up and have you get a drink and have you get a snack.

    And we do put on music. We do a lot of music, but I’m not going to make you dance on zoom. And I’m a dance mom. Okay. So you do you, your leverage events don’t have to be like super high energy.<inaudible> I’m not like that. You don’t have to be like that. And you can still have an amazing event.

    You can have a three-day meditation prayer event. I don’t care what it is, but just make sure that whatever event you are curating, that it aligns with your energy and that you want to do it. Because if you’re building something that you don’t really want to do, number one, you’re going to suck at it. And number two, your sales are going to suffer.

    And that is a fact, okay. Keeping it real here on the show. Okay. So let’s recap today. We talked about should live live virtual events, be part of your offer. We talked about what they are, the structure of live virtual events, the pros and cons of library, virtual event, and some mid tier business model considerations. We talked about the current format of the funnels that are being built into live virtual events.

    We talked about, who’s doing them. We talked about how we do them. And we uncovered, you know, and pulled back the curtains about our live virtual events. And we also covered whether or not you should be selling with webinars. We actually covered a lot of ground in this episode, and I’m meant for this to be more of a foundational episode about live virtual events,

    but we’re going to be talking about them a lot more. We teach our clients in our wave makers program about live virtual events and we help people engineer live virtual events. If you want to work with us to learn how to engineer and layout your live virtual events, you can find us@sweetlifecoat.com and apply to work with us at any time. We would love to meet you.

    And if you just want to take this information and run with it, awesome, please do it. Take a screenshot of this episode. Let me know if you’re thinking about doing live virtual events, I would love to follow you on Instagram and cheer you on. You can find me at April beach life. All right, you guys. And again, all of the show notes for this can be found@sweetlifeco.com

    to recap. This is technically going to be number two for two, but last week’s episode was also talked about being number 2 42. And that was only because we had to take down the episode the week before that lots of drama. I hate drama. Okay. So we’re cleaning this up for you and moving forward next week, moving into fall. So excited for fall here to be here on the Northern hemisphere.

    And then for those of our friends, and we have so many of you guys that listen that are down and under, first of all, praying for you guys that you’re all well and thinking about you guys, and hopefully as the seasons change for you down there, that circumstances will change for you as well. Okay. You guys have an awesome week and I appreciate your listenership and I appreciate your subscribing and I appreciate Your sharing this episode,

    and I will talk to you. Bye for now.

    Episode 241: How To Make Money While Having Fun – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download the free Ultimate Guide to Online Business Models, Offers, and Lifestyles

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    As a lifelong entrepreneur, I can’t imagine a life where someone else directed my time, energy, location and schedule. So this episode like all others, is geared for people like me. The dreamers and doers. 

    Summary:

    Money doesn’t buy happiness. Yes, it definitely takes the edge off… but when it comes to being truly happy and fulfilled, most people consider time, family, health, love, giving, helping, and adventuring as the real prize of life. 
     
    In this show, I’m breaking down the two-punch formula for a profitable business that makes you really REALLY happy. 
     
    This episode is dedicated to my oldest son, who asked me this exact question over breakfast. He’s grown up in our lifestyle entrepreneur family and was the special guest in episode #84 “Inside The Life Of An Entrepreneur’s Kid”.  But now, two years later as a college student, he’s determining how he wants to design his life, and this question is at the forefront of his mind. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. What is a lifestyle entrepreneur? 
    2. How to engineer your offers so people always buy
    3. How to know if an open and close cart is really for you

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

    You’re listening to the life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, April Beach, Come back to the show. I’m April beach. And today we are talking about how to make it money while still having fun. Now, I know that sounds like a Super cheesy title, and you might think that we’re not going to talk about anything very serious here,

    but that is definitely not the case in this show. I am breaking down the strategies to actually make this happen. So let me go ahead and set the stage for what we’re going to talk about today. First of all, this is episode number 242. So if you’re a new listener, all the things that we talk about, all the links that I share,

    oftentimes we give away these huge free resources with episodes can be found by going to sweet life co.com clicking on podcast. And you can just search by episode number 2 42. So if you’re on the go, don’t worry about missing any of this because we will have it waiting there for you in the show notes at our website. This episode is great for those of you in any stage of business.

    So our company, the Sweetlife company, we consult entrepreneurs who are launching, scaling and amplifying a coaching consulting or service focused business. And usually I’d like to break up the episodes because we give you step-by-step business strategies that other coaches charge thousands for here on the show, totally free, but not every business strategy is great for every business, right? So where you are in your business tells us what strategies you need to be using to get to the next level.

    And so oftentimes I break up these episodes saying, okay, if you’re in this phase of business, listened to this show, or if you’re in this second phase and listen, honestly, this show is great for everybody. So regardless of where you are in our business growth system phase, this show is going to be really good for you because there are a lot of people that are making a lot of money that are not happy at all.

    And we talk about that on the show today. So your bonus resource, which is really powerful, which you can just pause and grab right now is the ultimate guide to online business models. Okay? So this means online offers. We have a massive ultimate guide that you can grab just by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash ultimate business guide. Okay? So that’s available for you now,

    again, anybody in any phase of business, this show’s going to be a great one for you as a lifestyle entrepreneurial lifelong entrepreneur. I seriously cannot imagine a life where somebody else has directed my time and my energy and my location, my schedule. So this episode, like all others were talking about how to make money while being happy, but it’s just for entrepreneurs.

    You’re not going to catch a drift for me here on the show about how to do this by working for corporate America. So the summary of what we’re talking about is the fact that money doesn’t buy happiness definitely takes the edge off. I hear you for sure, but when it comes to being truly happy and fulfilled, most people will consider time. Family health love giving,

    helping others, adventuring and traveling as the real prize of life. And so in this show, I’m breaking down a two punch formula for a profitable business that makes you really, really happy. And here’s a really quick behind the scenes. Okay? This show is dedicated to my son, Tim, and he’s actually been a guest here on the sweet life entrepreneur podcast.

    Before years ago, I interviewed my son, Tim beach on episode number 84. You can go back and listen to it about what it’s like growing up in a lifestyle, entrepreneur and family. But this morning we’re literally packing his car right now to take him back to college. I’m about to, I’m literally recording this episode. So funny share with you guys like ultimate beside the seeds.

    I’m recording this show because I didn’t get a chance to batch because we’ve been out having so much fun this week, I’m recording the show, sending it to my amazing producer. And I’m getting in the car with him and driving him all the way from Colorado to Delaware to go back to college. And so we’re sitting here and I’m thinking to myself today,

    man, I really need to record this great show. And I have this other show totally lined up that I was going to record for you guys today. And he asked me the question, which is the title of this show. And so this show is dedicated to him. He said, how do I make money while still being happy, mom? And I was like,

    yeah, it’s such a great question. And I will teach you. I’ll teach you how to do it. Just like I’m going to teach you guys here on this episode. So anyway, this show is dedicated to Tim. And by the time you listened to this, I will be somewhere in a car halfway across the country or on my way home from dropping him off.

    So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show today. We’re going to talk about what is a lifestyle entrepreneur, how to engineer your offer so that people always buy them and how to know if an opening close cart is right for your lifestyle and your business. Ooh, that was a long intro. Thanks for hanging. All right, let’s go ahead and do it.

    So, first of all, how to make money while having fun. All right. So to answer that question, it’s also asking the question, how to become a lifestyle entrepreneur. All right. So how to make money while having fun, AKA, how to be a lifestyle entrepreneur. So, first of all, we need to dive into the definition of a lifestyle entrepreneur.

    If you go right now on Instagram and you search the hashtag lifestyle entrepreneur, you are going to see like Ferrari’s and like half naked girls on the beach, all the things. I’m not sure where we went wrong, but expensive cars and huge mansions do not me, lifestyle entrepreneurship. So somebody hacked that hashtag, but I’m telling you, I grew up in a true lifestyle,

    entrepreneur family. I have a true lifestyle, entrepreneur family, and it’s not driven primarily by money. So what is a lifestyle entrepreneur, a lifestyle entrepreneur designs, their business in such a way that it enables the lifestyle they want to live true. Lifestyle entrepreneurs are not driven by profit. They’re driven by the ability to have the freedom lifestyle that they want.

    Oftentimes this freedom lifestyle is centered around action, adventure, sports traveling, and a flexible schedule. And while some lifestyle entrepreneurs have a primary business location, other lifestyle entrepreneurs want to be location independent. So it has to do with what you’re doing with your time. There are ways to make money working for other people, working for corporate America, but a true lifestyle.

    Entrepreneur is one where no one else is directing your energy, your location, your schedule. And so this lifestyle entrepreneurship is how we engineer your business to actually give you the lifestyle that you love. And so to answer this question, I am breaking this episode into two parts within this one show here where it’s just two punch right here. Okay. So first of all,

    we’re going to take on the question, how to make money, and then we’re going to dive into the question about having fun. Okay. So first of all, let’s talk about how to make money. So how you make money as an entrepreneur is by designing and delivering a highly valuable offer. Okay. So I’m an offer architect. I know that sounds so geeky,

    but it really all starts with your offer. You guys, right? All the marketing in the world cannot save you if you have a shitty offer and you’re not good at giving people amazing results. All right. So number one is designing this highly valuable offer and here are some steps to do that. First of all, you need to solve a big problem.

    So my, one of my amazing clients, I love her so much. Her name is Lauren lavender. She says it is a painkiller, Lauren lavender calls the solution to somebody’s problem, the painkiller like the medicine. And so I love that analogy and it just helps a lot of people see it clearer. And so I love to share that that’s what Lauren calls it.

    So solving a big problem. And this goes with identifying your ideal client’s struggles as it relates to your area of expertise. So really pinpointing this. And if you were new in business and you’re listening to this episode, this is also what we call your M P your minimum buyable product, okay. Or program, because we’re not, you know, making physical products here.

    In most cases, most of our listeners don’t do that. So this is the first solution that you need people to understand that you deliver and that they’re willing to pay for. So how to design a highly valuable offer, you have to solve a highly important problem, or you can fulfill a highly desirable solution. Okay. Number two, design, a winning customer experience.

    This is huge you guys. And especially as we’re seeing the evolution and the change in online business offers the growth in the coaching and the consulting industry over the last couple of decades, it’s really important that your offer is able to be personalized, that you have the ability to enable some sort of customization. That’s how we design highly valuable offers. It is not by doing it with cookie cutter solutions,

    unless your business model is to serve the masses. Some of the ways I know you’re probably thinking April, you know, highly customized offers. It’s really hard to scale. It’s actually not. When you break down your method and your framework, then you put it into a winning customer experience where that your customers, it’s kind of like those choose your own adventure books that,

    that many of us used to read as kids, your customers can pick their path and enabling things like artificial intelligence and bringing in like CX focused team members. For those of you guys that are scaling your business and allowing them to customize their journey through your signature program is how we design a winning customer experience. Even if you have 500 people in your program at once,

    we can still customize it. And I just challenge you right now, just if you have an existing offer to take a look at that and make sure that you are delivering that personalized, custom winning experience for your clients as much as possible within your content. The next step to designing a highly valuable offer is to determine your position on scarcity versus availability, right?

    So let me say that again, determine your personal viewpoint, your decision on scarcity versus availability. This is answering the question. Should I offer my product all the time, or should I offer my product on a limited time basis? This applies to those of you guys who are considering doing what we call an evergreen course or an evergreen program, or creating a program where somebody can join all the time,

    or is this something that they can only join once, twice or three times a year? And here’s why this is important when we’re talking about how to make money. If you are new in business, this is a warning to you. If you are new in business, open and close programs are tough for businesses that have not reached consistent 10 K months in businesses that have not hit list growth.

    Like you don’t have an audience yet. If you were brand new, open and closed programs are tough because it puts all your eggs in one basket and you can’t open your program and then close it. And then two weeks later say, oh yeah, I’m going to open it again because only two people joined scarcity versus availability. There is no right or wrong way,

    but I do want to make sure that you’re thinking about how that affects your life. And you have to determine, are you okay with only making money a couple times a year? Or does it bring you personally more peace to have a consistent revenue generation every single month or quarterly or whatever that flow looks like to you? So psychologically as a business owner,

    you need to think about how it affects you. But also if you’re a new in business, I just going to send a warning about being very careful about open and closed programs, because we need to make you known. We need to have you gain traction before you close the door and not letting any new clients in, just because some marketing person told you,

    you should do it for scarcity sales, the next thing nail your minimum viable product. Okay? So this is what you’re known for. You want to determine what it is that you really want to be known for. You can be known for all the things, but it’s going to take you a long time to get there, like a lifetime. We want to pick one.

    We want to pick one thing at first and I promise you, I promise you. You’re not going to get stuck at it, but you want to pick one thing at first that you want to be known for and you sell the heck out of that painkiller, you sell the heck out of that solution and you own that space. And then you can grow into other solutions and then you can grow into other ways.

    Here is an example of that. I bet you had no idea that my first consulting firm, oh my gosh. How long ago is this? Now about 17 years ago that I am the creator of the parent coaching and baby planning industry. The whole industry, I wrote the scope of practice for it. This company is still run. See, and you leave.

    You don’t even know that probably I have entire separate business consulting firm that coaches businesses, that market to new and expecting families. And we have clients in 17 countries. It’s crazy, right? I wasn’t stuck there. And so I’m just telling you this. I promise you when you nail one thing, right? It gives you a springboard to do all the other things.

    So make sure that you’re nailing this one thing that you want to be known for. And then you can grow into other things and really sit down the last step to designing a highly valuable oper is crunching your numbers. And we call this your profit matrix. You need to understand how many people you need to sell to at your determined program price. And then you need to decide,

    and these are kind of scary numbers that nobody really tells you. So I want to make sure, you know, you need to decide how many people that you need to reach in order to convert into sales at your goal number of people to sell each month, right? So if you want a 15 or 20% sales conversion, and you want to have 10 new people join your program each month,

    then that means you need to reach that total number with your marketing, taking into consideration, converting it 15, 20, 30%, whatever you believe based on your conversion strategy that you can convert at. And so you have to crunch the numbers. You have to know your numbers, and once you know how many people you need to reach, then that leads us into your marketing strategy.

    Do you do paid ads? Do you do affiliate partnerships or are you doing everything in sweat equity, content creation and posting, and it’s really going to give you some clarity on how you’re going to hit that highly valuable, highly profitable marker. You have to look at your numbers. And so that’s answering the first part of what we’re talking about today on how to make money.

    Again, we’re talking about how to make money while still having fun. So the money part is basically you need to have an industry leading rock star signature program. That truly leads the way. And as a complete side plug, don’t forget, we have our, your signature offer masterclass that is available for you to take@anytimecruiseovertosweetlifeco.com. And you can learn more about how to be involved in the,

    your signature offer masterclass. And we go through the whole process with you in developing industry, leading signature programs and offers. Okay, now let’s talk about the second part of this. How to have fun. Now I know it’s silly question, right? Like I’m not an expert in you. You’re an expert in you, but I’m an expert in the business modeling standpoint.

    So let me just give you some tips on how to understand how to really have fun doing what you’re doing and it all starts with your business model. Do you remember in the beginning of this episode, when I’m like go grab the ultimate guide to business models and online offers that is going to give you all of the answers that you have been looking for on what’s going to make me happy,

    what I should launch. So your business model is how you work with clients and deliver your services. So examples are one-on-one coaching group coaching hybrid coaching live courses on demand courses, hybrid courses, memberships, or re occurring revenue programs, live virtual events, local events, retreats, masterminds, accelerator programs, incubator programs, licensing programs, certification programs, train the trainer programs,

    just straight business consulting. This also helps you how you want to deliver your services. Are you delivering services that are done with you done for you or consult you? And what I mean by that is how are you taking the content that you’re giving to your amazing clients? And are you giving it to them in such a way that you’re actually doing the work for them?

    Are they hiring you just to do it all and say, here you go, fix it for me. Is it a hybrid way between you helping them figure it out and doing a little bit of the work with them? Or is it strictly where you were showing up and telling them how to do it? And they have to go out and do it all on their own.

    And so the very first thing to determine how to have fun is that it all starts with your business model. And let me pull back the curtain some more and share why I know this. So I have run successful programs and profitable programs in every single one of these business models. And I’ll be honest. It affects my life as a mom. They affect my life.

    As you know, just leading my family and wanting to travel. Each business model is going to affect your life. So your choice on whichever one of these, you want to release as your signature leading profit making program. Again, you know, courses, coaching memberships, masterminds in your ability to create your blueprint. So your suite of offers and bringing it together is totally going to affect your life.

    So we want you to start at the end and inside that ultimate guide, I break down each one of these primary leading online coaching and consulting business models for you. But then what you’re going to read in there, as I tell you how it’s going to affect your life, how it affects your time, how it affects your cadence, how it affects your family,

    how it affects your travel and how it affects your bottom line and your profit. So you’re not only going to get a list of those offers that you can choose from. I tell you literally how it will affect your life and you can bank on that because I have done it. And I want to make sure that what you’re building you’re really going to love.

    So I want to save you years of building something that you hate, because somebody told you to, or because it looks sexy on an Instagram ad. So first go grab that guide. Secondly, determine your weekly cadence. Okay? So this is how you flow through your perfect week. What do you want to be doing? And I know this kind of sounds a little pie in the sky,

    but this is very serious work. You need to determine what do you want to be doing in your perfect weekly cadence when your business is where you really want it to be? Do you work out in the morning? Do you work out in the afternoon? Do you go for walks? Do you go ride your horse, you know, to go surfing,

    whatever it is, what is your family time look like? What is your time in personal development? Look like? Do you want to be reading a book or reading a book? Do you want to be helping other people? Do you want to be really active in philanthropy and giving back to your community? What does that perfect weekly cadence look like to you?

    And then also ask yourself, how do I want to be working with clients? How do I want to be connecting with my team? How do I want to be connecting with my colleagues and other business partners? The answer to this is going to give you super power, vision and clarity on what business model is going to equal that for you. How many days a week will you work?

    How many months, a year do you work? There are some business models that are so powerful. This is content licensing that literally, I only work one month, a year in my other consulting business because of the fact that we license out our courses and our content to others, the companies and companies line up literally the way for me to work one month,

    a year to approve releases of content. You can do that. You can grade that business model. If you only want to work one month. Great, let’s build that for you. And so I want you to know that that is available to you. And you know, really another question I think is really important that isn’t discussed so much is we talked about it again a few minutes ago,

    but are you comfortable only making money a couple of times a year? That can be pretty scary, you know, needing to have a six figure launch because that’s, what’s going to sustain you for the rest of the year. How does that really work for you? Does that really work for you? Is that the way that works best for your clients?

    If it does awesome. We have so many clients that love their live launch business models. I’m telling you personally, I hate them personally for me, but it doesn’t mean that my clients aren’t great at them and they love them for them. That’s what’s the power of business design is deciding what works best for you and reverse engineering it to make sure it’s making you money and really diving into those questions and getting really real with yourself about how you feel about those.

    And then the next question I want you to ask yourself is what actually makes you happy? Like, what do you love to do in your work? Do you love working with people? One-on-one do you love hosting zoom meetings where your whole community is coming together? Do you love delegating and empowering all this stuff to your team? And what do you love to do outside your work?

    What are your sports for hobbies? What hobbies did you used to have when you’re a kid that maybe you and you haven’t done? And you’re like, man, I really wish I could take up this thing again, because I was really great at it. We want to that into your business future so that you will actually be able to do that. So to be happy in your work,

    you need to design your work to make you happy to make money in your work. We need to design your offers to make you money. And that’s how we go about it. So it’s offer plus business model equals how to make money while having fun. And it’s a simple formula and it’s super surprising how many people don’t do it. And so I want to make sure that you have the power and the insight and the knowledge so that you can do it.

    You know, most people think, gosh, if I make money, I’m just going to be happy and that’s not oftentimes the case. So we want you to make a ton of money and do it in such a way that you’re going to be super-duper over the top happy. And it’s going to be no big deal for you to jump in the car and drive halfway across the country.

    After recording a podcast episode, after taking three weeks off work, just to go play with your kids or whatever it is that you want to do, I’m here to support you and give you the proven strategies to do that. The truth is honestly, when you’re happy in your life and your work, that’s when you make the most amount of money. And so to recap,

    we talked about how to make money and be happy. We broke it into two parts. We broke out, offer architecture as the primary part of this, your offer is going to be the driver. And then your business model is the part that makes you happy. The offer strategy, the value of your offer. That’s how we get you to the profit benchmarks that you want to be at.

    Your business model is how we design it within your life in a way that you’re super going to love everything that you’re doing and the ultimate guide to online offers and business models. Just go grab it. It’s totally free is going to save you years and years and years of time by seeing behind the scenes of how each one of these business models has affected our family.

    And I just lay it all out there for you, for you to consider how that could affect yours as well. You can grab that by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash online business guide, or you can also get it by texting the word guide. So just one word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. Again, text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0.

    And of course we’ll have all this in the show notes for you as well. All right. Thank you so much for tuning in. I have a very eager college student waiting outside in the driveway with his car, packed, waiting for mom to pile in and take another road trip adventure. So with that, I will talk to you guys next week.

    Be awesome. And I can’t wait to hear how you guys are using your business model and what you’ve chosen to be best for you. If we aren’t connected on Instagram yet hit me up. I’m April beach life on Instagram, and I would love to know your ultimate business model in the one you are building For high profit. All right. You guys be awesome.

    Talk to you soon.

    Episode 228: Unlocking Your Potential To Achieve Your Goals and Dreams – with April Beach and Ashlye V. Wilkerson

    Ashlye V. Wilkerson SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Join Ashlye live in our weekly SweetLife Podcast Clubhouse room on Wednesday, May 26th 12:00 ET

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This is a great show for women who know they are called to lead and need a plan to accomplish their goals.

    Summary:

    Goal setting is only as good as the plan you have to achieve them, your personal drive, and self-ownership of your goals to assure they come true. When it comes to building your future, you are the driver of that car and sometimes life and business get off track. In all cases, to get where you really want to go, you need a map that’s customized to your personal destination. On this week’s show Ashlye V. Wilkerson, empowerment and leadership coach for women, shares her Phenomenal Women Leading Pink Print Process™: 4 proven steps to get from where you are to where you want to be.

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Have framework of Ashlye’s Pink Print™ Process and know how to apply it to your life
    2. Have immediate steps you can do today to make positive change in your future
    3. Get tips on ways other entrepreneurs measure their goals to create your very own success measurement system

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

     

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate Welcome to episode number 228 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach host and founder of the Sweetlife company, where we give you proven tools and strategies to design, launch, and scale your business online for 26 years collectively with our business and four years here on the podcast.

     

    Thank you so much for joining us everything that we’re going to talk about. All of the resources, if you’re a listener, you know that you get a lot of gold from this show. This show is known for delivering business trainings and strategies that you can take to the bank, but business coaches charge thousands for you. Get them all here, free on the show.

     

    So because of that, I want to make sure you know where to find the recap and the links and the resources mentioned on today’s episode, you can cruise over to sweet life co.com simply click on podcast. And this is number 228 today on the show. This episode is for entrepreneurs in the first three phases of my sweet life business system of the start to scale up online business system.

     

    What does that mean? If you haven’t yet? We have a very short self-assessment that you can go take very simply by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz. And it will tell you exactly what phase of business growth you’re in and based on the base of business growth you’re in, there are certain things you should be focusing on this particular show falls into an appropriate tool for you to be focusing on if you were in phases one through three of that business system.

     

    So that’s where you can access it. Make sure you’ve done that all the resources are of course, proven, trusted, and they are available to you completely free again@sweetlifeco.com forward slash quiz. So today on the show, this is what you can expect. We are talking about unlocking your potential in achieving your goals and dreams with the one and only Ashley Wilkerson. I can’t wait for you to meet this powerhouse woman.

     

    She truly is dedicating her time and she’s dedicated her life to teach and elevate other professionals. And so she is such a gem and a treasure, and you are going to walk away with tangible tools. You’re even going to get access and understand her proven method to help women walk into empowerment and unlock their potential to achieve their dreams. She actually gives that to you here on the show,

     

    and we dive in a little bit deeper to help you implement that process. So there’s a lot of great things coming to you today. So let me give you a little bit of an introduction. Ashley has received distinguished honors, such as being named the who’s, who among professional women, the state 2040 Columbia business, monthly best and brightest 35 under 35 national council of Negro women living a legacy award,

     

    the ramp foundation education trailblazer Midlands chapter, the American business women’s association business associate of the year, Brooklyn Baptist church, millennial magic award, South Carolina, black pages, 2040 Columbia metropolitan magazine, top 10 Columbia young professionals, alpha Kappa alpha sorority incorporated. South Atlantic region married the vote in outstanding graduate member incorporated cluster seven leadership award United way of Midlands live United cheeky award and Columbia regional business report,

     

    2020 phenom. Wow, she’s amazing. Let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show<inaudible> Hey, you guys welcome back to the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I am so excited to be joined here by my new friend, Ashley Wilkerson. And yes, we met on clubhouse actually is an absolute rockstar. As a matter of fact, she’s one of these people that,

     

    you know, those people like you’re in a room and that’s the person walks in the room and everybody just gets happier because they’re there the whole atmosphere and the room is just like, Ashley’s here. Well, that’s what it’s like on clubhouse. You’re watching the video. You’re going to see this, you know, behind the scenes in this episode. And I’m so excited to have her on the show.

     

    Ashley, welcome to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. Tell everybody about you, what you do and your superpower. Thank you so much for having me. It’s such a pleasure, thankful for the opportunity. Love you April beach. And thank you clubhouse for club because I’ve had the opportunity to meet some phenomenal women such as yourself. So I greatly appreciate the here with the sleep life.

     

    So I am a health and thought leader of the phenomenal women leading a community. It is a women empowerment community where we strive to help women become better versions of themselves, unlock their full potential and achieve the goals and dreams that they have for themselves and their lives personally and professionally. So it is an honor to serve as a coach, to the ladies in my community,

     

    as well as a mentor and a friend, everyone in the community does not necessarily need coaching itself. They may be a part of the community for the support for the empowerment for the connections network with others is so there are different reasons why people join the community, but they do have the option to utilize the coaching services if they need to as well. And you know,

     

    I know it’s such a fantastic resource because on clubhouse people actually come in the rooms that you’re hosting and talk about, oh yeah, I’m in your community. And I love it there. And I mean, there, there’s nothing more powerful as a coach than having other people who you didn’t even ask to be there, show up and be like, oh my gosh,

     

    I love Ashley’s stuff. I love being part of this. So kudos to you for truly designing an engineering it place that is so real and safe for women to grow. So it’s amazing. The stories that I’ve heard people say about this community, and we’re going to be making sure you guys know how to tap into Ashley here. So let’s go ahead and talk about what business training,

     

    you know, this, this show is known for business trainings and strategies that other coaches charge thousands for. And so our listeners I know, are fully excited to come and show up here and be like, oh my gosh, what is Ashley going to teach today? And so today you and your area of expertise, you are going to guide us through your framework.

     

    And let me set you guys up for this framework because yes, I, I get to get a little peak to it before Ashley walks us through it today. But you guys listeners, you guys, you know how a lot of those coaches out there are saying, Hey, listen, you know, really live your dream life or walk into who you are.

     

    And there’s a lot of motivation. There’s a lot of amazing inspiration out there, but there is a gap between where we want to be and actually how to get there. Well, what is so special about Ashley is she has a method and she has a framework to actually guide you to that process. And you’re going to get a sneak peek of that framework here today.

     

    Actually, can you tell us just a little bit about how long you have been working with people and how you really got into this space of, of guiding women to empowerment and achieving their goals and dreams? Absolutely. So my background is actually in early childhood education and psychology child psychology. And so I’m a former kindergarten, first grade teacher and that’s how I entered into the space of education in the field of education.

     

    But then as my career evolved, I became a teacher trainer. My first year teaching the school district hired me to lead a series of professional development sessions, teaching other teachers how to best teach reading. And a lot of the teachers were senior level teachers, meaning they had over 10, 15 years of experience and I was a first-year teacher leading and conducting those sessions.

     

    And so in that moment, that’s when I developed a love, not only for children, but a love for adult learners as well and the entire continuum of education. And so that is really the core part of everything that I do. I believe that education is my true framework. That’s my pillar, that’s my foundation. And I bring that into everything that I do even as I facilitate and moderate sessions on clubhouse education is a part of my moderating style on clubhouse.

     

    So that’s where I started with bringing adult learners into the fold of what I do. And from there, I ended up transitioning into higher ed. And so from teaching those professional development workshops, hosting conferences, leading seminars, developing curriculum, I then transitioned into the higher ed space. And I became a adjunct professor, a professor, a sitting on a university board of trustees and being really ingrained in higher education and the adult learning process.

     

    And so transitioning into that, I initially taught in the college of education, but then I was approached by our local women’s college. And they asked me to do something that no one ever asked me prior to them, which was, Hey, can you develop a course for our women in leadership studies? Hmm. Interesting. You want me to develop that course?

     

    Because my background is in education. So the courses that I usually develop are pertaining to education it’s early childhood and elementary education and they say, yes, well, your background is education, but you’re elected to a university. It’s a state level board. You’re the youngest, you’re the only woman of color. You lead leadership initiatives in the area you’ve completed different leadership preparation programs.

     

    You would be ideal to lead the charge for developing this course and you’ll serve as the inaugural professor. And so I said, okay, I’d be happy to do that. But know that if I do that, I need the autonomy to develop the course as I see fit. And they said, sure, that’s totally fine. So I said, okay.

     

    So I developed the course and I included an educational component. My husband always says that learning happens in a conversation. That’s what I sought to do in that course. So in that course, I didn’t structure it as me being the instructional authority for 14 weeks, I actually developed the course to include a panel discussion 10 of the 14 weeks. And what we did was I focused each week on a different topic.

     

    And I feature women leading the charge in that topic area, in that area of expertise. And so one week it was women in religion. Another week, it was women in medicine. Another week, it was women in politics with another week. It was women in media. And so for 10 weeks I had women from all over the state of South Carolina,

     

    come in, we had CEOs, we had senators, we had mayors, we had everyone doctors, attorneys, everyone from all backgrounds come in and they share their trajectory. They share their journeys, they share their teachable moments. They share their backgrounds. And that is where the true learning takes place. When we can glean from the insight of others, where we can learn from their experiences where we can ask them it real time questions that we have,

     

    that’s how we then answer and unlock our full potential. That’s how we then develop ways that we want to improve, enhance what we do, what we offer, who we are or identify who we’re trying to be. So that’s how I entered into the space, but the course was for two semesters, it lasted for one year. And then that department was downsized in that course was not offered again after that.

     

    And I became a mother of two during that second semester. And so I transitioned my schedule and I transitioned my life. And when I did that, the ladies missed the community because I actually opened up the courses. I opened up the sessions of the course for people in the community who weren’t students of my class. I made it open to the public and free admission.

     

    So we had women coming in from all over to sit in and listen to these conversations. It’s a really grow and learn with the attendees and the participants and the feature speakers. And so I did that and they did not want the community to end. And so, as a result of them not wanting the community to EDD four years ago, it didn’t transition over into a Facebook community,

     

    a small intimate Facebook community, a few hundred people. And then from there, it evolved into mentoring sessions and webinars offerings and our conference, our women empowerment conference. And so it just kept evolving and evolving based on the needs of the members of the community. And it grew even more so as a result of COVID and clubhouse, I say the two CS COVID club app.

     

    And so I grew as a result of those two days, and now we have a platform on clubhouse. We have a platform on Facebook, we have touchpoints on other social media processes. And then we also have a targeted group on mighty networks through our mentoring circle. So it’s really evolved over the past four years. It’s evolved significantly. So over the past year,

     

    as a result of COVID in clubhouse and yeah, that’s how we’ve started. Okay. So many this could go in a million directions from there. I’m going to, I’m going to hold to the promise of stain so that you can teach everybody your, your method here. A couple of things about this for our listeners. I think it’s really important for you guys to pick up on,

     

    and I want to just highlight this. And what Ashley was saying is that you see the evolution of the process of business development. So often it is tempting to think that you want to start at the very end that you want to launch this thing. And it’s just going to be what it is. As a matter of fact, I had a client this morning that was struggling to move forward because she wanted it to be perfect.

     

    She wanted it to be at the end, but it wasn’t an evolution of the business. And Ashley’s story is a perfect example, how your ideas and your intellectual property evolves and grows. And so this is just such a great example of such a powerful story. And so want our listeners to take that away. We could have just end the episode right there and just say,

     

    see what Ashley did. It’s it’s so cool. So I, I just appreciate you sharing that so much. It’s just a lot of wisdom and business growth and development there. So as we’re sitting here right now, we did meet on clubhouse. I actually remember now, I think we’re in one of John Lee’s rooms and you were asking a question about mighty networks,

     

    which is a whole nother conversation that we can have. And I think that was the first time that I ever saw you. And I love how you have curated a bunch of different places for conversations to happen. So smart, the way you’ve done that in here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, we’re extending the conversation too, as well with your method. This is an very important topic because of the fact that this is what every woman really wants,

     

    but yet again, they lack the framework to get to this injury result. There is an idea there is this picture painted and there’s a feeling inside women of, of what they want to be and who they know they’re called to be. But there’s usually these barriers to get there in this process. So start guiding us through your process. First of all,

     

    what is your process called so that everybody knows the phenomenal pink print? Yes. Okay. It is absolutely amazing. So this pink Framp process is Ashley’s and you ladies can bank on it. I will tell you, so, you know, kicking this off, you said the very first step in this process is really helping women to identify their goals. Can you walk us through the first step in this process?

     

    Yep. So oftentimes, and I work with women on all ends of the spectrum. I work with a women who are transitioning out of college and they don’t know exactly what they want to do to begin their adult lives in their careers. I work with women who moms and significant others, and they spent a lot of time pouring into their children and their family so much so that they feel they’ve lost themselves,

     

    or don’t quite know what they want to do next in their lives for themselves. And then I work with women who have had amazingly successful careers. They’ve achieved all the goals, they’ve done all the things, and they’re still stuck with what’s next, right? And so those are three different age points, but it’s really the same pain point that they’re experiencing.

     

    Who am I, what do I want to do? Who do I want to become important aspect, an important element of our journey. And as women, we experience that element several times through, out our lifespan, our lifetime, our journey. And so really, really focusing in on what goals do we have and what do we want to do next is so important.

     

    And you have to really map out what those goals are. And those goals are not just for your professional side, it’s for your personal side too. So what are your personal goals? What are your professional goals? Where do you see yourself in the next year, two years, three years, 10 years, 15 years. Where do you want to be?

     

    What are the goals you want to achieve during that time period? Where do you want to go? That is so critical. And that’s the first step of the pink print is identifying. What are those goals? I have a question for you. Do you find that when women come to this place and they want to identify their goals, do they ever feel,

     

    I guess guilt is the word I’m thinking of? Do they ever feel guilty or shy or embarrassed? Because sometimes I know the women have huge goals. Like I want to be a TEDx speaker, or I want to do these really big things. And are women sometimes afraid of actually sharing how big they really want to be, because they feel bad about that.

     

    Is that something that you see very often? So I see a couple of things. I see the confidence. Isn’t always there to work towards or to go towards those things. And so they’re not confident in who they are, their abilities, their value. They don’t feel worthy of attaining certain things at high levels. They feel embarrassed sharing. They get caught into the comparison trap of,

     

    I don’t have what this person has. I haven’t done what this person’s done. I haven’t attained with this person hesitate. So I must not be able to get those things. And so they get sucked into that comparison trap that happens oftentimes. And then ultimately, sometimes the issue really is being able to name exactly what it is that you want for your life,

     

    what that desire is, and then be able to walk towards that safe. And that’s why the pink print is so important because it helps you to name it. It’s to identify. What’s a part of it. What are the components of it what’s required to achieve it. And then it takes you through that roadmap of identifying strategies for doing that thing in achieving that thing.

     

    Wow, it’s so powerful. Absolutely. And I can imagine that that is you have a great deal of experience in all these different situations, all these different reasons why women come to the table with a big heart’s desire, but yet all the excuses are the reasons why that they maybe shouldn’t or don’t deserve to achieve or do those things. So again, why your pink print is so powerful.

     

    So after somebody goes through this process of really identifying what those goals are, what’s the next step? What do they do? So then the next thing I have them do is to get focused, gain clarity, because it’s one thing to have all of these goals. But if you are actively trying to accomplish all of these goals, but they don’t contribute to each other,

     

    or they don’t compliment each other in any way, then you’re going to find yourself And Running all over the place. Right? And so you have to gain clarity and you have to get focused in, in order to do that. I walk them through prioritizing their goals. All right? So all of these are goals. Ours. I have a lot of goals,

     

    but let’s put these goals into priority. And that priority is up to how you see fit, the priority that you set for your goals. So it could be a time priority. It could be a finance priority. It could be whatever it is, whatever way you define that, how already system it’s neither right or wrong, it’s yours. So you identify how you’re going to define that.

     

    And then you prioritize it that way. Once you do that, once you prioritize it, then you go through and you get focused and you gain clarity on these are my goals. This is how I prioritize it. This is my roadmap. Because now that you have this, guess what the books you read are going to be determined by this rooms you attend on clubhouse are going to be determined by this.

     

    The conversations you participate in are going to be determined by this, the things you watch and listen to, they’re going to be determined, this, the actions that you take, they’re going to be determined by this. And that’s what clarity and gaining focus for you. Woo that’s Right. That’s so great. So powerful. So powerful. I mean, just,

     

    I had somebody called the other day a shiny squirrel. So it’s this, it’s this shiny object and squirrel absolute fix. And I think also when women can, I don’t know, everybody relates and sees things the way I do, but I know a lot of us are visual and we need to see things. And when we actually see that pink print,

     

    we can actually see it there. And there’s just so much power in, in having something come to life in this very clear action plan. Okay. So somebody has gone through this process, they’ve gone through the process. They have this clarity, they have their roadmap that you’ve guided them through. They are seeing things the way they have never seen it before.

     

    Almost a simplified way. A very, like all the noises calmed down. They’re hyper-focused, their goals are crystallized what now? So this is the step where we actually develop the pink print itself. One of the words that I use in, within my framework is called smart goals. Okay. And so for smart goals, you’re breaking down the acronym, smart.

     

    You are making sure you have all of the components that are a part of that goal. So you have the specifics, you write specific details, information needed for that goal. All right. And then the M is for measurement. How do you measure if you’ve achieved that goal? How do you measure your progress? If you are on track towards completion of that goal,

     

    what’s the measurement that you’re going to use? The a is for achievable. Is this goal achievable for you with the time, with your effort, with your skillset? Can you achieve it? The next letter R is for realistic. All right. Is this something that’s realistic for you to do? Is it realistic within a time frame? Is it realistic within your skill set?

     

    Is it realistic based on the measurement? Is it realistic based on the specifics of the details you’ve identified. And then the T is for time, you set a time for when you want to start this goal and you set an anticipated time for when you would like for this goal to be complete so time. So I use smart goals, which is a framework within my framework of developing your peat print.

     

    And once you’ve already identified those goals, you’ve gained clarity. You’ve prioritize those goals. You’ve made sure that those goals are smart goals. Now it’s about developing your strategy within your pink print. So what are your strategies for achieving each one of these smart goals? What are those action items that you need to complete for each smart goal to be achieved? And that’s the pink print that is genius.

     

    That is absolute genius. As someone who teaches people, how to develop frameworks, this is why people in your programs are so successful is because you have taken the time to truly create a transformational program for them using these frameworks and frameworks within frameworks. And I have a lot of listeners that are laughing. Cause we talk about frameworks within frameworks and methods within frameworks here on this show all the time.

     

    And sometimes they get our listeners are like really confused about that. Cause they’re trying to do it. What’s the difference? What comes first, a method or framework? Well, this is a perfect example of how Ashley has brought this to life in her transformational program. So great, amazing explanation and job. So I have a question for you also, because this is constantly a topic you’re on the show.

     

    Totally random question. How do you find people tend to measure their own results? What are some examples of the way people? Obviously the goal is different. So that’s going to dictate the measurement, but just generally speaking, if some of our listeners are like, gosh, you know, I really, I really want to start measuring my results. What are some examples of the ways people can measure their own results as you’ve seen your students do in your programs.

     

    And so some of this is a probing thing and I have to probe out of them, what I really want, what I need to know about what they want to achieve. And so for instance, one of my clients, they knew that they, they wanted to sell their new book project, right? And some question for her was how many units do you want to sell?

     

    And I said, Hmm, let me think about it. And I said, well, you need to identify, you need to know how many units you’re trying to sell. Because knowing how many units you trying to sell will help guide you when you are utilizing your strategies. And you are really targeting in on your book promotion, you’ll know exactly how many people you want to target.

     

    How many groups you need to speak to. If you’re on track for selling the number of books that you’re trying to sell. And then I challenged her to take it a step further. Now that you know how many books you want to sell. I want you to break that down into three categories that you offer. How many paper book, back books,

     

    how many hardback books, how many Kindle versions? No, what you are striving to do, and then identify the measurement. So if a business owner says, I want to increase my revenue. By how much, if a business owner says, I want to sell more products, how many units, if someone says, I want to lose weight, how many pounds,

     

    if I want to save money, how much do you want to say? If I want to eliminate debt, how much debt do you need to eliminate? Knowing what that number in that measurement is helps you to then target in, right? If you’re trying to make an additional $20,000 a month and you have services and products that are 1000, 5,000, 10,000 a year,

     

    trying to make an additional $20,000 a month. Okay? It’s different to say, I’m trying to make an additional $20,000 a month versus saying, I’m trying to close two, $10,000 clients, right? Close $4 clients to close $21,000 clients. Great example. We took our goal from I’m trying to make more money a month. I’m trying to make an additional $20,000 a month.

     

    I’m trying to close $21,000 clients too. I’m trying to close five of four or $5,000 clients too. I’m trying to close to $10,000 clients. Yes. Yeah. A hundred percent. What a great example of that. What Ashley just shared. So bring it down, down, down, down, ask yourself more specifically, more specifically, more specifically such a great example.

     

    Okay. So your students, they’ve gone through this point. They have their pink print, by the way, such a cool name of your signature framework. I love it. And they have, they have their phenomenal women leading pink print. Yes. What happens next? And I already know what you’re going to say. And obviously our listeners are probably like,

     

    okay, well then they need to do it. But like, let’s actually talk about what this really looks like in real life. What’s what’s next. So all of my clients will tell you that I’d say three things to them. Number one, take action. Number two. Don’t let me work harder on your goals than you’re working on your own goals.

     

    And number three, I will fire my clients. Meaning I will fire you. If you’re not taking action, I will fire you. If I don’t see you committed to your process, I will fire you. If you’re not making progress, I will fire you. If you’re not doing your homework, which are whatever the action items are. I will fire you.

     

    If you’re not honoring your commitment in yourself and your investment in yourself a year time needed support into yourself, into things that you want to achieve. Make absolutely that you’re taking action that you’re working hard on your goals is that you’re honoring the commitment with yourself. Amen. That is so important. And I love that you fire your clients. I think that is such an important thing to do.

     

    It’s almost like you’re, there you go. I’m going to fire you because something needs to change here. And I, and I, and what was your second thing? Don’t let me work harder on your goals than you. We’re going to, we’re going to get that out. That’s going to be an Ashley Wilkerson quote that goes out how good This podcast episode.

     

    All right. So my team, as you’re listening to this, pull that quote out of that is like the winner. It’s just amazing. And there’s one other point you said, you know, as we’re wrapping this up in the beginning is that you said to me before, behind the scenes, before we started recording and I wrote it down, cause I was like,

     

    it’s just so important. Is it? You said, we, we bring all of what we are to what we do. We buy all of who we are to everything we do to everything we do that is also so important because I think that especially those of our listeners that are transferring from corporate and really getting into entrepreneurship or those people who have been entrepreneurs for a great deal of time,

     

    which is a lot of our most registers. Now in that scale phase of their business, there is this division where people think, okay, well this is life and this is business, but I love your philosophy. It’s a philosophy that my husband and I abide to as well and our family. It really is. It’s everything who you are, is brought into this.

     

    And I love how you teach creating this cohesive harmony between everything we were designed to do for the people that we were called to serve. And so I, I really love everything that you teach Ashley, and I love you being here on the show. I appreciate it. Thoroughly enjoyed myself. You just a gem. I absolutely love it. So let’s talk about how you guys can connect with Ashley.

     

    So as you know, now we have our regular weekly Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast room on clubhouse happening every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time where you guys get to jump in and jam with our guests. Talk about the topic of this week. So this week, especially if you’re alive subscriber to this show on all of our podcasts listening channels, which is everyone,

     

    as you guys know, even Pandora and apple music, now we’re everywhere as you’re listening, make sure you join us on Wednesday and you get to connect with Ashley directly as an extension of this podcast episode. So she is going to be there like she always is on clubhouse. Totally. They’re pouring into you and taking your questions and workshopping with you beyond what we’re talking about here on the episode of this show.

     

    And besides that, okay, so those of you guys are like, oh my gosh, Ashley is exactly what I need. I’m ready to move. I want my pink print right now. Ashley, how can people move forward and get in line as far as joining your program or working with you privately? Absolutely. So they have a few ways they can do it.

     

    They can connect with me personally. It’s a S H L Y E V on all social media platforms. You can connect with me at Ashley B on all social media platforms. They can also go to my link tree slash Ashley B. And when they go to my link tree slash Ashley B, they will be able to see, they’ll see the community group that’s on Facebook,

     

    the free community groups. They’ll also see the option to get registered. So tin our second annual moving and leading phenomenally conference taking place on October 23rd, they will see details for coaching with me. They can join the group, mentoring, coaching circle community, or they can register to sign up for a free consultation with me for one-on-one coaching services. So either way,

     

    whether they are in the free community, whether they are joining us on clubhouse. They’ll also see my, all of my social media connections on my late tree, so they can email me directly. They can tap into any and all of my social media pages right there on that page. Everything is right there, easy peasy for them to access me and access the phenomenal women leading.

     

    Awesome. Thank you so much for being a guest on the show. I just have to send, or it’s my pleasure. Absolutely. For everything you’re doing and thank you, clubhouse for our listeners already been on there yet. So they’re Android listeners. So I promise you guys, you guys are getting on there soon in the meantime, connect with us on Instagram here.

     

    And of course this is episode number 228 of these two great live entrepreneur podcasts. So we will make sure that all of the show notes are available for you@sweetlifeco.com click on the podcast and you guys know the drill episode two 28. We’ll have all the goods. All right, thanks again, Ashley. Appreciate you.

    Episode 225: How To Structure Your Suite Of Online Offers – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Business Models

    Who This Episode is Great For:

     

    Summary:

    Online services, courses, memberships and coaching programs are a great way to scale your business. However, how you structure your suite of offers can make or break your business. In this week’s show April Beach shares her Strategic Business Design Method™ and how you can design your company for long term lifestyle and profit goals now, and why launching any program outside this method is a risk. 

    At the end of this episode you will:

    1. Get the high level steps of April’s Strategic Business Design Method™
    2. Know where to start when considering your offers
    3. Have clarity on what you should be working on right now

    Resources Mentioned:

     
     


    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


    Full Show Transcript:

     

    You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate guys, and welcome to So number 225 here on the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. We’re going to go ahead and dive right in today. And we were talking about how to structure your suite of offers.

     

    I know this is a common question. I’m literally in clubhouse rooms every single week, talking about this, because there’s so many things that you could do that you could launch in your business to scale, but who knows is that the right thing for you? Is that what we really need for you in your company? And that’s is that really what’s going to equal the profit plan that you want.

     

    So in this week show, I’m actually breaking down a process that I take entrepreneurs through called strategic business design. And so we’re going to dive into all things, how to structure your suite of offers to give you the results that you want. So let’s do a little bit of housekeeping first, and then we’ll go ahead and get started. This episode is for established entrepreneurs.

     

    So this is for those of you guys who are in phase three of my suite life business launch system. It’s also called the start to scale up system. Basically it is a roadmap of five different steps and you know, which phase of business that you’re in, it’s really important. You know, where you are. So you know what you should be working on,

     

    so you can scale your business faster. And so if you’re in phase three, this episode is for you. So keep tuning in here and we’re going to go ahead and dive in if you aren’t really sure what phase of business you’re in simply go to Sweetlife code.com forward slash quiz, and you can take the quiz there and get your exact download customized to where you are in business right now.

     

    So this is what we’re talking about on today’s show. We’re talking about the fact that online services courses, masterminds, coaching programs are all a great way to scale your business. However, how you structure your suite of offers can make or break your business, your lifestyle and your profit plan. So on this show, I am breaking down my strategic business design method,

     

    and I’m giving it to you high level, because frankly, it’s so simple. You can run with it high level right now. And I want you to leave this show with exactly what to do to get started to design your suite of offers. At the end of this show, you are going to know exactly the high-level steps of what that method is.

     

    You are going to know where you can start right now in considering your suite of offers. And you’re going to have clarity of what you are going for in the future and how that actually equals the lifestyle results that you want. So if that’s what you’re here for this show is for you. Let’s go ahead and get started. Okay. Welcome. Thanks so much for hanging out with me today.

     

    This is episode number 225 here on the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast and all the show notes and everything that we’re going to talk about on today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com, simply click on the podcast. And this is episode number two 25. And today we’re talking about how to structure your suite of offers. So I’m going to give you three high-level steps and within each step,

     

    we’re going to break them down. So if you have a piece of paper and a pen, take notes, if you’re on the go join me in clubhouse live this week, because I’m going to be taking your specific offer design questions on Wednesdays at noon Eastern time. And if you’re not yet, you can follow me on clubhouse at April beach. You’ll get notification of that room.

     

    And I would love to include you and workshop this with you. So let’s go ahead and dive in. First of all, let’s talk about why this is important. I coach entrepreneurs obviously all the time. That’s what I do. And what we’re seeing is a huge trend of companies coming to us, new and established companies coming to us who have launched a course or launched a membership,

     

    launched a grouping of offers because everybody else is doing it. And a couple of things are happening. Number one, they’re failing, they’re falling on their face and nobody’s showing them number two, what they’re doing for the people that are successful, doesn’t really align with what they wanted to do and why they became an entrepreneur in the first place. And what happens is they are tapped out.

     

    They haven’t designed their offers strategically in a way that is going to deliver a couple of things. Number one, the profit that they want. Number two, the lifestyle that they want and number three, the transformation that their clients want and need and deserve from them. So they’re tapped out. They don’t know how to do more. They don’t know how to create this,

     

    what we call a suite of offers. And this is how we build profitable million dollar coaching businesses that if you want, if you do it right, you can turn around some day and sell it. And so what I’m going to do is I’m going to take you guys through high level. These are the three steps of my strategic business design method. And people fly to me here in Colorado,

     

    all the time to meet with me for one day to go through this process with them. This is a very important process. And I really want to make sure that it’s in your hands. To course, I would love to have you join me here in Colorado or a virtual strategic business design session, but let’s get you started where you are right now and make sure that,

     

    you know, the steps of going through this. When you go through a process called strategic business design, you’re going to end up in three to five years from now with a company that you really, really love. You’re going to end up walking into that brand influence that you’ve wanted. So what you want to be known for how you want to be seen,

     

    and really in my opinion, one of the most important parts is you’re going to end up with the life that you you’ve listened to this show before. If you’re new, welcome. Hi, it’s nice to meet you. I travel with my kids four to five months a year, and it’s broken up. I’m always on a plane. We’re always somewhere adventuring.

     

    And that is because I learned at a very young age from my parents, how to design businesses for lifestyle freedom in this as a process, really high level. And so I want to make sure you have it. So let’s go ahead and dive into step number one. And I’m sure this sounds so crazy. You’re like, Oh my gosh, this isn’t,

     

    this isn’t revolutionary April. When I tell you what step number one is, but it’s really important to most people skip it. So step number one is starting with the end in mind. See what I said? You’re probably thinking, Oh great. I’m listening to this podcast. And I’ve already heard all this before everybody says, start with the end in mind,

     

    but let’s, let’s actually talk about what this means for you and why this is important. So starting with the end in mind means that you’re going to take a second. And I really mean take a second, just sit for a minute and stop in envision. What do you want your average week to look like in three to five years, that means who do you want to be working with?

     

    What do you want that to actually look like? So I want you to dive in. I want you to close your eyes unless you’re driving, don’t close your eyes and I want you to picture yourself, what are you doing on an average week? And in an average day, what does your average day look like? And perhaps what is your average month look like?

     

    And here’s some questions I want you to see in your own mind when we’re going through this exercise, how are you working with your clients, for your customers? What does your interaction between you and your customers actually look like? Where are you working from? Are you working from an office space? Are you working from your home? Are you working from a sailboat?

     

    Where are you working from? I want you to really feel both of those things. Cause both of those things that equals the business model, we need to design for you. And then, I mean, it’s not just a pipe dream and that’s why this is pretty crazy deep, strategic business planning. This is not a business coach coming in here and saying,

     

    decide that you want to be on a boat. You’ll never get that from me. We need to talk about where you want to be. And I’m going to give you the exact steps to actually make that happen. The next process is I want you to go through and who are you talking to? Who are you working with? Who flows through your day with you?

     

    Who flows through your activities, who is on your team and how, what, how are they operating? What does that look like to you? The next question, after you go through and imagine that I want you to figure out what is happening. That is not work-related and this is where the lifestyle entrepreneur aside comes into play. What are you doing?

     

    That’s not work-related. How are you interacting with the people that you love? What does that look like in? What do those relationships look like? And then when you go through this process to actually envision this three to five years from now, really want you to see it because these answers equal the business model and they are going to lead to the suite of offers that you’re going to want to create in your business.

     

    Along those lines, I do have a tool for you. Go grab it. It is a 17 page ultimate guide to online business models. If you have not grabbed that yet, grab it. It breaks down every single type of offer structure that you could do for an online business. And I tell you exactly how it’s going to affect your life. You can grab that simply by going to sweet life,

     

    co.com clicking on podcast number two 25, and we’ll make sure there’s a link here for you in the show notes. So that’s step number one is starting with the end in mind, but I need you. Most people actually don’t go through this process because of the fact that they think it’s just this pipe dream they’re building. Now we’re going to go a step deeper.

     

    We’re going to reverse engineer it even more. So hang with me here. Okay. So after you’ve gone through that process to really figure out what that looks like for you, what you want that to look like for you? Step number two is curating your suite of offers, programs and products. So here is what I mean by this. What programs do you offer under your business and your brand?

     

    What types of programs do you want to offer to people? What do you want to be serving them? In what regard? How do you want to be coaching them? What type of results you want to give to them? So what programs plural make up your suite of offers? The next question to that is what are the business models of each one of those programs you could in your business only have one signature program that brings in half a million dollars a year.

     

    You don’t have to have multiple programs, but most companies do. I’m a big advocate for multiple streams of income. And frankly, you know, if you only have one program, we’re not really creating a journey for your clients to grow with you and to keep clients long term. And so I am a big advocate of creating a suite of programs that creates a journey for your clients to work with you for years and years to come as they grow.

     

    So in your mind, what programs are you offering when you imagine yourself, five years down the road from now, and what is the business model of each offer and what I mean by business model? These are the common terms is one of course is one, a membership site is one a live virtual event. Do you have retreats? Do you offer one-on-one coaching?

     

    What is the collection of programs and the business model of each that is going to help you get to where you want to be doing in an average week, in an average month and an average year in here’s one thing I want you to lean in on. And we do talk about this a lot in clubhouse. This is what we teach in my masterclass on how to create your signature programs is I don’t want you to be afraid to create a custom business model and deliver your programs in a way that meets your needs while also still delivering a transformation to your clients.

     

    If you want to do a hybrid mix of models, which every single one of our clients are now, don’t be afraid to do that. Don’t be afraid to think outside the box. And of course, what you create here and what we’re thinking about and workshopping in your brain right now in this podcast, it’s going to change as technology changes. And you know,

     

    we get three, five years down the road and we bring in artificial intelligence and virtual reality and all these other cool, amazing things. But we need to start with somewhere and I want to make sure you have the roadmap to do this. Next question I want you to ask is what digital or physical products also make up your offer suite? Do you have any,

     

    do you have a book? Do you have t-shirts that you sell? You know, what sort of digital or physical products might also be in that suite of offers? Are you writing your third book or your fourth broker? Are you launching a podcast? What other ways are you contributing to the excellence of your clients? And then here is where the hard work comes in.

     

    And this is where most of you guys are going to totally do. But those keep listening are going to be the ones that actually build the life that you want it, your business. The next part is to value and create a profit forecast for each one of your offers. So you need to sit down and write the forecast of sales for each one of your offers and the value each one of your offers holds separately and collectively in crunch those numbers and make sure they’re going to equal that lifestyle you want.

     

    And then the third step is to Herman, what do you need to build right now? What do you need to start building right now in the next 30, 60 or 90 days? What’s the top signature program that you want to launch or gain traction on first? What do you want to be known for first? And most importantly, how does this first program,

     

    we are launching fit into that longterm suite of offers. And that’s what I want you to lean in on. And those are the questions that you should be able to answer. If you can not answer those questions, you know where to find me, this is my jam. This is what I do. You can send me an Instagram DM. I would happy to be happy to set up a strategy session with you.

     

    But the first thing is we need to do one thing really, really well. We can’t do all the things at once. And it’s also really hard with all the noise across marketing to become known for something. So I want you to lean into this one first signature program that you are building, and you need to see and understand how that fits, how that one brick,

     

    if you will fits into the bigger house that you’re building with all the other bricks or signature programs that you will create. And once you nail your signature offer, once you’ve scaled, this first that you’re doing in that includes the program delivery, you’ve reached your first benchmark of your profit goal. Then you can move on to developing the next program in your suite of offers.

     

    And as you go, and as you grow, your clients go and grow with you. It’s an amazing thing. And when it’s well thought out, and there’s a strategy, I guarantee you, it works every single time when we don’t add in strategy and tactics to creating business design, that’s where entrepreneurs run into trouble. And so I wanted to download you on this today,

     

    and I wanted to give you these really three high-level steps. Literally people fly to me in Colorado to spend a day with me to go through this and design this for their company. And I want you to have these tools to your you’re my people, you’re my podcast family. And thank you so much for listening to the show. And I’ve been getting a lot of questions about this lately.

     

    And so I really wanted to make sure that one of these shows here, as soon as I could fit it in, we were talking about these high level steps. So this is my strategic business design process. And I want you to have it. Let’s go ahead and recap. They’re very basic, right? It doesn’t have to be complicated to build a profitable business is a matter of fact,

     

    simple is what creates traction, both for you and for your followers and for your students, your clients, your customers. So number one is starting with the end in mind, but in a much deeper way than you have done before, it’s understanding how, what you want your life to look like is controlled by the business model. You choose. Number two is curating your suite of offers programs and products,

     

    and not only doing that, but then going the extra step to creating a profit forecast for each of them and understanding and making sure that the hard work you’re doing is in fact, going to equal the profit that you need in order to create the lifestyle and the impact that you want to make. And then the third step is to understand what you need to do first and build right now and the next 30,

     

    60, 90 days, what you need to be leaning in on what signature program that brick and the, in the big building of your whole house has to happen. First. What’s the first brick that has to be laid. And this isn’t for new businesses. As a matter of fact, if you are a new business, thank you for listening to this,

     

    but these are the things that we work with with established companies, established experts that are scaling offline to online, or who have just done a lot of things. I think one of the biggest confusion, places in this are companies and entrepreneurs that have launched a whole bunch of things. And it’s all just a bunch of things thrown out there. There’s no strategic business design plan.

     

    And so it’s taking what, you know, what you’ve done well and putting it into a strategic plan because I really, I want you to have what I have. I feel so blessed, but it’s taken a lot of hard work and it’s a lot of strategy. And it’s a lot of understanding how the importance of reverse engineering, your business model equals that lifestyle and that,

     

    that you want. And so this is a wrap on today’s show. I want you to lean in from here, and I would highly recommend connecting with man clubhouse. I would love to workshop with you on this in lean in. And instead of saying, I want to launch a course or I want onto a mastermind, or I want to launch a membership.

     

    I recommend that you go through the process of strategic business design to understand how it affects your life. And truly what’s the best transformation that you can give to your clients. Are those business models, truly the best ways that you can get them, the transformational predictable measurable results that we want you to give them in your suite of offers. So that’s what we talked about today on the show.

     

    Thank you so much for spending time with me here. Again, this is a sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 225. I know your time is super valuable. So I hope that you felt that it was valuable spending this time here, listening to me, and I would love to connect with you further. As I said on clubhouse, you can follow me@aprilbeachandalloftheshownotesandeverythingwetalkedabouttodaycanbefoundbyvisitingsweetlifeco.com,

     

    simply click on the podcast button. And this is episode number 225. Thanks so much. And I can’t wait to talk to you guys again with another proven business training. You can take it Next week. Bye bye. For now.

    Episode 206: 3 Tips To Put Family First As An Entrepreneur & Create More Time Freedom – with April Beach

    SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

     

    Episode Bonuses:

    Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

    Who This Episode is Great For:

    This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
     
    Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

    Summary:

    Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
     
    In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

    At the End of This Episode You Will

    1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time</